Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Optical Networking Reference Manual
Cisco Systems 15454 is a high-performance optical networking platform that provides a comprehensive suite of services for the transport of voice, data, and video traffic. With its advanced features and capabilities, the Cisco Systems 15454 is ideal for use in a variety of applications, including metro, regional, and long-haul networks.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
Product and Documentation Release 7.0
August 2012
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA http://www.cisco.com
800 553-NETS (6387)
Text Part Number: 78-17191-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this
URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks . Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, Release 7.0
Copyright © 2002-2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
78-17191-01
C O N T E N T S
About this Manual
xxxix
xxxix
xli
xli
xlii
xliii
xliv
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
l
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
l
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
l
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
l
Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1-1
1-2
1-3
1.2.1 Reversible Mounting Bracket
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1.4.4 Alarm Interface Panel Replacement
1-13
1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-18
1.5.3.2 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-21
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
iii
Contents
1.5.5.2 MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-32
1-33
1-37
1-37
1-37
1.7.1 Twisted Pair Wire-Wrap Cables
1-37
1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters
1-38
1-39
1-44
1-50
1.11 Cable Routing and Management
1-52
1-53
1.11.2 Fiber Management Using the Tie-Down Bar
1-54
1.11.3 Coaxial Cable Management
1-54
1.11.4 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management
1-55
1.11.5 AMP Champ Cable Management
1-55
1-55
1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
1-56
1-60
1-61
1.14.1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements
1-62
1-62
1-63
1.15 Power and Ground Description
1-63
1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections
1-64
1.16.1 Alarm Contact Connections
1-66
1-67
1-67
1.16.4 TL1 Craft Interface Installation
1-68
1-68
1-69
1-72
1-72
1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
1-73 iv
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
Common Control Cards
2-1
2.1 Common Control Card Overview
2-1
2-1
2-3
2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility
2-3
2-6
2-7
2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators
2-8
2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators
2-13
2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
2.4.3 XCVT Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
2-17
2.4.4 XCVT Card-Level Indicators
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2.5.3 XC10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
2-21
2.5.4 XC10G Card-Level Indicators
2-21
2.5.5 XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
2-22
2-22
2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality
2-23
2-25
2.6.3 XC-VXC-10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
2-26
2.6.4 XC-VXC-10G Card-Level Indicators
2-26
2.6.5 XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
2-27
2-27
2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
2-28
2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-31
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel
2-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
v
Contents
Electrical Cards
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3.2.1 EC1-12 Slots and Connectors
3-4
3.2.2 EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-4
3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
3-5
3.2.4 EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-5
3.2.5 EC1-12 Port-Level Indicators
3-6
3-6
3.3.1 DS1N-14 Features and Functions
3-6
3.3.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Slot Compatibility
3-7
3.3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-7
3.3.4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
3-8
3.3.5 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card-Level Indicators
3-8
3.3.6 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Port-Level Indicators
3-9
3-9
3.4.1 DS1/E1-56 Slots and Connectors
3-9
3.4.2 DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-10
3.4.3 DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators
3-11
3.4.4 DS1/E1-56 Port-Level Indicators
3-12
3-12
3.5.1 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Slots and Connectors
3-13
3.5.2 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-13
3.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-14
3.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Port-Level Indicators
3-15
3-15
3.6.1 DS3/EC1-48 Slots and Connectors
3-15
3.6.2 DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-16
3.6.3 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators
3-17
3.6.4 DS3/EC1-48 Port-Level Indicators
3-18
3-18
3.7.1 DS3i-N-12 Slots and Connectors
3-18
3.7.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-20
3.7.3 DS3i-N-12 Port-Level Indicators
3-20
3.8 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
3-20
3.8.1 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Slots and Connectors
3-21
3.8.2 DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
vi 78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators
3-23
3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators
3-24
3-24
3.9.1 DS3XM-6 Slots and Connectors
3-24
3.9.2 DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-24
3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G
3-25
3.9.4 DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators
3-25
3.9.5 DS3XM-6 Port-Level Indicators
3-26
3-26
3.10.1 Backplane Configurations
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-28
3.10.7 DS3XM-12 Slots and Connectors
3-29
3.10.8 DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-29
3.10.9 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-30
3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators
3-31
Optical Cards
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-4
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card
4-5
4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-7
4.2.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-7
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card
4-7
4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators
4-9
4.3.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Port-Level Indicators
4-9
4-9
4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-10
4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-11
4-11
4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-12
4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-13
4-13
4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-14
4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
4-15
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
vii
Contents viii
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card
4-15
4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators
4-17
4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Port-Level Indicators
4-17
4-17
4.8.1 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-18
4.8.2 OC48 IR 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-19
4-19
4.9.1 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-20
4.9.2 OC48 LR 1550 Port-Level Indicators
4-21
4.10 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card
4-21
4.10.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-22
4.10.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-23
4.11 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card
4-23
4.11.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-24
4.11.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators
4-25
4.12 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards
4-25
4.12.1 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators
4-27
4.12.2 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Port-Level Indicators
4-27
4-27
4.13.1 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators
4-29
4.13.2 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Port-Level Indicators
4-29
4.14 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card
4-29
4.14.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-30
4.14.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators
4-31
4.15 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card
4-31
4.15.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-32
4.15.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
4-33
4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
4-33
4.16.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-38
4.16.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
4-38
4.17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card
4-38
4.17.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators
4-40
4.17.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators
4-41
4.18 15454_MRC-12 Multirate Card
4-41
4.18.1 Slot Compatibility by Cross-Connect Card
4-42
4-43
4.18.3 15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators
4-45
4.18.4 15454_MRC-12 Port-Level Indicators
4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards
4-46
4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators
4-49
4.19.2 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC-192/STM-64 Any Reach Port-Level
4-49
4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs
4-49
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-52
Ethernet Cards
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-5
5.2.2 E100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
5-5
5.2.3 E100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
5-5
5.2.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
5-5
5-6
5-7
5.3.2 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators
5-7
5.3.3 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators
5-7
5.3.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
5-8
5-8
5-10
5.4.2 E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
5-10
5.4.3 E1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
5-10
5.4.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
5-10
5-11
5.5.1 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators
5-13
5.5.2 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators
5-13
5.5.3 Cross-Connect Compatibility
5-13
5-14
5-15
5.6.2 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-15
5.6.3 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-15
5-16
5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
ix
Contents
5-17
5-18
5.7.3 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-18
5.7.4 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-18
5-19
5.8.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
5-20
5.8.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
5-21
5.8.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
5-21
5-21
5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators
5-23
5.9.2 ML100X-8 Port-Level Indicators
5-23
5.9.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
5-23
5-23
5.10.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
5-25
5.10.2 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
5-25
5.10.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
5-25
5-25
5.11.1 CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators
5-27
5.11.2 CE-100T-8 Port-Level Indicators
5-27
5.11.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
5-28
5-28
5.12.1 CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-30
5.12.2 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-31
5.12.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
5-31
5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs
5-31
5-31
5-32
5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs
5-33
5-35
Storage Access Networking Cards
6-1
6-1
6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators
6-3
6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
x 78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
6-5
6-5
6.2.2.4 Differential Delay Features
6-6
6.2.2.5 Interoperability Features
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
Card Protection
7-1
7.1 Electrical Card Protection
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-4
7.1.2.2 1:N Protection Guidelines
7-4
7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
7-5
7-11
7.2.2 High-Density BNC Protection
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-13
7.3.2 Optimized 1+1 Protection
7-13
7-14
7.5 External Switching Commands
7-14
Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8-1
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods
8-1
8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card
8-1
8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation
8-3
8-3
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements
8-4
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xi
Contents
8.5.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-14
8.5.4 Print or Export CTC Data
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-18
Security
9-1
9.1 User IDs and Security Levels
9-1
9.2 User Privileges and Policies
9-1
9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
9-2
9-6
9.2.2.1 Superuser Privileges for Provisioning Users
9-6
9-6
9.2.2.3 User Password, Login, and Access Policies
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9
Timing
10-1
10-1
10-2
10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging
10-3
Circuits and Tunnels
11-1
11-2
11-2
11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments
11-4
11-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xii 78-17191-01
78-17191-01
Contents
11-7
11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types
11-9
11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window
11-10
11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth
11-12
11-15
11-16
11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels
11-17
11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels
11-18
11-18
11.7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits
11-18
11-19
11-19
11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits
11-20
11.9.2 Go-and-Return Path Protection Routing
11-20
11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits
11-21
11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables
11-22
11.11.1 BLSR STS Squelch Table
11-22
11-22
11-23
11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte
11-24
11.14 Automatic Circuit Routing
11-26
11.14.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing
11-27
11.14.2 Secondary Sources and Destinations
11-27
11-28
11.16 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing
11-32
11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits
11-33
11-33
11-33
11.17.3 Link Capacity Adjustment
11-35
11-35
11-37
11-37
11-39
11-40
11.18.4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll
11-42
11-42
11-42
11-43
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xiii
Contents
11-44
11-44
SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12-1
12.1 SONET Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards
12-1
12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings
12-2
12-2
12-5
12-8
12.2.4 BLSR Application Example
12-9
12-12
12-13
12-14
12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes
12-18
12.5 Linear ADM Configurations
12-19
12.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks
12-19
12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations
12-21
12-22
12-24
12-24
12.9 In-Service Topology Upgrades
12-25
12.9.1 Unprotected Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Path Protection
12-26
12.9.2 Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Two-Fiber BLSR
12-26
12.9.3 Path Protection to Two-Fiber BLSR
12-27
12.9.4 Two-Fiber BLSR to Four-Fiber BLSR
12-27
12.9.5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology
12-27
Management Network Connectivity
13-1
13-1
13-2
13.2.1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
13-3
13.2.2 IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router
13-3
13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway
13-4
13.2.4 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer
13-6
13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
13-7
13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF
13-10
13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
13-12
13.2.8 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet
13-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xiv 78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
13.2.9 IP Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled
13-20
13-22
13-24
13-25
13-27
13.7 TCP/IP and OSI Networking
13-29
13.7.1 Point-to-Point Protocol
13-30
13.7.2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel
13-31
13.7.3 OSI Connectionless Network Service
13-31
13-34
13.7.4.1 End System-to-Intermediate System Protocol
13-36
13.7.4.2 Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Protocol
13-36
13-37
13-38
13.7.5.2 TARP Loop Detection Buffer
13-39
13.7.5.3 Manual TARP Adjacencies
13-39
13.7.5.4 Manual TID to NSAP Provisioning
13-40
13.7.6 TCP/IP and OSI Mediation
13-40
13-41
13-43
13.7.8.1 Provisioning IP-over-CLNS Tunnels
13-44
13.7.8.2 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1: ONS Node to Other Vendor GNE
13-45
13.7.8.3 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2: ONS Node to Router
13-46
13.7.8.4 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3: ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN
13-47
13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios
13-49
13.7.9.1 OSI/IP Scenario 1: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, IP DCC, and ONS ENE
13-50
13.7.9.2 OSI/IP Scenario 2: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE
13-50
13.7.9.3 OSI/IP Scenario 3: IP OSS, IP DCN, Other Vendor GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS ENE
13-52
13.7.9.4 OSI/IP Scenario 4: Multiple ONS DCC Areas
13-54
13.7.9.5 OSI/IP Scenario 5: GNE Without an OSI DCC Connection
13-55
13.7.9.6 OSI/IP Scenario 6: IP OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE
13-56
13.7.9.7 OSI/IP Scenario 7: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, Other Vender GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS
13-57
13.7.9.8 OSI/IP Scenario 8: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vender
13-59
13.7.10 Provisioning OSI in CTC
13-61
Alarm Monitoring and Management
14-1
14-1
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xv
Contents
14-1
14-2
14.3.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone
14-4
14.3.2 Controlling Alarm Display
14-4
14-4
14.3.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits
14-5
14-5
14.3.6 Controlling the Conditions Display
14-6
14.3.6.1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions
14-6
14.3.6.2 Conditions Column Descriptions
14-6
14-7
14-7
14.3.7.1 History Column Descriptions
14-8
14.3.7.2 Retrieving and Displaying Alarm and Condition History
14-8
14.3.8 Alarm History and Log Buffer Capacities
14-9
14-9
14-9
14.5.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-12
14-12
14.5.6 Applying Alarm Profiles
14-13
14-13
14.6.1 Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance
14-13
14.6.2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command
14-14
14.7 External Alarms and Controls
14-14
14-14
14-15
Performance Monitoring
15-1
15.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring
15-1
15.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
15-3
15.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
15-4
15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions
15-4
15.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards
15-12
15.5.1 EC1-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-12
15.5.2 DS1_E1_56 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xvi 78-17191-01
Contents
78-17191-01
15.5.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-16
15.5.3.1 DS-1 Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring
15-18
15.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-18
15.5.5 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-19
15.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-21
15.5.7 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-23
15.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-25
15.5.9 DS3-EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-27
15.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards
15-29
15.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-29
15.6.1.1 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
15-29
15.6.1.2 E-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
15-31
15.6.1.3 E-Series Ethernet History Window
15-31
15.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-32
15.6.2.1 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Window
15-32
15.6.2.2 G-Series Ethernet Utilization Window
15-33
15.6.2.3 G-Series Ethernet History Window
15-34
15.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-34
15.6.3.1 ML-Series Ether Ports Window
15-34
15.6.3.2 ML-Series POS Ports Window
15-35
15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-37
15.6.4.1 CE-Series Card Ether Port Statistics Window
15-37
15.6.4.2 CE-Series Card Ether Ports Utilization Window
15-40
15.6.4.3 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
15-40
15.6.4.4 CE-Series Card POS Ports Statistics Parameters
15-40
15.6.4.5 CE-Series Card POS Ports Utilization Window
15-41
15.6.4.6 CE-Series Card Ether Ports History Window
15-41
15.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards
15-42
15.8 Performance Monitoring for Optical Multirate Cards
15-44
15.9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking Cards
15-45
15.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window
15-46
15.9.2 FC_MR-4 Utilization Window
15-47
15-48
SNMP
16-1
16-1
16-2
16.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement
16-4
16-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xvii
Contents
16-4
16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases
16-5
16.6.1 IETF-Standard MIBs for the ONS 15454
16-5
16.6.2 Proprietary ONS 15454 MIBs
16-6
16.6.3 Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs
16-7
16-8
16-9
16-10
16-16
16-16
16-16
16.10.1 64-Bit RMON Monitoring over DCC
16-17
16.10.1.1 Row Creation in MediaIndependentTable
16-17
16.10.1.2 Row Creation in cMediaIndependentHistoryControlTable
16-18
16-18
16.10.3 Ethernet Statistics RMON Group
16-18
16.10.3.1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable
16-18
16.10.3.2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
16-19
16.10.3.3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable
16-19
16.10.3.4 64-Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table
16-19
16.10.4 History Control RMON Group
16-19
16.10.4.1 History Control Table
16-19
16.10.4.2 Row Creation in historyControlTable
16-19
16.10.4.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
16-20
16.10.4.4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table
16-20
16.10.5 Ethernet History RMON Group
16-20
16.10.5.1 64-Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable
16-20
16-20
16-21
16.10.6.2 Row Creation in alarmTable
16-21
16.10.6.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests
16-22
16.10.6.4 Row Deletion in alarmTable
16-22
16-23
16-23
16-23
Hardware Specifications
A-1
A-1
A-1
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xviii 78-17191-01
78-17191-01
Contents
A-1
A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
A.1.12 System Environmental Specifications
A-3
A-4
A.2 SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications
A-4
A.3 General Card Specifications
A-6
A-6
A-8
A.4 Common Control Card Specifications
A-10
A.4.1 TCC2 Card Specifications
A-10
A.4.2 TCC2P Card Specifications
A-11
A.4.3 XCVT Card Specifications
A-12
A.4.4 XC10G Card Specifications
A-12
A.4.5 XC-VXC-10G Card Specifications
A-13
A.4.6 AIC-I Card Specifications
A-13
A-14
A.5 Electrical Card Specifications
A-15
A.5.1 EC1-12 Card Specifications
A-15
A.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Specifications
A-16
A.5.3 DS1/E1-56 Card Specifications
A-17
A.5.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Specifications
A-18
A.5.5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Specifications
A-19
A.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications
A-20
A.5.7 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Specifications
A-21
A.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Specifications
A-23
A.5.9 DS3XM-6 Card Specifications
A-24
A.5.10 FILLER Card Specifications
A-25
A.6 Optical Card Specifications
A-25
A.6.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card Specifications
A-25
A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1SH 1310-8 Card Specifications
A-26
A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications
A-27
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xix
Contents
A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications
A-28
A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications
A-29
A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Specifications
A-30
A.6.7 OC48 IR 1310 Card Specifications
A-31
A.6.8 OC48 LR 1550 Card Specifications
A-32
A.6.9 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications
A-33
A.6.10 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications
A-33
A.6.11 OC48 ELR/STM 16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications
A-34
A.6.12 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Specifications
A-35
A.6.13 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications
A-36
A.6.14 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications
A-37
A.6.15 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications
A-38
A.6.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Specifications
A-39
A.6.17 15454_MRC-12 Card Specifications
A-41
A.6.18 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach Card Specifications
A-42
A.6.19 OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Specifications
A-43
A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications
A-44
A.7.1 E100T-12 Card Specifications
A-44
A.7.2 E100T-G Card Specifications
A-44
A.7.3 E1000-2 Card Specifications
A-44
A.7.4 E1000-2-G Card Specifications
A-45
A.7.5 CE-1000-4 Card Specifications
A-45
A.7.6 CE-100T-8 Card Specifications
A-45
A.7.7 G1K-4 Card Specifications
A-46
A.7.8 ML100T-12 Card Specifications
A-46
A.7.9 ML1000-2 Card Specifications
A-46
A.7.10 ML100X-8 Card Specifications
A-47
A.8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications
A-47
A.8.1 FC_MR-4 Card Specifications
A-47
Administrative and Service States
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-3
B.3.1 Card Service State Transitions
B-3
B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions
B-5
Network Element Defaults
C-1
C.1 Network Element Defaults Description
C-1
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xx 78-17191-01
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-4
C.2.3.1 DS-1 Card Default Settings
C-4
C.2.3.2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings
C-7
C.2.3.3 DS-3 Card Default Settings
C-13
C.2.3.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings
C-14
C.2.3.5 DS3E Card Default Settings
C-18
C.2.3.6 DS3I Card Default Settings
C-20
C.2.3.7 DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings
C-22
C.2.3.8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings
C-25
C.2.3.9 EC1-12 Card Default Settings
C-29
C.2.3.10 FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings
C-31
C.2.3.11 Ethernet Card Default Settings
C-32
C.2.3.12 OC-3 Card Default Settings
C-33
C.2.3.13 OC3-8 Card Default Settings
C-35
C.2.3.14 OC-12 Card Default Settings
C-39
C.2.3.15 OC12-4 Card Default Settings
C-42
C.2.3.16 OC-48 Card Default Settings
C-46
C.2.3.17 OC-192 Card Default Settings
C-50
C.2.3.18 OC192-XFP Default Settings
C-55
C.2.3.19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings
C-60
C-74
C-83
C-86
Contents
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxi
Contents xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
78-17191-01
F I G U R E S
Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Dimensions
1-4
Mounting an ONS 15454 in a Rack
1-5
The ONS 15454 Front Door
1-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Deep Door
1-7
ONS 15454 Front Door Ground Strap
1-8
Removing the ONS 15454 Front Door
1-9
Front-Door Erasable Label
1-10
Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label
1-10
Backplane Covers
1-11
Removing the Lower Backplane Cover
1-11
Backplane Attachment for Cover
1-12
Installing the Plastic Rear Cover with Spacers
1-13
BNC Backplane for Use in 1:1 Protection Schemes
1-18
BNC Insertion and Removal Tool
1-19
High-Density BNC Backplane for Use in 1:N Protection Schemes
1-20
MiniBNC Backplane for Use in 1:N Protection Schemes
1-22
MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool
1-27
SMB EIA Backplane
1-28
AMP Champ EIA Backplane
1-29
UBIC-V Slot Designations
1-32
UBIC-H EIA Connector Labelling
1-34
DS-1 Electrical Interface Adapter (Balun)
1-38
Cable Connector Pins
1-39
UBIC-V DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
1-41
UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
1-44
Cable Connector Pins
1-46
UBIC-H DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
1-47
UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
1-50
100BaseT Connector Pins
1-51
Straight-Through Cable
1-51
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxiii
Figures
Crossover Cable
1-52
Managing Cables on the Front Panel
1-53
Fiber Capacity
1-53
Tie-Down Bar
1-54
AEP Printed Circuit Board Assembly
1-55
AEP Block Diagram
1-56
AEP Wire-Wrap Connections to Backplane Pins
1-56
Alarm Input Circuit Diagram
1-57
Alarm Output Circuit Diagram
1-59
Detectable Filler Card Faceplate
1-61
Ground Posts on the ONS 15454 Backplane
1-64
ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts (Release 3.4 or Later)
1-65
ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts
1-66
Installing Cards in the ONS 15454
1-69
TCC2 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-7
TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-11
XCVT Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-15
XCVT Cross-Connect Matrix
2-16
XC10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-19
XC10G Cross-Connect Matrix
2-20
XC-VXC-10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-23
XC-VXC-10G Cross-Connect Matrix
2-25
AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram
2-28
RJ-11 Connector
2-31
EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-5
DS1-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-7
DS1N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-8
DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-11
DS3-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-13
DS3N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-14
DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-17
DS3i-N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-19
DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-22
DS3N-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-23
DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-25 xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Figures
78-17191-01
DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3-30
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-6
OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-8
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-10
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-12
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-14
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-16
OC48 IR 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-18
OC48 LR 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-20
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-22
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-24
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-26
OC48 ELR 200 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-28
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-30
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-32
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-34
Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) Faceplate
4-35
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2) Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-36
Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2)Faceplate
4-37
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Faceplate
4-39
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Block Diagram
4-40
15454_MRC-12 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
4-42
OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Faceplates and Block Diagram
4-48
Mylar Tab SFP
4-50
Actuator/Button SFP
4-51
Bail Clasp SFP
4-51
Bail Clasp XFP (Unlatched)
4-52
Bail Clasp XFP (Latched)
4-52
E100T-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-4
E100T-G Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-6
E1000-2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-9
E1000-2-G Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-12
G1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-14
G1K-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-17
ML100T-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxv
Figures
ML100X-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-22
ML1000-2 Faceplate
5-24
CE-100T-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-26
CE-1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5-30
GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right)
5-33
CWDM GBIC with Wavelength Appropriate for Fiber-Connected Device
5-34
G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network
5-35
Mylar Tab SFP
5-35
Actuator/Button SFP
5-36
Bail Clasp SFP
5-36
FC_MR-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
6-3
Example: ONS 15454 Cards in a 1:1 Protection Configuration (SMB EIA)
7-2
Example: ONS 15454 Cards in a 1:N Protection Configuration (SMB EIA)
7-3
Unprotected Low-Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types
7-7
Unprotected High-Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types
7-8
1:1 Protection Schemes for Low-Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types
7-9
1:N Protection Schemes for Low-Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types
7-10
1:1 Protection Schemes for High-Density Electrical Cards with UBIC or MiniBNC EIA Types
7-11
ONS 15454 in an Unprotected Configuration
7-14
CTC Software Versions, Node View
8-2
CTC Software Versions, Network View
8-2
Node View (Default Login View)
8-8
Terminal Loopback Indicator
8-10
Facility Loopback Indicator
8-10
Network in CTC Network View
8-12
CTC Card View Showing a DS1 Card
8-15
ONS 15454 Timing Example
10-3
ONS 15454 Circuit Window in Network View
11-4
BLSR Circuit Displayed on the Detailed Circuit Map
11-12
One VT1.5 Circuit on One STS
11-13
Two VT1.5 Circuits in a BLSR
11-14
Traditional DCC Tunnel
11-17
VT1.5 Monitor Circuit Received at an EC1-12 Port
11-19
Editing Path Protection Selectors
11-20
Path Protection Go-and-Return Routing
11-21 xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Figures
78-17191-01
Secondary Sources and Destinations
11-27
Alternate Paths for Virtual Path Protection Segments
11-29
Mixing 1+1 or BLSR Protected Links With a Path Protection
11-29
Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing
11-30
Ethernet and Path Protection
11-30
VCAT Common Fiber Routing
11-34
VCAT Split Fiber Routing
11-34
Rolls Window
11-38
Single Source Roll
11-40
Single Destination Roll
11-40
Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit (Destination Changes)
11-41
Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit (Source Changes)
11-41
Dual Roll to Reroute a Link
11-41
Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node
11-42
Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR
12-3
Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Sample
12-4
Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Following Line Break
12-5
Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR
12-6
Four-Fiber BLSR Span Switch
12-7
Four-Fiber BLSR Ring Switch
12-8
BLSR Bandwidth Reuse
12-9
Five-Node Two-Fiber BLSR
12-10
Shelf Assembly Layout for Node 0 in Figure 12-8
12-11
Shelf Assembly Layout for Nodes 1 to 4 in Figure 12-8
12-11
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR
12-12
Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR
12-13
ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Same-Side Routing)
12-15
ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Opposite-Side Routing)
12-16
ONS 15454 Integrated BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect
12-17
Integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits Window
12-18
Linear (Point-to-Point) ADM Configuration
12-19
Path-Protected Mesh Network
12-20
PPMN Virtual Ring
12-21
Four-Shelf Node Configuration
12-22
Unprotected Point-to-Point ADM to Path Protection Conversion
12-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxvii
Figures
IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
13-3
IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router
13-4
IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP
13-5
IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing
13-6
IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer
13-7
IP Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination
13-8
IP Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations
13-9
IP Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled
13-11
IP Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled
13-12
SOCKS Proxy Server Gateway Settings
13-13
IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet
13-15
IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets
13-16
IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings
13-17
IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet
13-19
IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets
13-20
IP Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode Enabled
13-21
IP Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode Enabled
13-22
Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations
13-28
Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port
13-29
ISO-DCC NSAP Address
13-33
OSI Main Setup
13-34
Level 1 and Level 2 OSI Routing
13-35
Manual TARP Adjacencies
13-40
T–TD Protocol Flow
13-41
FT–TD Protocol Flow
13-41
Provisioning OSI Routers
13-42
IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Flow
13-44
IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1: ONS NE to Other Vender GNE
13-46
IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2: ONS Node to Router
13-47
IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3: ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN
13-49
OSI/IP Scenario 1: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, IP DCC, and ONS ENE
13-50
OSI/IP Scenario 2: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE
13-51
OSI/IP Scenario 3: IP OSS, IP DCN, Other Vendor GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS ENE
13-53
OSI/IP Scenario 3 with OSI/IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Endpoint at the GNE
13-54
OSI/IP Scenario 4: Multiple ONS DCC Areas
13-55 xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Figures
OSI/IP Scenario 5: GNE Without an OSI DCC Connection
13-56
OSI/IP Scenario 6: IP OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE
13-57
OSI/IP Scenario 7: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, Other Vender GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS NEs
13-58
OSI/IP Scenario 8: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vender NEs
13-60
Shelf LCD Panel
14-2
Select Affected Circuits Option
14-5
Network View Alarm Profiles Window
14-10
DS1 Card Alarm Profile
14-13
TCAs Displayed in CTC
15-2
Monitored Signal Types for the EC1-12 Card
15-12
PM Read Points on the EC1-12 Card
15-13
Monitored Signal Types for the DS1/E1-56 Card
15-14
PM Read Points on the DS1/E1-56 Card
15-15
Monitored Signal Types for the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
15-16
PM Read Points on the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
15-17
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
15-18
PM Read Points on the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
15-19
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
15-20
PM Read Points on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
15-20
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3i-N-12 Cards
15-21
PM Read Points on the DS3i-N-12 Cards
15-22
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-6 Card
15-23
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-6 Card
15-24
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM-12 Card
15-25
PM Read Points on the DS3XM-12 Card
15-26
Monitored Signal Types for the DS3/EC1-48 Card
15-27
PM Read Points on the DS3/EC1-48 Card
15-28
Monitored Signal Types for the OC-3 Cards
15-42
PM Read Points on the OC-3 Cards
15-42
PM Read Points for the MRC-12 Card
15-45
Basic Network Managed by SNMP
16-2
Example of the Primary SNMP Components
16-3
Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager
16-3
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxix
Figures xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
78-17191-01
T A B L E S
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters
1-xlii
EIA Types Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI Only
1-15
EIA Configurations Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI and the 15454-SA-HD
1-16
MiniBNC Protection Types and Slots
1-21
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configure with Low-Density Electrical Cards (A Side)
1-23
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density Electrical Cards (B
Side)
1-24
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical Cards (A Side)
1-25
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical Cards (B Side)
1-26
AMP Champ Connector Pin Assignments
1-30
AMP Champ Connector Pin Assignments (Shielded DS-1 Cable)
1-30
UBIC-V Protection Types and Slots
1-33
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density Electrical Cards (A
Side)
1-35
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density Electrical Cards (B
Side)
1-35
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical Cards (A Side)
1-36
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical Cards (B Side)
1-36
UBIC-H Protection Types and Slots
1-37
UBIC-V DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
1-40
UBIC-V DS-1 Tip/Ring Color Coding
1-42
UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
1-42
UBIC-H DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
1-46
UBIC-H DS-1 Tip/Ring Color Coding
1-48
UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
1-48
E100-TX Connector Pinout
1-51
Fiber Channel Capacity (One Side of the Shelf)
1-54
Pin Assignments for the AEP
1-56
Alarm Input Pin Association
1-57
Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins
1-59
Fan Tray Assembly Power Requirements
1-62
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxxi
Tables
BITS External Timing Pin Assignments
1-67
LAN Pin Assignments
1-68
Craft Interface Pin Assignments
1-68
Slot and Card Symbols
1-70
Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors
1-70
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC and XCVT Configurations
1-73
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations
1-75
Common Control Card Functions
2-2
Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility
2-3
Common-Control Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
2-3
Electrical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
2-4
Optical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
2-4
Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
2-5
SAN Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
2-6
TCC2 Card-Level Indicators
2-9
TCC2 Network-Level Indicators
2-9
TCC2 Power-Level Indicators
2-10
TCC2P Card-Level Indicators
2-13
TCC2P Network-Level Indicators
2-13
TCC2P Power-Level Indicators
2-14
VT Mapping
2-16
XCVT Card-Level Indicators
2-18
VT Mapping
2-20
XC10G Card-Level Indicators
2-21
VT Mapping
2-25
XC-VXC-10G Card-Level Indicators
2-26
AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
2-28
Orderwire Pin Assignments
2-31
UDC Pin Assignments
2-32
DCC Pin Assignments
2-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards
3-2
Electrical Card Software Release Compatibility
3-3
EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-6
DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card-Level Indicators
3-9
DS1/E1-56 Slot Restrictions
3-10 xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Tables
78-17191-01
DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators
3-12
DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-14
DS3/EC1-48 Slot Restrictions
3-15
DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators
3-18
DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-20
DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators
3-23
DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators
3-26
DS3XM-12 Shelf Configurations
3-27
DS3XM-12 Features
3-28
DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators
3-31
Optical Cards for the ONS 15454
4-2
Optical Card Software Release Compatibility
4-4
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-7
OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators
4-9
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-11
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-13
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-15
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators
4-17
OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-19
OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-21
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-23
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-25
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators
4-27
OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators
4-29
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators
4-31
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-33
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
4-38
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators
4-41
Maximum Bandwidth by Shelf Slot for the 15454_MRC-12 in Different Cross-Connect Configurations
4-43
Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC-12 Port, Based on Available Bandwidth
4-44
15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators
4-46
OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators
4-49
SFP and XFP Card Compatibility
4-50
Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454
5-2
Ethernet Card Software Compatibility
5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxxiii
Tables
E100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
5-5
E100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
5-5
E100T-G Card-Level Indicators
5-7
E100T-G Port-Level Indicators
5-8
E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
5-10
E1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
5-10
E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators
5-13
E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators
5-13
G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-15
G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-16
G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-18
G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-18
ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
5-21
ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
5-21
ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators
5-23
ML100X-8 Port-Level Indicators
5-23
ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
5-25
ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
5-25
CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators
5-27
CE-100T-8 Port-Level Indicators
5-28
CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
5-30
CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
5-31
GBIC and SFP Card Compatibility
5-32
Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs
5-33
Supported Wavelengths for DWDM GBICs
5-34
FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators
6-3
GBIC Compatibility
6-8
Supported 1:N Protection by Electrical Card
7-3
EIA Connectors Per Side
7-5
Electrical Card Protection By EIA Type
7-5
JRE Compatibility
8-4
Computer Requirements for CTC
8-5
ONS 15454 Connection Methods
8-7
Node View Card Colors
8-8
Node View Card Statuses
8-9 xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Tables
78-17191-01
Node View Card Port Colors and Service States
8-9
Node View Tabs and Subtabs
8-10
Network View Tabs and Subtabs
8-12
Node Status Shown in Network View
8-13
DCC Colors Indicating State in Network View
8-13
Link Icons
8-14
Card View Tabs and Subtabs
8-15
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View
9-2
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Network View
9-5
ONS 15454 Default User Idle Times
9-6
Audit Trail Window Columns
9-7
Shared Secret Character Groups
9-9
SSM Generation 1 Message Set
10-3
SSM Generation 2 Message Set
10-4
STS Mapping Using CTC
11-4
ONS 15454 Circuit Status
11-6
Circuit Protection Types
11-9
Port State Color Indicators
11-11
VT Matrix Port Usage for One VT1.5 Circuit
11-15
Portless Transmux Mapping for XCVT Drop Ports
11-16
Portless Transmux Mapping for XCVT Trunk and XC10G or XC-VXC-10G Any-Slot Ports
11-16
DCC Tunnels
11-17
ONS 15454 Cards Capable of J1 Path Trace
11-24
STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals
11-25
STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals with Payload Defects
11-25
Bidirectional STS/VT/Regular Multicard EtherSwitch/Point-to-Point (Straight) Ethernet Circuits
11-30
Unidirectional STS/VT Circuit
11-31
Multicard Group Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Circuit
11-31
Bidirectional VT Tunnels
11-31
ONS 15454 Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members
11-35
ONS 15454 VCAT Card Capabilities
11-36
Roll Statuses
11-39
ONS 15454 Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards
12-1
Two-Fiber BLSR Capacity
12-8
Four-Fiber BLSR Capacity
12-9
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxxv
Tables
Comparison of the Protection Schemes
12-18
Slot 5, 6, 12, and 13 Upgrade Options
12-23
Upgrade Options for Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17
12-23
General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist
13-2
ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings
13-15
SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules
13-17
SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to the ONS 15454
13-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Client/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords
13-23
Cisco ONS 15454 Client/Client Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords
13-23
Cisco ONS 15454 Trunk/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords
13-23
Sample Routing Table Entries
13-24
Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P
13-26
TCP/IP and OSI Protocols
13-30
NSAP Fields
13-32
TARP PDU Fields
13-37
TARP PDU Types
13-37
TARP Timers
13-38
TARP Processing Flow
13-39
OSI Virtual Router Constraints
13-43
IP-over-CLNS Tunnel IOS Commands
13-45
OSI Actions from the CTC Provisioning Tab
13-61
OSI Actions from the CTC Maintenance Tab
13-61
Alarms Column Descriptions
14-2
Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities
14-3
Alarm Display
14-4
Conditions Display
14-6
Conditions Column Description
14-6
History Column Description
14-8
Alarm Profile Buttons
14-11
Alarm Profile Editing Options
14-12
Electrical Cards that Report RX and TX Direction for TCAs
15-2
ONS 15454 Line Terminating Equipment
15-3
Performance Monitoring Parameters
15-5
EC1-12 Card PMs
15-13
DS1/E1-56 Card PMs
15-16 xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Tables
78-17191-01
DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card PMs
15-17
DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card PMs
15-19
DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card PMs
15-21
DS3i-N-12 Card PMs
15-22
DS3XM-6 Card PMs
15-24
DS3XM-12 Card PMs
15-26
DS3/EC1-48 Card PMs
15-28
E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
15-29
maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
15-31
Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval
15-31
G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters
15-32
ML-Series Ether Ports PM Parameters
15-34
ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode
15-35
ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for GFP-F Mode
15-36
CE-Series Ether Port PM Parameters
15-37
CE-Series Card POS Ports Parameters
15-40
OC-3 Card PMs
15-43
OC3-8 Card PMs
15-43
OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 Card PMs
15-44
Table of Border Error Rates
15-44
MRC Card PMs
15-45
FC_MR-4 Statistics Parameters
15-46
maxBaseRate for STS Circuits
15-47
FC_MR-4 History Statistics per Time Interval
15-48
ONS 15454 SNMP Message Types
16-4
IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15454 System
16-5
ONS 15454 Proprietary MIBs
16-6
cerentGenericPmThresholdTable
16-7
cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentTable
16-8
cerentGenericPmStatsIntervalTable
16-8
Generic IETF Traps
16-9
ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings
16-10
RMON History Control Periods and History Categories
16-19
OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable
16-21
SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications
A-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxxvii
Tables
Individual Card Power Requirements
A-6
Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names
A-8
ONS 15454 Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers
B-1
ONS 15454 Secondary States
B-2
ONS 15454 Administrative States
B-3
ONS 15454 Card Service State Transitions
B-3
ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions
B-6
DS-1 Card Default Settings
C-4
DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings
C-7
DS-3 Card Default Settings
C-13
DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings
C-14
DS3E Card Default Settings
C-18
DS3I Card Default Settings
C-20
DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings
C-22
DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings
C-25
EC1-12 Card Default Settings
C-29
FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings
C-31
Ethernet Card Default Settings
C-32
OC-3 Card Default Settings
C-33
OC3-8 Card Default Settings
C-35
OC-12 Card Default Settings
C-39
OC12-4 Card Default Settings
C-42
OC-48 Card Default Settings
C-46
OC-192 Card Default Settings
C-50
OC192-XFP Default Settings
C-55
MRC-12 Card Default Settings
C-60
Node Default Settings
C-76
Time Zones
C-83
CTC Default Settings
C-86 xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Revision History
Date
March 2007
July 2007
August 2007
October 2007
Notes
Changed fuse rating and power consumption specifications in Appendix A.
Modified “Caution” in the “Shelf Configuration” section of the “Electrical Cards” chapter.
Updated the note in the Path Protection Circuits section of the Circuits and
Tunnels chapter.
Updated About this Manual chapter.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xxxix
About this Manual
Date
April 2008
May 2008
July 2008
September 2008
December 2008
March 2009
April 2009
June 2009
July 2009
Notes
Added a note in the User Password, Login, and Access Policies section in the
Security chapter.
Updated note on protection switching in Link Capacity Adjustment section in
Circuits and Tunnels chapter.
Updated the table, Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and
XC-VXC-10G Configurations in the Shelf and Backplane Hardware chapter.
Added power-level LED information for TCC2 and TCC2P cards in Common
Control Cards chapter.
Updated the section “15454_MRC-12 Port-Level Indicators” in the Optical Cards chapter, to show the correct number and status of the Rx indicator.
Added DS-3/EC1-48 card support for the EIA type MiniBNC in Table 1-2,
Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
Deleted the note in the Power and Ground Description section in Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
Added a note in section 10.1 “Timing Parameters” of Chapter 10, Timing.
•
Added a Warning for all optical cards in Chapter 4, Optical Cards.
•
Added a note in Card Default Settings and Node Default Settings section of
Appendix C, Network Element Defaults.
•
•
•
•
Updated FC_MR-4 Statistics Parameters table in the Chapter 15, Performance
Monitoring.
Updated the Software and Hardware Compatibility section in Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
Updated the list of PM parameters for MRC-12 card in Chapter 15,
Performance Monitoring.
Updated the UBIC-V and UBIC-H sections in Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane
Hardware.
Updated Table 1-17 and Table 1-20 in UBIC-V and UBIC-H sections in Chapter
1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
Updated section DS1/E1-56 Card Specifications in Appendix A Hardware
Specifications
•
Updated the figure AEP Wire-Wrap Connections to Backplane Pins in
Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
•
•
•
Updated “OC-N Speed Upgrades” in Chapter 12, SONET Topologies and
Upgrades.
Updated Table 1-2 in Chapter 1, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
Updated the “Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility” table in the chapter 2, Common Control Cards.
•
Added a new section, Comparison of the Protection Schemes in the chapter,
SONET Topologies and Upgrades.
xl
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
Date
August 2009
November 2009
January 2010
February 2010
April 2010
May 2010
June 2010
November 2010
June 2011
October 2011
January 2012
February 2012
March 2012
August 2012
Notes
•
Updated the first footnote in the table titled ONS 15454 Software and
Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations in the chapter, Shelf and Backplane Hardware.
•
•
Added a caution in section DS3XM-12 Card of Chapter 3, Electrical Cards.
Added a new section, SDH Tunneling in the chapter, Circuits and Tunnels.
•
Updated the table “Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC-12 Port, Based on Available Bandwidth” in the chapter, “Optical Cards”.
Updated the section “OC-N Speed Upgrades” in the chapter SONET Topologies and Upgrades.
Changed the BIEC parameter to BIT-EC in Chapter, “Performance Monitoring”.
Updated the section “SNMP Overview” in the chapter “SNMP”.
Updated the note in the section “DS3/EC1-48 Card” in the chapter “Electrical
Card”.
Updated the caution in the section “DS1/E1-56 Card” in the chapter “Electrical
Cards”.
Updated the figure “ML1000-2 Faceplate and Block Diagram” under the section
“ML1000-2 Card” in the chapter “Ethernet Cards”.
•
Updated the section “AIC-I Card” in the chapter “Common Control Cards”.
•
Updated the tables “DS3XM-6 Card PMs” and “DS3XM-12 Card PMs” in the chapter “Performance Monitoring”.
Updated the section “AMP Champ EIA” in the chapter, “Shelf and Backplane
Hardware”.
Updated the privileges for the Download/Cancel operations in the table, "ONS
15454 SDH Security Levels—Network View " in the chapter, “Security”.
Updated the table “SFP and XFP Card Compatibility” in the chapter “Optical
Cards”.
•
Updated the section “TCC2P Functionality” in the chapter, “Common
Control Cards”.
•
Updated the section "DS3/EC1-48 Card Specifications" in the appendix
"Hardware Specifications".
The full length book-PDF was generated.
Document Objectives
This manual provides reference information for the Cisco ONS 15454.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xli
About this Manual
Document Organization
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters
Title
Chapter 1, “Shelf and Backplane Hardware”
Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards”
Summary
Includes descriptions of the rack, backplane, backplane pins, ferrites, power and ground, fan-tray assembly, air filter, card slots, cables, cable connectors, and cable routing.
Includes descriptions of the TCC2, TCC2P, XCVT,
XC-VXC-10G, XC10G, and AIC-I cards.
Includes descriptions of EC-1, DS-1, DS-3, and
DS3E cards, card temperature ranges, and compatibility.
Includes descriptions of the OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OC-192, and MRC-12 cards, as well as card temperature ranges and card compatibility.
Includes descriptions of the E-Series, G-Series, and ML-Series Ethernet cards and Gigabit
Interface Converters (GBICs).
Chapter 6, “Storage Access Networking Cards”
Includes descriptions of the FC_MR-4 Fiber
Channel/Fiber Connectivity (FICON) card, card temperature ranges, compatibility, and applications.
Includes electrical and optical card protection methods.
Chapter 8, “Cisco Transport Controller
Includes information about CTC installation, the
CTC window, computer requirements, software versions, and database reset and revert.
Includes user set up information, security parameters and privileges, RADIUS authentication, and audit trail information.
Chapter 11, “Circuits and Tunnels”
Includes node and network timing information.
Includes STS and VT, bidirectional and unidirectional, revertive and nonrevertive, electrical and optical, multiple and path trace circuit information, as well as DCC tunnels.
Chapter 12, “SONET Topologies and Upgrades”
Includes the SONET configurations used by the
ONS 15454; includes bidirectional line switch rings (BLSRs), path protection configurations, linear add/drop multiplexers (ADMs), subtending rings, and optical bus configurations, as well as information about upgrading optical speeds within any configuration.
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters (continued)
Title
Chapter 13, “Management Network
Chapter 14, “Alarm Monitoring and
Chapter 15, “Performance Monitoring”
Summary
Includes IP addressing scenarios and information about IP networking with the ONS 15454, as well as information about provisionable patchcords, the routing table, external firewalls, and open gateway network element (GNE) networks.
Describes CTC alarm management including alarm severities, alarm profiles, alarm suppression, and external alarms and controls.
Describes the various performance monitoring parameters.
Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications”
Explains Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) as implemented by the Cisco ONS 15454.
Provides specifications for the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, cards, and pluggable devices.
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States”
Describes the extended state model for cards, ports, and cross-connects.
Appendix C, “Network Element Defaults”
Lists card, node, and CTC-level network element
(NE) defaults.
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual with the following referenced publications:
•
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Provides procedures to install, turn up, provision, and maintain a Cisco ONS 15454 node and network.
•
•
•
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide
Provides general troubleshooting procedures, alarm descriptions and troubleshooting procedures, error messages, and transient conditions.
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
Provides a full TL1 command and autonomous message set including parameters, AIDs, conditions and modifiers for the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15327, ONS 15600, ONS 15310-CL, and
ONS 15310-MA systems.
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
Provides general information, procedures, and errors for TL1 in the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15327,
ONS 15600, ONS 15310-CL, and ONS 15310-MA systems.
•
•
Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration G uide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS
15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327
Provides software features for all Ethernet cards and configuration information for Cisco IOS on
ML-Series cards.
Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 Release 7.0.1
Provides caveats, closed issues, and new feature and functionality information.
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to http://cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html
.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 xliii
About this Manual
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Convention boldface
italic
[ ]
{ x | x | x }
Ctrl screen font
boldface screen font
< >
Application
Commands and keywords in body text.
Command input that is supplied by the user.
Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. The user must select one.
The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
Examples of information displayed on the screen.
Examples of information that the user must enter.
Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Note
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document.
Caution
Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.
xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
Warning
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Varoitus
Attention
Warnung
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil, référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xlv
About this Manual
Avvertenza
Advarsel
Aviso
¡Advertencia!
Varning!
IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xlvii
About this Manual
Aviso
Advarsel
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
About this Manual
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
xlix
About this Manual
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation, at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.
l
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
1
Shelf and Backplane Hardware
78-17191-01
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter provides a description of Cisco ONS 15454 shelf and backplane hardware. Card descriptions are provided in
Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards,”
Chapter 3, “Electrical Cards,”
and
Chapter 6, “Storage Access Networking
To install equipment, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.2 Rack Installation, page 1-3
1.4 Backplane Covers, page 1-10
1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies, page 1-14
1.11 Cable Routing and Management, page 1-52
1.12 Alarm Expansion Panel, page 1-55
1.14 Fan-Tray Assembly, page 1-61
1.15 Power and Ground Description, page 1-63
1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections, page 1-64
1.17 Cards and Slots, page 1-68
1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility, page 1-73
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-1
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.1 1.1 Overview
Caution
Unused card slots should be filled with a detectable filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) or a non-detectable filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-BLANK). The filler card ensures proper airflow when operating the ONS 15454 without the front door attached, although Cisco recommends that the front door remain attached.
Note
The ONS 15454 is designed to comply with Telcordia GR-1089-CORE Type 2 and Type 4. Install and operate the ONS 15454 only in environments that do not expose wiring or cabling to the outside plant.
Acceptable applications include Central Office Environments (COEs), Electronic Equipment Enclosures
(EEEs), Controlled Environment Vaults (CEVs), huts, and Customer Premise Environments (CPEs).
Note
The Cisco ONS 15454 assembly is intended for use with telecommunications equipment only.
Note
You can search for cross-referenced Cisco part numbers and CLEI (Common Language Equipment
Identification) codes at the following link: http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/front.x/clei/code_search.cgi.
1.1 Overview
When installed in an equipment rack, the ONS 15454 assembly is typically connected to a fuse and alarm panel to provide centralized alarm connection points and distributed power for the ONS 15454. Fuse and alarm panels are third-party equipment and are not described in this documentation. If you are unsure about the requirements or specifications for a fuse and alarm panel, consult the user documentation for the related equipment. The front door of the ONS 15454 allows access to the shelf assembly, fan-tray assembly, and cable-management area. The backplanes provide access to alarm contacts, external interface contacts, power terminals, and BNC/SMB connectors.
You can mount the ONS 15454 in a 19- or 23-inch rack (482.6 or 584.2 mm). The shelf assembly weighs approximately 55 pounds (24.94 kg) with no cards installed. The shelf assembly includes a front door for added security, a fan tray module for cooling, and extensive cable-management space.
ONS 15454 optical cards have SC and LC connectors on the card faceplate. Fiber-optic cables are routed into the front of the destination cards. Electrical cards (DS-1, DS-3, DS3XM, and EC-1) require electrical interface assemblies (EIAs) to provide the cable connection points for the shelf assembly. In most cases, EIAs are ordered with the ONS 15454 and come preinstalled on the backplane. See the
“1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies” section on page 1-14
for more information about the EIAs.
The ONS 15454 is powered using –48 VDC power. Negative, return, and ground power terminals are accessible on the backplane.
Note
In this chapter, the terms “ONS 15454” and “shelf assembly” are used interchangeably. In the installation context, these terms have the same meaning. Otherwise, shelf assembly refers to the physical steel enclosure that holds cards and connects power, and ONS 15454 refers to the entire system, both hardware and software.
Install the ONS 15454 in compliance with your local and national electrical codes:
1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.2 1.2 Rack Installation
•
•
•
United States: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70; United States National Electrical
Code
Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, CSA C22.1
Other countries: If local and national electrical codes are not available refer to IEC 364, Part 1 through Part 7
1.2 Rack Installation
The ONS 15454 is mounted in a 19- or 23-in. (482.6- or 584.2-mm) equipment rack. The shelf assembly projects five inches (127 mm) from the front of the rack. It mounts in both Electronic Industries Alliance
(EIA) standard and Telcordia-standard racks. The shelf assembly is a total of 17 inches (431.8 mm) wide with no mounting ears attached. Ring runs are not provided by Cisco and might hinder side-by-side installation of shelves where space is limited.
The ONS 15454 measures 18.5 inches (469.9 mm) high, 19 or 23 inches (482.6 or 584.2 mm) wide
(depending on which way the mounting ears are attached), and 12 inches (304.8 mm) deep. You can install up to four ONS 15454 shelves in a seven-foot (2133.6 mm) equipment rack. The ONS 15454 must have one inch (25.4 mm) of airspace below the installed shelf assembly to allow air flow to the fan intake. If a second ONS 15454 is installed underneath the shelf assembly, the air ramp on top of the lower shelf assembly provides the air spacing needed and should not be modified in any way.
Figure 1-1 shows the dimensions of the ONS 15454.
Note
A 10-Gbps-compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD) and fan-tray assembly
(15454-FTA3 or 15454-FTA3-T) are required if ONS 15454 XC10G and ONS 15454 XC-VXC-10G cards are installed in the shelf.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-3
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.2 1.2.1 Reversible Mounting Bracket
Figure 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Dimensions
Top View
22 in. (55.88 cm) total width
12 in.
(30.48 cm)
19 in. (48.26 cm) or 23 in. (58.42 cm) between mounting screw holes
Side View
5 in.(12.7 cm)
Front View
22 in. (55.88 cm) total width
18.5 in.
(46.99 cm)
12 in. (30.48 cm) 19 in. (48.26 cm) or 23 in. (58.42 cm) between mounting screw holes
1.2.1 Reversible Mounting Bracket
Caution
Use only the fastening hardware provided with the ONS 15454 to prevent loosening, deterioration, and electromechanical corrosion of the hardware and joined material.
Caution
When mounting the ONS 15454 in a frame with a nonconductive coating (such as paint, lacquer, or enamel) either use the thread-forming screws provided with the ONS 15454 shipping kit, or remove the coating from the threads to ensure electrical continuity.
The shelf assembly comes preset for installation in a 23-inch (584.2 mm) rack, but you can reverse the mounting bracket to fit the smaller 19-inch (482.6 mm) rack.
1-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.2 1.2.2 Mounting a Single Node
1.2.2 Mounting a Single Node
Mounting the ONS 15454 in a rack requires a minimum of 18.5 inches (469.9 mm) of vertical rack space and one additional inch (25.4 mm) for air flow. To ensure the mounting is secure, use two to four
#12-24 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly. Figure 1-2
shows the rack mounting position for the ONS 15454.
Figure 1-2 Mounting an ONS 15454 in a Rack
Equipment rack
FAN
FAIL
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Universal ear mounts
(reversible)
Two people should install the shelf assembly; however, one person can install it using the temporary set screws included. The shelf assembly should be empty for easier lifting. The front door can also be removed to lighten the shelf assembly.
If you are installing the fan-tray air filter using the bottom (external) brackets provided, mount the brackets on the bottom of the shelf assembly before installing the ONS 15454 in a rack.
1.2.3 Mounting Multiple Nodes
Most standard (Telcordia GR-63-CORE, 19-inch [482.6 mm] or 23-inch [584.2 mm]) seven-foot
(2,133 mm) racks can hold four ONS 15454 shelves and a fuse and alarm panel. However, unequal flange racks are limited to three ONS 15454 shelves and a fuse and alarm panel or four ONS 15454 shelves and a fuse and alarm panel from an adjacent rack.
If you are using the external (bottom) brackets to install the fan-tray air filter, you can install three shelf assemblies in a standard seven-foot (2.133 m) rack. If you are not using the external (bottom) brackets, you can install four shelf assemblies in a rack. The advantage to using the bottom brackets is that you can replace the filter without removing the fan tray.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-5
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.3 1.2.4 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly
1.2.4 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly
The Cisco ONS 15454 Bay Assembly simplifies ordering and installing the ONS 15454 because it allows you to order shelf assemblies preinstalled in a seven-foot (2.133 m) rack. The Bay Assembly is available in a three- or four-shelf configuration. The three-shelf configuration includes three ONS 15454 shelf assemblies, a prewired fuse and alarm panel, and two cable-management trays. The four-shelf configuration includes four ONS 15454 shelf assemblies and a prewired fuse and alarm panel. You can order optional fiber channels with either configuration. Installation procedures are included in the
Unpacking and Installing the Cisco ONS 15454 Four-Shelf and Zero-Shelf Bay Assembly document that ships with the Bay Assembly,
1.3 Front Door
The Critical, Major, and Minor alarm LEDs visible through the front door indicate whether a critical, major, or minor alarm is present anywhere on the ONS 15454. These LEDs must be visible so technicians can quickly determine if any alarms are present on the ONS 15454 shelf or the network. You can use the LCD to further isolate alarms. The front door (
Figure 1-3 ) provides access to the shelf
assembly, cable-management tray, fan-tray assembly, and LCD screen.
Figure 1-3 The ONS 15454 Front Door
CISCO ONS 15454
O p t i c a l N e t w o r k S y s t e m
Door lock
Door button
Viewholes for Critical, Major and Minor alarm LEDs
The ONS 15454 ships with a standard door but can also accommodate a deep door and extended fiber
clips (15454-DOOR-KIT) to provide additional room for cabling ( Figure 1-4
).
1-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-4 Cisco ONS 15454 Deep Door
1.3 1.3 Front Door
78-17191-01
The ONS 15454 door locks with a pinned hex key that ships with the ONS 15454. A button on the right side of the shelf assembly releases the door. You can remove the front door of the ONS 15454 to provide unrestricted access to the front of the shelf assembly. Before you remove the front door, you have to remove the ground strap of the front door (
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-7
1.3 1.3 Front Door
Figure 1-5 ONS 15454 Front Door Ground Strap
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
shows how to remove the front door.
1-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-6 Removing the ONS 15454 Front Door
1.3 1.3 Front Door
FAN F
AIL
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Translucent circles for LED viewing
Door hinge
Assembly hinge pin
Assembly hinge
An erasable label is pasted on the inside of the front door (
Figure 1-7 ). You can use the label to record
slot assignments, port assignments, card types, node ID, rack ID, and serial number for the ONS 15454.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-9
1.4 1.4 Backplane Covers
Figure 1-7 Front-Door Erasable Label
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Note
The front door label also includes the Class I and Class 1M laser warning (
Figure 1-8 Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label
1.4 Backplane Covers
If a backplane does not have an EIA panel installed, it should have two sheet metal backplane covers
(one on each side of the backplane) as shown in
Figure 1-9 on page 1-11 . Each cover is held in place
with nine 6-32 x 3/8 inch Phillips screws.
Note
See the
“1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies” section on page 1-14 for information on EIAs.
1-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-9 Backplane Covers
B A
1.4 1.4.1 Lower Backplane Cover
Backplane Sheet Metal
Covers
Lower Backplane
Cover
1.4.1 Lower Backplane Cover
The lower section of the ONS 15454 backplane is covered by either a clear plastic protector
(15454-SA-ANSI) or a sheet metal cover (15454-SA-HD), which is held in place by five 6-32 x 1/2 inch screws. Remove the lower backplane cover to access the alarm interface panel (AIP), alarm pin fields, frame ground, and power terminals (
Figure 1-10 Removing the Lower Backplane Cover
Retaining screws
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-11
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.4 1.4.2 Rear Cover
1.4.2 Rear Cover
The ONS 15454 has an optional clear plastic rear cover. This clear plastic cover provides additional protection for the cables and connectors on the backplane.
Figure 1-11 shows the rear cover screw
locations.
Figure 1-11 Backplane Attachment for Cover
Screw locations for attaching the rear cover
You can also install the optional spacers if more space is needed between the cables and rear cover
(
).
1-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-12 Installing the Plastic Rear Cover with Spacers
1.4 1.4.3 Alarm Interface Panel
BA
T
2
RE
T
2
1
RE
T
1
T
BA
CA th
IO
UT e pri or
N:
T1
R em
a to
s nd ov
te er vic in g ow e p rm in al er fro
b lo ck m
b s oth
IT
SU
-4
2 T
65
O -5
0 W
7
Vd c at ts
M ax
AB
NO
PL
IN
LE
N-
F
CO
SE
ST
O
M
R
RU
R M
O
BU
IO
CT im um
TIN
UN
IB
ST
ER
EF
T
LE
O
NS
G O
S
UR
AL
IN ST
N CE
FA
LA
TIO
N
1.4.3 Alarm Interface Panel
The AIP is located above the alarm contacts on the lower section of the backplane. The AIP provides surge protection for the ONS 15454. It also provides an interface from the backplane to the fan-tray assembly and LCD. The AIP plugs into the backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and is held in place with two retaining screws. The panel has a nonvolatile memory chip that stores the unique node address
(MAC address).
Note
The MAC address identifies the nodes that support circuits. It allows Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) to determine circuit sources, destinations, and spans. The TCC2/TCC2P cards in the ONS 15454 also use the MAC address to store the node database.
The 5-A AIP (73-7665-XX) is required when installing the new fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3), which comes preinstalled on the shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD).
Note
A blown fuse on the AIP board can cause the LCD display to go blank.
1.4.4 Alarm Interface Panel Replacement
If the alarm interface panel (AIP) fails, a MAC Fail alarm appears on the CTC Alarms menu and/or the
LCD display on the fan-tray assembly goes blank. To perform an in-service replacement of the AIP, you must contact Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). For contact information, go to the TAC website at http://www.cisco.com/tac .
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-13
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies
You can replace the AIP on an in-service system without affecting traffic (except Ethernet traffic on nodes running a software release earlier than Release 4.0). The circuit repair feature allows you to repair circuits affected by MAC address changes on one node at a time. Circuit repair works when all nodes are running the same software version. Each individual AIP upgrade requires an individual circuit repair; if
AIPs are replaced on two nodes, the circuit repair must be performed twice.
Caution
Do not use a 2-A AIP with a 5-A fan-tray assembly; doing so causes a blown fuse on the AIP.
Note
Ensure that all nodes in the affected network are running the same software version before replacing the
AIP and repairing circuits. If you need to upgrade nodes to the same software version, do not change any hardware or repair circuits until after the software upgrade is complete. Replace an AIP during a maintenance window. Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P card can cause a service disruption of less then
50 ms to optical or electrical traffic. Resetting the active TCC2/TCC2P card causes a service disruption of three to five minutes on all E-Series Ethernet traffic due to spanning tree reconvergence. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for an AIP replacement procedure.
1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies
Optional EIA backplane covers are typically preinstalled when ordered with the ONS 15454. EIAs must be ordered when using DS-1, DS-3, DS3XM, or EC-1 cards. This section describes each EIA.
Six different EIA backplane covers are available for the ONS 15454: BNC, High-Density BNC,
MiniBNC, SMB, AMP Champ, UBIC-H (Universal Backplane Interface Connector-Horizontal), and
UBIC-V (Vertical). If the shelf was not shipped with the correct EIA interface, you must order and install the correct EIA.
EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide electrical interface cable connections. EIAs are available with SMB and BNC connectors for DS-3 or EC-1 cards. EIAs are available with
AMP Champ connectors for DS-1 cards. You must use SMB EIAs for DS-1 twisted-pair cable installation. UBIC-V EIAs have SCSI connectors. They are available for use with any DS-1, DS-3, or
EC-1 card, but are intended for use with high-density electrical cards.
Note
The MiniBNC EIAs only support cables using the Trompetor connectors for termination.
You can install EIAs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454 backplane in any combination (in other words, AMP Champ on Side A and BNC on Side B or High-Density BNC on Side A and SMB on Side B, and so forth). As you face the rear of the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, the right side is the A side and the left side is the B side. The top of the EIA connector columns are labeled with the corresponding slot number, and EIA connector pairs are marked transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) to correspond to transmit and receive cables.
Note
For information about EIA types, protection schemes, and card slots, see
1-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.1 EIA Installation
1.5.1 EIA Installation
Optional EIA backplane covers are typically preinstalled when ordered with the ONS 15454. A minimal amount of assembly might be required when EIAs are ordered separately from the ONS 15454. If you are installing EIAs after the shelf assembly is installed, plug the EIA into the backplane. The EIA has six electrical connectors that plug into six corresponding backplane connectors. The EIA backplane must replace the standard sheet metal cover to provide access to the coaxial cable connectors. The EIA sheet metal covers use the same screw holes as the solid backplane panels, but they have 12 additional 6-32 x
1/2 inch Phillips screw holes so you can screw down the cover and the board using standoffs on the EIA board.
When using the RG-179 coaxial cable on an EIA, the maximum distance available (122 feet [37 meters]) is less than the maximum distance available with standard RG-59 (734A) cable (306 feet [93 meters]).
The maximum distance when using the RG-59 (734A) cable is 450 feet (137 meters). The shorter maximum distance available with the RG179 is due to a higher attenuation rate for the thinner cable.
Attenuation rates are calculated using a DS-3 signal:
•
•
For RG-179, the attenuation rate is 59 dB/kft at 22 MHz.
For RG-59 (734A) the attenuation rate is 11.6 dB/kft at 22 MHz.
1.5.2 EIA Configurations
Table 1-1
shows the EIA types supported only by ONS 15454 shelf assembly 15454-SA-ANSI.
EIA Types Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI Only
EIA Type
BNC
High-
Density
BNC
Cards
Supported
DS-3
DS3XM-6
EC-1
DS-3
DS3XM-6
EC-1
A-Side
Hosts
24 pairs of
BNC connectors
48 pairs of
BNC connectors
A-Side
Columns
Map to A-Side Product Number
Slot 2
Slot 4
B-Side
Hosts
15454-EIA-BNC-A24= 24 pairs of
BNC connectors
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 5
15454-EIA-BNC-A48= 48 pairs of
BNC connectors
B-Side
Columns
Map to B-Side Product Number
Slot 14
Slot 16
15454-EIA-BNC-B24=
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 17
15454-EIA-BNC-B48=
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-15
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.2 EIA Configurations
Table 1-1 EIA Types Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI Only (continued)
EIA Type
SMB
Cards
Supported
DS-1
DS-3
EC-1
DS3XM-6
AMP
Champ
DS-1
A-Side
Hosts
84 pairs of
SMB connectors
A-Side
Columns
Map to
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A-Side Product Number
15454-EIA-SMB-A84=
B-Side
Hosts
84 pairs of
SMB connectors
Slot 4
Slot 5
6 AMP
Champ connectors
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
15454-EIA-AMP-A84= 6 AMP
Champ connectors
B-Side
Columns
Map to B-Side Product Number
Slot 12 15454-EIA-SMB-B84=
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slot 13
15454-EIA-AMP-B84=
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Table 1-2 shows the EIA types supported by both the 15454-SA-ANSI and the 15454-SA-HD (high
density) shelf assemblies.
EIA Configurations Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI and the 15454-SA-HD Table 1-2
EIA
Type
BNC
Mini
BNC
Cards
Supported
DS-3
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
EC-1
High-
Density
BNC
DS-3
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
EC-1
DS-3
DS-3/EC1-48
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
EC-1
A-Side
Hosts
24 pairs of
BNC connectors
A-Side
Columns
Map to A-Side Product Number
Slot 2
Slot 4
48 pairs of
BNC connectors
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
96 pairs of
MiniBNC connectors
Slot 5
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
B-Side
Hosts
15454-EIA-1BNCA24= 24 pairs of
BNC connectors
15454-EIA-1BNCA48= 48 pairs of
BNC connectors
B-Side
Columns
Map to B-Side Product Number
Slot 14 15454-EIA-1BNCB24=
Slot 16
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 16
15454-EIA-BNC-A96= 96 pairs of
MiniBNC connectors
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 17
15454-EIA-1BNCB48=
15454-EIA-BNC-A96=
1-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.3 BNC EIA
Table 1-2 EIA Configurations Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI and the 15454-SA-HD (continued)
EIA
Type
SMB
AMP
Champ
Cards
Supported
DS-1
DS-3
EC-1
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
DS-1
UBIC-
V
UBIC-
H
DS-1
DS-3
EC-1
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
DS3/EC1-48
DS1/E1-56
DS-1
DS-3
EC-1
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
DS3/EC1-48
DS1/E1-56
A-Side
Hosts
84 pairs of
SMB connectors
A-Side
Columns
Map to
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A-Side Product Number
15454-EIA-1SMBA84=
B-Side
Hosts
84 pairs of
SMB connectors
B-Side
Columns
Map to
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
B-Side Product Number
15454-EIA-1SMBB84=
6 AMP
Champ connectors
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
15454-EIA-1AMPA84= 6 AMP
Champ connectors
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
15454-EIA-1AMPB84=
8 pairs of
SCSI connectors
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
15454-EIA-UBICV-A 8 pairs of
SCSI connectors
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
15454-EIA-UBICV-B
8 pairs of
SCSI connectors
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
15454-EIA-UBICH-A 8 pairs of
SCSI connectors
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
15454-EIA-UBICH-B
1.5.3 BNC EIA
The ONS 15454 BNC EIA supports 24 DS-3 circuits on each side of the ONS 15454 (24 transmit and
24 receive connectors). If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the shelf assembly, the ONS 15454 hosts up to 48 circuits. The BNC connectors on the EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75-ohm) 4-leg connectors (King or ITT are also compatible). Right-angle mating connectors for the connecting cable are AMP 413588-2 (75-ohm) connectors. If preferred, you can also use a straight connector of the same
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-17
1.5 1.5.3 BNC EIA
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
type. Use RG-59/U cable to connect to the ONS 15454 BNC EIA. These cables are recommended to connect to a patch panel and are designed for long runs. You can use BNC EIAs for DS-3 (including the
DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12) or EC-1 cards.
shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled BNC EIAs.
To install coaxial cable with BNC connectors, refer to the “Install Shelf and Backplane Hardware” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Figure 1-13 BNC Backplane for Use in 1:1 Protection Schemes
B
TX RX
16
TX RX TX RX
14
TX RX
1 7 1 7
TX
4
RX TX RX TX RX
2
TX
A
RX
1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
3
4
9
10
3
4
9
10
3
4
9
10
3
4
9
10
5 11 5 11
5 11 5 11
TX
6
RX TX
12
RX TX
6
RX TX
12
RX TX
6
RX TX
12
RX TX
6
RX TX
12
RX
BNC backplane connectors
Tie wrap posts
1.5.3.1 BNC Connectors
The EIA side marked “A” has 24 pairs of BNC connectors. The first 12 pairs of BNC connectors correspond to Ports 1 to 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 2 on the shelf assembly. The BNC connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port. You can install an additional card in Slot 1 as a protect card for the card in Slot 2. The second 12 BNC connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 to 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 4 on the shelf assembly. You can install an additional card in Slot 3 as a protect card for the card in Slot 4. Slots 5 and 6 do not support
DS-3 cards when the standard BNC EIA panel connectors are used.
The EIA side marked “B” provides an additional 24 pairs of BNC connectors. The first 12 BNC connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 to 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 14 on the shelf assembly.
The BNC connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port. You can install an additional card in Slot 15 as a protect card for the card in Slot 14. The second
12 BNC connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 to 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 16 on the shelf assembly. You can install an additional card in Slot 17 as a protect card for the card in Slot 16. Slots 12 and 13 do not support DS-3 cards when the standard BNC EIA panel connectors are used.
When BNC connectors are used with a DS3N-12 card in Slot 3 or 15, the 1:N card protection extends only to the two slots adjacent to the 1:N card due to BNC wiring constraints.
1-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.4 High-Density BNC EIA
1.5.3.2 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool
Due to the large number of BNC connectors on the high-density BNC EIA, you might require a special tool for inserting and removing BNC EIAs (
). This tool also helps with ONS 15454 patch panel connections.
Figure 1-14 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool
This tool can be obtained with P/N 227-T1000 from:
Amphenol USA (www.amphenol.com)
One Kennedy Drive
Danbury, CT 06810
Phone: 203 743-9272 Fax: 203 796-2032
This tool can be obtained with P/N RT-1L from:
Trompeter Electronics Inc. (www.trompeter.com)
31186 La Baya Drive
Westlake Village, CA 91362-4047
Phone: 800 982-2629 Fax: 818 706-1040
1.5.4 High-Density BNC EIA
The ONS 15454 high-density BNC EIA supports 48 DS-3 circuits on each side of the ONS 15454
(48 transmit and 48 receive connectors). If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the unit, the
ONS 15454 hosts up to 96 circuits. The high-density BNC EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75-ohm)
4-leg connectors (King or ITT are also compatible). Use straight connectors on RG-59/U cable to connect to the high-density BNC EIA. Cisco recommends these cables for connection to a patch panel; they are designed for long runs. You can use high-density BNC EIAs for DS-3 (including the DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12) or EC-1 cards.
Figure 1-15 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled high-density BNC
EIAs.
To install coaxial cable with high-density BNC connectors, refer to the “Install Shelf and Backplane
Cable” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-19
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
Figure 1-15 High-Density BNC Backplane for Use in 1:N Protection Schemes
B
17
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
16
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
14
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
13
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
4
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
5
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
2
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
1
A
TX
1
RX
2
3
9
10
11
TX
12
RX
4
5
6
7
8
BNC backplane connectors
The EIA side marked “A” hosts 48 pairs of BNC connectors. Each column of connector pairs is numbered and corresponds to the slot of the same number. The first column (12 pairs) of BNC connectors corresponds to Slot 1 on the shelf assembly, the second column to Slot 2, the third column to Slot 4, and the fourth column to Slot 5. The rows of connectors correspond to Ports 1 to 12 of a 12-port card.
The EIA side marked “B” provides an additional 48 pairs of BNC connectors. The first column (12 pairs) of BNC connectors corresponds to Slot 13 on the shelf assembly, the second column to Slot 14, the third column to Slot 16, and the fourth column to Slot 17. The rows of connectors correspond to Ports 1 to 12 of a 12-port card. The BNC connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port. The High-Density BNC EIA supports both 1:1 and 1:N protection across all slots except Slots 6 and 12.
1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
The ONS 15454 MiniBNC EIA supports a maximum of 192 transmit and receive DS-3 connections, 96 per side (A and B) through 192 miniBNC connectors on each side. If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the unit, the ONS 15454 hosts up to 192 circuits. The MiniBNC EIAs are designed to support DS-3 and EC-1 signals.
The MiniBNC EIA supports the following cards:
•
DS3-12, DS3N-12
•
•
•
•
•
DS3i-N-12
DS3-12E, DS3N-12E
EC1-12
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-20 78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
•
DS3/EC1-48
MiniBNCs support available high-density cards in unprotected and 1:N protection (where N
< 2) protection groups.
shows protection groups and their applicable slot assignments.
Table 1-3 MiniBNC Protection Types and Slots
Protection Type
Unprotected
1:1
1:N (HD, where N
< 5)
1:N (LD, where N
< 2)
Working Slots
1–6, 12–17
2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16
1, 2, 16, 17
Protection Slots
—
1, 3, 5, 13, 15, 17
3, 15
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17 3, 15
1.5.5.1 MiniBNC Connectors
You can install MiniBNCs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454. As you face the rear of the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, the right side is the A side (15454-EIA-BNC-A96) and the left side is the B side
(15454-EIA-BNC-A96). The diagrams adjacent to each row of connectors indicate the slots and ports that correspond with each connector in that row, depending on whether you are using a high density (HD) or low density (LD) configuration. The MiniBNC connector pairs are marked Tx and Rx to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port.
Figure 1-16 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled MiniBNC EIAs.
To install coaxial cable with MiniBNC connectors, refer to the “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-21
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
Figure 1-16 MiniBNC Backplane for Use in 1:N Protection Schemes
1-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
and
show the J-labelling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly configured with low-density electrical cards.
Table 1-4 J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configure with Low-Density
Electrical Cards (A Side)
Slot Port Type
1
4
5
6
2
3
LD DS-3
LD DS-3
LD DS-3
LD DS-3
LD DS-3
LD DS-3
TX
J4
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T12
RX
J12
R1
R2
T8
T9
T10
T11
T24
J11
R13
R14
T20
T21
T22
T23
T16
T17
T18
T19
J3
T13
T14
T15
T36
J10
R25
R26
T32
T33
T34
T35
T28
T29
T30
T31
J2
T25
T26
T27
T48
J9
R37
R38
T44
T45
T46
T47
T40
T41
T42
T43
J1
T37
T38
T39
T12
J13
R1
R2
T8
T9
T10
T11
T4
T5
T6
T7
J5
T1
T2
T3
T24
J14
R13
R14
T20
T21
T22
T23
T16
T17
T18
T19
J6
T13
T14
T15
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R3
R4
R5
R6
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
R39
R40
R41
R42
R43
R44
R45
R46
R47
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
—
—
—
—
R12 R24 R36 R48 R12 R24 R36 R48
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
1–12 —
— —
—
—
—
—
—
1–12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–12 —
— 1–12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–12
—
—
1–12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R43
R44
R45
R46
R47
R39
R40
R41
R42
T36
J15
R25
R26
T32
T33
T34
T35
T28
T29
T30
T31
J7
T25
T26
T27
T48
J16
R37
R38
T44
T45
T46
T47
T40
T41
T42
T43
J8
T37
T38
T39
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-23
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
Table 1-5
Slot Port Type
17 LD DS-3
16 LD DS-3
15 LD DS-3
14 LD DS-3
13 LD DS-3
12 LD DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density
Electrical Cards (B Side)
R13
R14
R15
R16
T22
T23
T24
J27
T18
T19
T20
T21
J19
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
TX
J20
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
RX
J28
R1
R2
R3
R4
J18
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
J26
R25
R26
R27
R28
J17
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
T42
T43
T44
T45
T46
T47
T48
J25
R37
R38
R39
R40
J21
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
J29
R1
R2
R3
R4
J22
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T22
T23
T24
J30
R13
R14
R15
R16
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R9
R10
1–12
—
—
—
—
—
R21
R22
—
—
—
—
1–12
—
R33
R34
R45
R46
R9
R10
R21
R22
R11 R23 R35 R47 R11 R23 R35 R47
R12 R24 R36 R48 R12 R24 R36 R48
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
—
—
—
—
—
1–12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–12 —
—
—
—
—
— 1–12 —
1–12 — —
—
—
R33
R34
—
—
R45
R46
—
—
R25
R26
R27
R28
T34
T35
T36
J31
T30
T31
T32
T33
J23
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
R37
R38
R39
R40
T46
T47
T48
J32
T42
T43
T44
T45
J24
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
Table 1-7 show the J-labelling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly
configured with high-density 48-port DS-3/EC-1electrical cards.
1-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
Table 1-6
Slot Port Type
1 HD DS-3
2 HD DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical
Cards (A Side)
TX
J4
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10 T22
T11 T23
T12 T24
RX
J12 J11
R1
R2
R3
R4
R13
R14
R15
R16
T18
T19
T20
T21
J3
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
J2
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
J10
R25
R26
R27
R28
J1
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
T42
T43
T44
T45
T46
T47
T48
J9
R37
R38
R39
R40
J5
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
J6
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T10 T22
T11 T23
T12 T24
J13
R1
R2
R3
R4
J14
R13
R14
R15
R16
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R9 R21
R10 R22
R33
R34
R45
R46
R11 R23 R35 R47
R12 R24 R36 R48
Ports Ports Ports Ports
R9
R10
R11
R21
R22
R23
R12 R24
Ports Ports
R33
R34
R35
R36
R45
R46
R47
R48
Ports Ports
1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48 —
— — — — 1–12
—
13–24
—
25–36
—
37–48
R25
R26
R27
R28
T34
T35
T36
J15
T30
T31
T32
T33
J7
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
R37
R38
R39
R40
T46
T47
T48
J16
T42
T43
T44
T45
J8
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-25
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA
Table 1-7
Slot Port Type
17 HD DS-3
16 HD DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical
Cards (B Side)
R13
R14
R15
R16
T22
T23
T24
J27
T18
T19
T20
T21
J19
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
TX
J20
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
RX
J28
R1
R2
R3
R4
J18
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
J26
R25
R26
R27
R28
J17
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
T42
T43
T44
T45
T46
T47
T48
J25
R37
R38
R39
R40
J21
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
J29
R1
R2
R3
R4
J22
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T22
T23
T24
J30
R13
R14
R15
R16
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R5
R6
R7
R8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R29
R30
R31
R32
R41
R42
R43
R44
R9
R10
R21
R22
R11 R23
R12 R24
Ports Ports
R33
R34
R35
R36
Ports
R45
R46
R47
R48
Ports
R9
R10
R11
R12
R21
R22
R23
R24
Ports Ports
R33
R34
R35
R36
Ports
R45
R46
R47
R48
Ports
1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48 —
— — — — 1–12
—
13–24
—
25–36
—
37–48
R25
R26
R27
R28
T34
T35
T36
J31
T30
T31
T32
T33
J23
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
R37
R38
R39
R40
T46
T47
T48
J32
T42
T43
T44
T45
J24
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
1.5.5.2 MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool
Due to the large number of MiniBNC connectors on the MiniBNC EIA, you might require a special tool for inserting and removing MiniBNC EIAs (
). This tool also helps with ONS 15454 patch panel connections.
1-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-17 MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool
1.5 1.5.6 SMB EIA
This tool can be obtained with P/N 227-T1000 from:
Amphenol USA (www.amphenol.com)
One Kennedy Drive
Danbury, CT 06810
Phone: 203 743-9272 Fax: 203 796-2032
This tool can be obtained with P/N RT-1L from:
Trompeter Electronics Inc. (www.trompeter.com)
31186 La Baya Drive
Westlake Village, CA 91362-4047
Phone: 800 982-2629 Fax: 818 706-1040
1.5.6 SMB EIA
The ONS 15454 SMB EIA supports AMP 415484-1 75-ohm 4-leg connectors. Right-angle mating connectors for the connecting cable are AMP 415484-2 (75-ohm) connectors. Use RG-179/U cable to connect to the ONS 15454 EIA. Cisco recommends these cables for connection to a patch panel; they are not designed for long runs. Range does not affect loopback testing.
You can use SMB EIAs with DS-1, DS-3 (including the DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12), and EC-1 cards. If you use DS-1 cards, use the DS-1 electrical interface adapter (balun) to terminate the twisted pair DS-1 cable to the SMB EIA (see the
“1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters” section on page 1-38 ). SMB EIAs
support 14 ports per slot when used with a DS-1 card, 12 ports per slot when used with a DS-3 or EC-1 card, and 6 ports per slot when used with a DS3XM-6 card.
Figure 1-18 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled SMB EIAs and the sheet metal cover and screw
locations for the EIA. The SMB connectors on the EIA are AMP 415504-3 (75-ohm) 4-leg connectors.
To install SMB connectors, refer to the “Install Shelf and Backplane Cable” chapter in the Cisco ONS
15454 Procedure Guide.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-27
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA
Figure 1-18 SMB EIA Backplane
12x DS-3s
Reserved for DS-1s
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
B
17
TX RX TX
16
RX TX
15
RX TX
14
RX TX
13 12
RX TX RX
1
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
12
13
14
9
10
11
1
TX
6
RX TX
5
RX TX
4
RX TX
3
RX TX
2
A
1
RX TX RX
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
12
13
14
9
10
11
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
SMB backplane connectors
Tie wrap posts
The SMB EIA has 84 transmit and 84 receive connectors on each side of the ONS 15454 for a total of
168 SMB connectors (84 circuits).
The EIA side marked “A” hosts 84 SMB connectors in six columns of 14 connectors. The “A” side columns are numbered 1 to 6 and correspond to Slots 1 to 6 on the shelf assembly. The EIA side marked
“B” hosts an additional 84 SMB connectors in six columns of 14 connectors. The “B” side columns are numbered 12 to 17 and correspond to Slots 12 to 17 on the shelf assembly. The connector rows are numbered 1 to 14 and correspond to the 14 ports on a DS-1 card.
For DS-3 or EC-1 cards, the EIA supports 72 transmit and 72 receive connectors, for a total of 144 SMB connectors (72 circuits). If you use a DS-3 or EC-1 card, only Ports 1 to 12 are active. If you use a
DS3XM-6 card, only Ports 1 to 6 are active. The SMB connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to identify transmit and receive cables for each port. If you use SMB connectors, you can install DS-1,
DS-3, or EC-1 cards in Slots 1 to 4 or 14 to 17.
1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA
The ONS 15454 AMP Champ EIA supports 64-pin (32 pair) AMP Champ connectors for each slot on both sides of the shelf assembly where the EIA is installed. Cisco AMP Champ connectors are female
AMP # 552246-1 with AMP # 552562-2 bail locks. Each AMP Champ connector supports 14 DS-1 ports.
You can use AMP Champ EIAs with DS-1 cards only. Figure 1-19
shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled AMP Champ EIAs and the corresponding sheet metal cover and screw locations for the EIA.
To install AMP Champ connector DS-1 cables, you must use 64-pin bundled cable connectors with a
64-pin male AMP Champ connector. You need an AMP Champ connector #552276-1 for the receptacle side and #1-552496-1 (for cable diameter 0.475 in. to 0.540 in.) or #2-552496-1 (for cable diameter
0.540 in. to 0.605 in.) for the right-angle shell housing (or their functional equivalent). The corresponding 64-pin female AMP Champ connector on the AMP Champ EIA supports one receive and one transmit for each DS-1 port for the corresponding card slot.
1-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA
Because each DS1-14 card supports 14 DS-1 ports, only 56 pins (28 pairs) of the 64-pin connector are used. Prepare one 56-wire cable for each DS-1 facility installed.
Figure 1-19 AMP Champ EIA Backplane
AMP CHAMP connector
78-17191-01
shows the pin assignments for the AMP Champ connectors on the ONS 15454 AMP Champ
EIA. The EIA side marked “A” hosts six AMP Champ connectors. The connectors are numbered 1 to 6 for the corresponding slots on the shelf assembly. Each AMP Champ connector on the backplane supports 14 DS-1 ports for a DS1-14 card, and each connector features 28 live pairs—one transmit pair and one receive pair—for each DS-1 port.
The EIA side marked “B” hosts six AMP Champ connectors. The connectors are labeled 12 to 17 for the corresponding slots on the shelf assembly. Each AMP Champ connector on the backplane supports
14 DS-1 ports for a DS1-14 card, and each connector features 28 live pairs—one transmit pair and one receive pair—for each DS-1 port.
Note
EIAs are hot-swappable. You do not need to disconnect power to install or remove EIAs.
Caution
Always use an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-29
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA
1-30
Table 1-8 AMP Champ Connector Pin Assignments
Signal/Wire
Tx Tip 1 white/blue
Tx Tip 2 white/orange
Tx Tip 3 white/green
Tx Tip 4 white/brown
Tx Tip 5 white/slate
Tx Tip 6 red/blue
Tx Tip 7 red/orange
Tx Tip 8 red/green
Tx Tip 9 red/brown
Tx Tip 10 red/slate
Tx Tip 11 black/blue
Tx Tip 12 black/orange
Tx Tip 13 black/green
Tx Tip 14 black/brown
Pin Pin Signal/Wire
1 33 Tx Ring 1 blue/white
2
3
4
5
6
7
34 Tx Ring 2 orange/white
35 Tx Ring 3 green/white
36 Tx Ring 4 brown/white
37 Tx Ring 5 slate/white
38 Tx Ring 6 blue/red
39 Tx Ring 7 orange/red
8
9
40 Tx Ring 8 green/red
41 Tx Ring 9 brown/red
10 42 Tx Ring 10 slate/red
11 43 Tx Ring 11 blue/black
12 44 Tx Ring 12 orange/black
13 45 Tx Ring 13 green/black
14 46 Tx Ring 14 brown/black
Pin
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Pin
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Tx Spare0+ N/A 15 47 Tx Spare0– N/A Rx Spare0+ N/A 31 63
Rx Tip 8 violet/brown
Rx Tip 9 violet/slate
Rx Tip 10 white/blue
Rx Tip 11 white/orange
Rx Tip 12 white/green
Rx Tip 13 white/brown
Rx Tip 14 white/slate
Signal/Wire
Rx Tip 1 yellow/orange
Rx Tip 2 yellow/green
Rx Tip 3 yellow/brown
Rx Tip 4 yellow/slate
Rx Tip 5 violet/blue
Rx Tip 6 violet/orange
Rx Tip 7 violet/green
Tx Spare1+ N/A 16 48 Tx Spare1– N/A Rx Spare1+ N/A 32 64
Rx Ring 8 brown/violet
Rx Ring 9 slate/violet
Rx Ring 10 blue/white
Rx Ring 11 orange/white
Rx Ring 12 green/white
Rx Ring 13 brown/white
Rx Ring 14 slate/white
Signal/Wire
Rx Ring 1 orange/yellow
Rx Ring 2 green/yellow
Rx Ring 3 brown/yellow
Rx Ring 4 slate/yellow
Rx Ring 5 blue/violet
Rx Ring 6 orange/violet
Rx Ring 7 green/violet
Rx Spare0– N/A
Rx Spare1– N/A
Table 1-9 shows the pin assignments for the AMP Champ connectors on the ONS 15454 AMP Champ
EIA for a shielded DS-1 cable.
Table 1-9 AMP Champ Connector Pin Assignments (Shielded DS-1 Cable)
64-Pin Blue Bundle
Signal/Wire
Tx Tip 1 white/blue
Tx Tip 2 white/orange
Pin Pin Signal/Wire
1 33 Tx Ring 1 blue/white
2 34 Tx Ring 2 orange/white
64-Pin Orange Bundle
Signal/Wire
Rx Tip 1 white/blue
Rx Tip 2 white/orange
Pin Pin
17
18
49
50
Signal/Wire
Rx Ring 1 blue/white
Rx Ring 2 orange/white
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA
Table 1-9
64-Pin Blue Bundle
Signal/Wire
Tx Tip 3 white/green
Tx Tip 4 white/brown
Tx Tip 5 white/slate
Tx Tip 6 red/blue
Tx Tip 7 red/orange
Tx Tip 8 red/green
Tx Tip 9 red/brown
Tx Tip 10 red/slate
Tx Tip 11 black/blue
Tx Tip 12 black/orange
Tx Tip 13 black/green
Tx Tip 14 black/brown
Tx Tip 15 black/slate
Tx Tip 16 yellow/blue
Pin Pin Signal/Wire
3 35 Tx Ring 3 green/white
4
5
6
36 Tx Ring 4 brown/white
37 Tx Ring 5 slate/white
38 Tx Ring 6 blue/red
7
8
39 Tx Ring 7 orange/red
40 Tx Ring 8 green/red
9 41 Tx Ring 9 brown/red
10 42 Tx Ring 10 slate/red
11 43 Tx Ring 11 blue/black
12 44 Tx Ring 12 orange/black
13 45 Tx Ring 13 green/black
14 46 Tx Ring 14 brown/black
15 47 Tx Tip 15 slate/black
16 48 Tx Tip 16 blue/yellow
AMP Champ Connector Pin Assignments (Shielded DS-1 Cable) (continued)
64-Pin Orange Bundle
Signal/Wire
Rx Tip 3 white/green
Rx Tip 4 white/brown
Rx Tip 5 white/slate
Rx Tip 6 red/blue
Rx Tip 7 red/orange
Rx Tip 8 red/green
Rx Tip 9 red/brown
Rx Tip 10 red/slate
Rx Tip 11 black/blue
Rx Tip 12 black/orange
Rx Tip 13 black/green
Rx Tip 14 black/brown
Rx Tip 15 black/slate
Rx Tip 16 yellow/blue
Pin Pin
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Signal/Wire
Rx Ring 3 green/white
Rx Ring 4 brown/white
Rx Ring 5 slate/white
Rx Ring 6 blue/red
Rx Ring 7 orange/red
Rx Ring 8 green/red
Rx Ring 9 brown/red
Rx Ring 10 slate/red
Rx Ring 11 blue/black
Rx Ring 12 orange/black
Rx Ring 13 green/black
Rx Ring 14 brown/black
Rx Tip 15 slate/black
Rx Tip 16 blue/yellow
When using DS-1 AMP Champ cables, you must equip the ONS 15454 with an AMP Champ connector
EIA on each side of the backplane where DS-1 cables will terminate. Each AMP Champ connector on the EIA corresponds to a slot in the shelf assembly and is numbered accordingly. The AMP Champ connectors have screw-down tooling at each end of the connector.
When the DS1N-14 card is installed in an ONS 15454 shelf that has an AMP Champ EIA, the cable that connects the AMP Champ connector with the traffic source must be connected to the ground on both the sides to meet the EMC standard.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-31
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.8 UBIC-V EIA
1.5.8 UBIC-V EIA
UBIC-V EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide up to 112 transmit and receive connections through 16 SCSI connectors per side (A and B). The UBIC-V EIAs are designed to support
DS-1, DS-3, and EC-1 signals. The appropriate cable assembly is required depending on the type of signal.
You can install UBIC-Vs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454. As you face the rear of the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, the right side is the A side (15454-EIA-UBICV-A) and the left side is the B side
(15454-EIA-UBICV-B). The diagrams adjacent to each row of SCSI connectors indicate the slots and ports that correspond with each SCSI connector in that row, depending on whether you are using a high-density (HD) or low-density (LD) configuration.
UBIC-V EIAs will support high-density electrical cards (DS3/EC1-48, DS1/E1-56), as well as low-density electrical cards.
shows the A- and B-side slot assignments.
Figure 1-20
B
LD
UBIC-V Slot Designations
JACKSCREW SHOULD BE
INSTALLED FIRST AND
REMOVED LAST
(SLOT 17)(SLOT 16)(SLOT 15)
P
TX
P
RX
DS1/DS3 DS1/DS3
LD
JACKSCREW SHOULD BE
INSTALLED FIRST AND
REMOVED LAST
(SLOT 3) (SLOT 2) (SLOT 1)
P
P
RX
HD(SLOT 2) HD(SLOT 1)
TX
A
Tx
Tx
HD(SLOT 17) HD(SLOT 16)
J17 J20 J21 J23
REAR COVER
BRACKET
LOCATION
Rx
HD(SLOT 17) HD(SLOT 16)
J7 J5 J4 J1
REAR COVER
BRACKET
LOCATION
Rx
HD(SLOT 2)
HD(SLOT 1)
JACKSCREW SHOULD BE
INSTALLED FIRST AND
REMOVED LAST
J15 J13 J12 J9
J25 J28 J29 J31
Tx
Tx
JACKSCREW SHOULD BE
INSTALLED FIRST AND
REMOVED LAST
HD(SLOT 16) HD(SLOT 17)
HD(SLOT 1) HD(SLOT 2)
J24 J22 J19 J18
Rx
HD(SLOT 16) HD(SLOT 17)
J2 J3 J6 J8
Rx
HD(SLOT 1) HD(SLOT 2)
LD
REAR COVER
BRACKET
LOCATION
J32 J30 J27 J26
(SLOT 14)(SLOT 13)(SLOT 12)
TX
RX
LD
J10 J11 J14
(SLOT 6) (SLOT 5) (SLOT 4)
J16
TX
RX
REAR COVER
BRACKET
LOCATION
1-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA
The UBIC-V sheet metal covers use the same screw holes as the standard sheet metal covers, but they have 12 additional holes for pan-head screws and three holes for jack screws, so you can screw down the cover and the board using standoffs on the UBIC-V board.
When installed with the standard door and cabling on the backplane, the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 15.7 inches (399 mm) deep when partially populated with backplane cables, 16.1 inches
(409 mm) deep when fully populated, and 16.75 inches (425 mm) deep with the rear cover installed.
When installed with the deep door and cabling on the backplane, the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 17.5 inches (445 mm) deep when partially populated with backplane cables, 17.9 inches
(455 mm) deep when fully populated, and 18.55 inches (471 mm) deep with the rear cover installed.
The UBIC-V EIA supports the following cards:
•
•
•
DS1-14, DS1N-14
DS3-12, DS3N-12
DS3i-N-12
DS3-12E, DS3N-12E
•
•
•
•
EC1-12
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
DS3/EC1-48
•
•
DS1/E1-56
The A and B sides each host 16 high-density, 50-pin SCSI connectors. The A-side maps to
Slots 1 through 6 and the B-side maps to Slots 12 through 17.
In Software Releases 4.1.x and 4.6, UBIC-Vs support unprotected, 1:1, and 1:N (N < 5) protection groups. In Software R5.0 and later, UBIC-Vs also support available high-density cards in unprotected and 1:N (N
< 2) protection groups.
shows the UBIC-V protection types and their applicable slot assignments.
Table 1-10
Protection Type
Unprotected
1:1
1:2
1:5
UBIC-V Protection Types and Slots
Working Slots
1–6, 12–17
2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16
1, 2, 16, 17
Protection Slots
—
1, 3, 5, 13, 15, 17
3, 15
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17 3, 15
1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA
UBIC-H EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide up to 112 transmit and receive
DS-1 connections through 16 SCSI connectors per side (A and B) or 96 transmit and receive DS-3 connections. The UBIC-H EIAs are designed to support DS-1, DS-3, and EC-1 signals. The appropriate cable assembly is required depending on the type of signal.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-33
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA
You can install UBIC-Hs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454. As you face the rear of the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, the right side is the A side (15454-EIA-UBICH-A) and the left side is the B side
(15454-EIA-UBICH-B). The diagrams adjacent to each row of SCSI connectors indicate the slots and ports that correspond with each SCSI connector in that row, depending on whether you are using a high density (HD) or low density (LD) configuration.
Note
UBIC-H EIAs will support use with the high-density (DS3/EC1-48, DS1/E1-56, and DS3XM-12) electrical cards, as well as existing low-density electrical cards.
shows the A- and B-side connector labelling.
Figure 1-21 UBIC-H EIA Connector Labelling
Tables
and
1-12 show the J-labelling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly configured
with low-density electrical cards.
1-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
78-17191-01
1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA
Table 1-11
Slot Port Type
1 DS-1
2
DS-3
DS-1
3
4
DS-3
DS-1
DS-3
DS-1
5
6
DS-3
DS-1
DS-3
DS-1
DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density
Electrical Cards (A Side)
TX
J4
RX
J12
J3
J11
J2
J10
J1
J9
J5
J13
J6
J14
J7
J15
J8
J16
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
1–14 — — — — — — —
1–12 —
— —
—
—
—
—
— —
1–14 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–12 —
—
—
—
—
—
1–14
—
—
— 1–12 —
1–14 — —
—
—
—
—
—
— —
1–14 —
—
—
1–12 —
— 1–14
—
—
— 1–12 —
—
—
—
—
—
1–12 —
— —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 1-12
Slot Port Type
17 DS-1
DS-3
16 DS-1
DS-3
15 DS-1
DS-3
14 DS-1
DS-3
13 DS-1
DS-3
12 DS-1
DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density
Electrical Cards (B Side)
TX
J20 J19 J18 J17 J21 J22 J23 24
RX
J28 J27 J26 J25 J29 J30 J31 J32
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
—
—
—
—
1–14 —
1–12 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–14 —
1–12 —
1–14
1–12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–14 —
1–12 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–14 —
1–12 —
1–14 —
1–12 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
show the J-labelling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly configured with high-density 48-port DS-3/EC-1 or 56-port DS-1 electrical cards.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-35
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA
Table 1-13
Slot Port Type
1 DS-1
2
DS-3
DS-1
DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical
Cards (A Side)
TX
J4
RX
J12
J3
J11
J2
J10
J1
J9
J5
J13
J6
J14
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
1–14 15–28 29–42 43–56 — —
J7
J15
Ports
—
J8
J16
Ports
—
1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48 —
— — — — 1–14
—
15–28
—
29–42
—
43–56
— — — — 1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48
Table 1-14
Slot Port Type
17 DS-1
DS-3
16 DS-1
DS-3
J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High-Density Electrical
Cards (B Side)
TX
J20 J19
RX
J28 J27
Ports Ports
J18
J26
Ports
J17
J25
Ports
J21 J22
J29 J30
Ports Ports
J23
J31
Ports
24
J32
Ports
1–14 15–28 29–42 43–56 —
1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–14
1–12
—
—
15–28
13–24
—
—
29–42
25–36
—
—
43–56
37–48
If you are installing UBIC-H EIAs after the shelf assembly is installed, plug the UBIC-H EIA into the backplane. The UBIC-H backplane must replace the standard sheet metal cover to provide access to the cable connectors. The UBIC-H sheet metal covers use the same screw holes as the standard sheet metal covers, but they have 12 additional holes for panhead screws and three holes for jack screws so you can screw down the cover and the board using standoffs on the UBIC-H board.
When installed with the standard door and cabling on the backplane, the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 14.5 inches deep when fully populated with backplane cables, and 15.0 inches deep with the rear cover installed. When installed with the deep door and cabling on the backplane, the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 16.5 inches deep when fully populated with backplane cables, and 17.0 inches deep with the rear cover installed.
The UBIC-H EIA supports the following cards:
•
DS1-14, DS1N-14
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DS3-12, DS3N-12
DS3-12E, DS3N-12E
EC1-12
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
DS3/EC1-48
DS1/E1-56
1-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.6 1.5.10 EIA Replacement
The A and B sides each host 16 high-density, 50-pin SCSI connectors. The A-side maps to
Slots 1 through 6 and the B-side maps to Slots 12 through 17.
In Software Releases prior to Release 5.0, UBIC-Hs support unprotected, 1:1, and 1:N (where N
< 5) protection groups. In Software R5.0 and greater, UBIC-Hs additionally support available high-density cards in unprotected and 1:N protection (where N
< 2) protection groups.
shows protection groups and their applicable slot assignments.
Table 1-15 UBIC-H Protection Types and Slots
Protection Type
Unprotected
1:1
1:2
1:5
Working Slots
1–6, 12–17
2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16
1, 2, 16, 17
Protection Slots
—
1, 3, 5, 13, 15, 17
3, 15
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17 3, 15
1.5.10 EIA Replacement
Before you attach a new EIA, you must remove the backplane cover or EIA already installed on the ONS
15454. Refer to the spare document(s) for the EIA type(s) you are removing and replacing for specific information.
1.6 Coaxial Cable
Caution
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.
When using ONS 15454 DS-3 electrical cables, the cables must terminate on an EIA installed on the
ONS 15454 backplane. All DS-3 cables connected to the ONS 15454 DS-3 card must terminate with coaxial cables using the desired connector type to connect to the specified EIA.
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) performance of the node depends on good-quality DS-3 coaxial cables, such as Shuner Type G 03233 D, or the equivalent.
1.7 DS-1 Cable
DS-1 cables support AMP Champ connectors and twisted-pair wire-wrap cabling. Twisted-pair wire-wrap cables require SMB EIAs.
1.7.1 Twisted Pair Wire-Wrap Cables
Installing twisted-pair, wire-wrap DS-1 cables requires separate pairs of grounded twisted-pair cables for receive (in) and transmit (out). Prepare four cables, two for receive and two for transmit, for each
DS-1 facility to be installed.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-37
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.7 1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters
Caution
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.
If you use DS-1 electrical twisted-pair cables, equip the ONS 15454 with an SMB EIA on each side of the backplane where DS-1 cables will terminate. You must install special DS-1 electrical interface adapters, commonly referred to as a balun, on every transmit and receive connector for each DS-1 termination.
1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters
Note
DS-1 electrical interface adapters project an additional 1.72 inches (43.7 mm) from the ONS 15454 backplane.
If you install DS-1 cards in the ONS 15454, you must fit the corresponding transmit and receive SMB connectors on the EIA with a DS-1 electrical interface adapter. You can install the adapter on the SMB connector for the port. The adapter has wire-wrap posts for DS-1 transmit and receive cables.
shows the DS-1 electrical interface adapter.
Note
“EIA” refers to electrical interface assemblies and not electrical interface adapters. Electrical interface adapters are also known as baluns.
Figure 1-22
SMB Connector
DS-1 Electrical Interface Adapter (Balun)
Wire wrap posts
DS-1
Electrical interface adapter
Ring
Tip
Each DS-1 electrical interface adapter has a female SMB connector on one end and a pair of 0.045 inch
(1.14 mm) square wire-wrap posts on the other end. The wire-wrap posts are 0.200 inches (5.08 mm) apart.
Caution
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.
1-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables
1.8 UBIC-V Cables
Note
Cisco Systems announced the end-of-sale and end-of-life dates for the Cisco ONS 15454 MSPP
Universal BackPlane Interface Adapter, Vertical Orientation (UBIC-V), and its DS1 and DS3 Cables.
For further details, refer to Product Bulletin No. EOL5039 at http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/collateral/optical/ps5724/ps2006/prod_end-of-life_notice0900aecd8
052a481.html
.
The UBIC-V EIA is designed to support DS-1, DS-3, or EC-1 signals. The type of signal supported is determined by the respective UBIC-V cable assembly.
DS-1 cables for the UBIC-V have a maximum supported distance of 655 feet (199.6 m). DS-1 cables arrive with unterminated #24 AWG twisted pairs on the far end and are color coded as identified in
.
The following DS-1 cables are no longer available from Cisco Systems for use with the UBIC-V EIA:
•
•
DS-1 cable, 150 feet: 15454-CADS1-SD
DS-1 cable, 250 feet: 15454-CADS1-ID
•
DS-1 cable, 655 feet: 15454-CADS1-LD
DS-3/EC-1 cables for the UBIC-V have a maximum supported distance of 450 feet (137.2 m).
DS-3/EC-1 cables arrive with unterminated coaxial cable at the far end and labeled with the respective port number. 75-ohm BNC connectors for each port (qty. 12) are supplied and require that they be crimped on.
The following DS-3/EC-1 cables are no longer available from Cisco Systems for use with the UBIC-V
EIA:
•
•
•
DS-3/EC-1 cable, 75 feet: 15454-CADS3-SD
DS-3/EC-1 cable, 225 feet: 15454-CADS3-ID
DS-3/EC-1 cable, 450 feet: 15454-CADS3-LD
Figure 1-23 identifies the pin numbers for the DS-1 and DS-3/EC-1 cables as referenced from the SCSI
connector.
Figure 1-23
Pin 1
Cable Connector Pins
Pin 25
78-17191-01
Pin 26 Pin 50
identifies the UBIC-V SCSI connector pin assignments for the DS-1 cables as referenced from the EIA backplane to the SCSI connector.
Note
Conversion from the back plane’s single ended (unbalanced) 75-ohm signal to a differential (balanced)
100-ohm signal happens through the embedded transformer within the SCSI connector. The cable's
shield is connected to the connector shell. This conversion is illustrated in Figure 1-24
.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-39
1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables
Table 1-16
FGnd
#3
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#4
FGnd
FGnd
Port
#1
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#2
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#5
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#6
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#13
UBIC-V DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
4
5
6
7
2
3
SCSI Pin
1
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
49
50
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
SCSI Pin Port
26 #7
27
28
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#8
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#9
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#10
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#11
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#12
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#14
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables
Figure 1-24 UBIC-V DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
UBIC-V DS-1 Cable
1:1.15
Pin 1
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-V
DS1 75Ω
Port #1
Shield to connector shell
Tip DS1 #1
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
Ring DS1 #1
FGND
Pin 2 — FGnd
Pin 3 — FGnd
Pin 4 — FGnd
1:1.15
Pin 5
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-V
DS1 75Ω
Port #2
FGND
To/From SCSI connector on the
UBIC-V EIA
Pin 25
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-V
DS1 75Ω
Port #13
FGND
1:1.15
Tip DS1 #2
Ring DS1 #2
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
To/From
Customer DSX
Shield to connector shell
Tip DS1 #13
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
Ring DS1 #13
Pin 50
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-V
DS1 75Ω
Port #14
FGND
1:1.15
shows the UBIC-V DS-1 Tip/Ring color coding.
Tip DS1 #14
Ring DS1 #14
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-41
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables
Table 1-17 UBIC-V DS-1 Tip/Ring Color Coding
Wire Color
White/blue
Signal
Tip DS-1 #1
White/orange Tip DS-1 #2
White/green Tip DS-1 #3
White/brown Tip DS-1 #4
White/slate Tip DS-1 #5
Red/blue
Red/orange
Tip DS-1 #6
Tip DS-1 #7
Red/green
Red/brown
Red/slate
Black/blue
Tip DS-1 #8
Tip DS-1 #9
Tip DS-1 #10
Tip DS-1 #11
Black/orange Tip DS-1 #12
Black/green Tip DS-1 #13
Black/brown Tip DS-1 #14
Signal Wire Color
Ring DS-1 #1 Blue/white
Ring DS-1 #2 Orange/white
Ring DS-1 #3 Green/white
Ring DS-1 #4 Brown/white
Ring DS-1 #5 Slate/white
Ring DS-1 #6 Blue/red
Ring DS-1 #7 Orange/red
Ring DS-1 #8 Green/red
Ring DS-1 #9 Brown/red
Ring DS-1 #10 Slate/red
Ring DS-1 #11 Blue/black
Ring DS-1 #12 Orange/black
Ring DS-1 #13 Green/black
Ring DS-1 #14 Brown/black
Table 1-18 identifies the UBIC-V SCSI connector pin assignments for the DS-3/EC-1 cables as
referenced from the EIA backplane to the SCSI connector.
Table 1-18 UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
Port
FGnd
FGnd
#4
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#1
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#2
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#3
FGnd
SCSI Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
7
8
9
10
3
4
1
2
5
6
SCSI Pin Port
36
37
38
39
40
41
32
33
34
35
26
27
28
29
30
31
FGnd
FGnd
#10
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#7
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#8
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#9
FGnd
1-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Table 1-18 UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued)
Port
#5
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#6
FGnd
FGnd
22
23
FGnd 24
Not connected 25
19
20
21
SCSI Pin
17
18
SCSI Pin
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Port
#11
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#12
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
Not connected
Figure 1-25 shows the UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 cable schematic diagram.
1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-43
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
Figure 1-25 UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
DS-3/EC1 Cable
Pin 1
DS-3 75Ω
Port #1
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC
Port #1
Frame GND from shield to connector
Pin 5
DS-3 75Ω
Port #2
75Ω Signal To/From
Port #2
FGND
From/To
Customer DSx
Pin 42
DS-3 75Ω
Port #11
75Ω Signal To/From
Port #11
FGND
Pin 46
DS-3 75Ω
Port #12
75Ω Signal To/From
FGND
75Ω DS-3/EC1 signal coming to/from Tyco SCSI connector and being placed on 735A (or 735C) Coax
Port #12
1.9 UBIC-H Cables
The UBIC-H EIA is designed to support DS-1, DS-3, or EC-1 signals. The type of signal supported is determined by the UBIC-H cable assembly that you order.
To support DS-1 signals, select the DS-1 UBIC-H cable assembly (part number
15454-CADS1-H-<length>).
1-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
To support DS-3 or EC-1 signals, select the DS-3/EC-1 UBIC-H cable assembly (part number
15454-CADS3-H-<length>).
DS-1 cables for the UBIC-H have a maximum supported distance of 655 feet (199.6 m). DS-1 cables arrive with unterminated #24 AWG twisted pairs on the far end and are color coded as identified in
.
The following DS-1 cables are available from Cisco Systems for use with the UBIC-H EIA:
•
•
•
•
•
25 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-25
50 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-50
75 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-75
100 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-100
•
•
•
•
•
150 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-150
200 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-200
250 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-250
350 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-350
450 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-450
550 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-550
•
655 feet: 15454-CADS1-H-655
DS-3/EC-1 cables for the UBIC-H have a maximum supported distance of 450 feet (137.2 m).
DS-3/EC-1 cables arrive with unterminated coaxial cable at the far end and labeled with the respective port number. 75-ohm BNC connectors for each port (qty. 12) are supplied and require that they be crimped on.
The following DS-3/EC-1 cables are available from Cisco Systems for use with the UBIC-H EIA:
•
25 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-25
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
50 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-50
75 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-75
100 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-100
125 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-125
150 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-150
175 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-175
200 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-200
225 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-225
250 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-250
300 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-300
350 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-350
450 feet: 15454-CADS3-H-450
Figure 1-26 identifies the pin numbers for the DS-1 and DS-3/EC-1 cables as referenced from the SCSI
connector.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-45
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
Figure 1-26
Pin 1
Cable Connector Pins
Pin 25
Pin 26 Pin 50
Table 1-19 identifies the UBIC-H SCSI connector pin assignments for the DS-1 cables as referenced
from the EIA backplane to the SCSI connector.
Note
Conversion from the back plane’s single ended (unbalanced) 75-ohm signal to a differential (balanced)
100-ohm signal happens through the embedded transformer within the SCSI connector. The cable's shield is connected to the connector shell. This conversion is illustrated in
.
Table 1-19
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#4
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#5
Port
#1
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#2
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#3
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#6
FGnd
UBIC-H DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
20
21
22
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
SCSI Pin
1
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
43
44
45
46
47
31
32
33
34
SCSI Pin Port
26 #7
27
28
29
30
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#8
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#9
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#12
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#10
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#11
1-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
Table 1-19
Port
FGnd
FGnd
#13
UBIC-H DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued)
SCSI Pin
23
24
25
SCSI Pin
48
49
50
Port
FGnd
FGnd
#14
Figure 1-27 UBIC-H DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
UBIC-H DS-1 Cable
1:1.15
Pin 1
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-H
DS1 75Ω
Port #1
Shield to connector shell
Tip DS1 #1
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
Ring DS1 #1
FGND
Pin 2 — FGnd
Pin 3 — FGnd
Pin 4 — FGnd
1:1.15
Pin 5
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-H
DS1 75Ω
Port #2
FGND
Pin 25
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-H
DS1 75Ω
Port #13
FGND
1:1.15
Tip DS1 #2
Ring DS1 #2
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
To/From
Customer DSX
Shield to connector shell
Tip DS1 #13
100Ω Differential DS-1
To/From DSx
Ring DS1 #13
78-17191-01
Pin 50
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC-H
DS1 75Ω
Port #14
FGND
1:1.15
shows the UBIC-H DS-1 Tip/Ring color coding.
Tip DS1 #14
Ring DS1 #14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-47
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
Table 1-20 UBIC-H DS-1 Tip/Ring Color Coding
Wire Color
White/blue
Signal
Tip DS-1 #1
White/orange Tip DS-1 #2
White/green Tip DS-1 #3
White/brown Tip DS-1 #4
White/slate Tip DS-1 #5
Red/blue
Red/orange
Tip DS-1 #6
Tip DS-1 #7
Red/green
Red/brown
Red/slate
Black/blue
Tip DS-1 #8
Tip DS-1 #9
Tip DS-1 #10
Tip DS-1 #11
Black/orange Tip DS-1 #12
Black/green Tip DS-1 #13
Black/brown Tip DS-1 #14
Signal Wire Color
Ring DS-1 #1 Blue/white
Ring DS-1 #2 Orange/white
Ring DS-1 #3 Green/white
Ring DS-1 #4 Brown/white
Ring DS-1 #5 Slate/white
Ring DS-1 #6 Blue/red
Ring DS-1 #7 Orange/red
Ring DS-1 #8 Green/red
Ring DS-1 #9 Brown/red
Ring DS-1 #10 Slate/red
Ring DS-1 #11 Blue/black
Ring DS-1 #12 Orange/black
Ring DS-1 #13 Green/black
Ring DS-1 #14 Brown/black
Table 1-21 identifies the UBIC-H SCSI connector pin assignments for the DS-3/EC-1 cables as
referenced from the EIA backplane to the SCSI connector.
Table 1-21 UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out
Port
FGnd
FGnd
#4
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#1
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#2
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#3
FGnd
SCSI Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
7
8
9
10
3
4
1
2
5
6
SCSI Pin Port
36
37
38
39
40
41
32
33
34
35
26
27
28
29
30
31
FGnd
FGnd
#10
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#7
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#8
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#9
FGnd
1-48
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Table 1-21 UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued)
Port
#5
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#6
FGnd
FGnd
22
23
FGnd 24
Not connected 25
19
20
21
SCSI Pin
17
18
SCSI Pin
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Port
#11
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
#12
FGnd
FGnd
FGnd
Not connected
Figure 1-28 shows the UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 cable schematic diagram
1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-49
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.10 1.10 Ethernet Cables
Figure 1-28 UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 Cable Schematic Diagram
DS-3/EC1 Cable
Pin 1
DS-3 75Ω
Port #1
75Ω Signal
To/From UBIC
Port #1
Pin 5
DS-3 75Ω
Port #2
75Ω Signal To/From
Port #2
FGND
From/To
Customer DSx
Pin 42
DS-3 75Ω
Port #11
75Ω Signal To/From
Port #11
FGND
Pin 46
DS-3 75Ω
Port #12
75Ω Signal To/From
75Ω DS-3/EC1 signal coming to/from Tyco SCSI connector and being placed on 735A (or 735C) Coax
Port #12
1.10 Ethernet Cables
Ethernet cables use RJ-45 connectors, and are straight-through or crossover, depending on what is connected to them.
Table 1-22 shows 100Base-TX connector pin assignments, used with E100 Ethernet cards in the ONS
15454.
1-50
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Table 1-22
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
Pin
1
E100-TX Connector Pinout
Cable Port
RD+
RD–
TD+
NC
NC
TD–
NC
NC
Figure 1-29 shows the pin locations on 100BaseT connector.
Figure 1-29 100BaseT Connector Pins
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.10 1.10 Ethernet Cables
78-17191-01
Figure 1-30 shows the straight-through Ethernet cable schematic. Use a straight-through cable when
connecting to a router or a PC.
Figure 1-30
Switch
3 TD+
6 TD–
1 RD+
2 RD–
Straight-Through Cable
Router or PC
3 RD+
6 RD–
1 TD+
2 TD–
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-51
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.11 1.11 Cable Routing and Management
shows the crossover Ethernet cable schematic. Use a crossover cable when connecting to a switch or hub.
Figure 1-31
Switch
3 TD+
6 TD–
1 RD+
2 RD–
Crossover Cable
Switch
3 TD+
6 TD–
1 RD+
2 RD–
1.11 Cable Routing and Management
The ONS 15454 cable management facilities include the following:
•
•
A cable-routing channel (behind the fold-down door) that runs the width of the shelf assembly
(
)
Plastic horseshoe-shaped fiber guides at each side opening of the cable-routing channel that ensure the proper bend radius is maintained in the fibers (
)
Note
You can remove the fiber guide if necessary to create a larger opening (if you need to route
CAT-5 Ethernet cables out the side, for example). To remove the fiber guide, take out the three screws that anchor it to the side of the shelf assembly.
•
•
•
•
A fold-down door that provides access to the cable-management tray
Cable tie-wrap facilities on EIAs that secure cables to the cover panel
A cable routing channel that enables you to route cables out either side
Jumper slack storage reels (2) on each side panel that reduce the amount of slack in cables that are connected to other devices
Note
To remove the jumper slack storage reels, take out the screw in the center of each reel.
•
Optional tie-down bar
shows the cable management facilities that you can access through the fold-down front door, including the cable-routing channel and cable-routing channel posts.
1-52
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-32 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
1.11 1.11.1 Fiber Management
FAN
FAIL
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Cable-routing channel posts
Fold down front door
1.11.1 Fiber Management
The universal cable router is designed to route fiber jumpers out of both sides of the shelf. Slots 1 to 6 exit to the left, and Slots 12 to 17 exit to the right.
Figure 1-33 shows fibers routed from cards in the left
slots, down through the posts, then exiting out the fiber channel to the left. The maximum capacity of the fiber routing channel depends on the size of the fiber jumpers.
Figure 1-33 Fiber Capacity
78-17191-01
Fiber guides
provides the maximum capacity of the fiber channel for one side of a shelf, depending on fiber size and number of Ethernet cables running through that fiber channel.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-53
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.11 1.11.2 Fiber Management Using the Tie-Down Bar
Table 1-23
Fiber Diameter
1.6 mm (0.6 inch)
2 mm (0.7 inch)
3 mm (0.11 inch)
Fiber Channel Capacity (One Side of the Shelf)
Maximum Number of Fibers Exiting Each Side
No Ethernet Cables
144
One Ethernet Cable
127
Two Ethernet Cables
110
90
40
80
36
70
32
Plan your fiber size according to the number of cards/ports installed in each side of the shelf. For example, if your port combination requires 36 fibers, 3 mm (0.11 inch) fiber is adequate. If your port combination requires 68 fibers, you must use 2 mm(0.7 inch) or smaller fibers.
1.11.2 Fiber Management Using the Tie-Down Bar
You can install an optional 5-inch (127 mm) tie-down bar on the rear of the ANSI chassis. You can use tie-wraps or other site-specific material to bundle the cabling and attach it to the bar so that you can more easily route the cable away from the rack.
shows the tie-down bar, the ONS 15454, and the rack.
Figure 1-34 Tie-Down Bar
Tie-down bar
1.11.3 Coaxial Cable Management
Coaxial cables connect to EIAs on the ONS 15454 backplane using cable connectors. EIAs feature cable-management eyelets for tie wrapping or lacing cables to the cover panel.
1-54
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.12 1.11.4 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management
1.11.4 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management
Connect twisted pair/DS-1 cables to SMB EIAs on the ONS 15454 backplane using cable connectors and DS-1 EIAs (baluns).
1.11.5 AMP Champ Cable Management
EIAs have cable management eyelets to tiewrap or lace cables to the cover panel. Tie wrap or lace the
AMP Champ cables according to local site practice and route the cables. If you configure the ONS 15454 for a 23-inch (584.2 mm) rack, two additional inches (50.8 mm) of cable management area is available on each side of the shelf assembly.
1.12 Alarm Expansion Panel
The optional ONS 15454 alarm expansion panel (AEP) can be used with the Alarm Interface
Controller—International card (AIC-I) card to provide an additional 48 dry alarm contacts for the ONS
15454, 32 of which are inputs and 16 are outputs. The AEP is a printed circuit board assembly that is installed on the backplane.
Figure 1-35 shows the AEP board; the left connector is the input connector
and the right connector is the output connector.
The AIC-I without an AEP already contains direct alarm contacts. These direct AIC-I alarm contacts are routed through the backplane to wire-wrap pins accessible from the back of the shelf. If you install an
AEP, you cannot use the alarm contacts on the wire-wrap pins. For further information about the AIC-I,
see the “2.7 AIC-I Card” section on page 2-27
.
Figure 1-35 AEP Printed Circuit Board Assembly
Input Connector
78-17191-01
Output Connector
Figure 1-36 shows the AEP block diagram.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-55
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
Figure 1-36 AEP Block Diagram
AIC-I Interface
(wire wrapping)
TIA/EIA 485
Inventory data
(EEPROM)
AEP/AIE
CPLD
In Alarm Relays
Out Alarm Relays
Power Supply
Each AEP alarm input port has provisionable label and severity. The alarm inputs have optocoupler isolation. They have one common 48-VDC output and a maximum of 2 mA per input. Each opto metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) alarm output can operate by definable alarm condition, a maximum open circuit voltage of 60 VDC, anda maximum current of 100 mA. See the
Controls” section on page 2-29 for further information.
1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
shows the wire-wrapping connections on the backplane.
Figure 1-37 AEP Wire-Wrap Connections to Backplane Pins
White
Black
Orange
Yellow
3
4
1
A
2
BITS
B
1
A
2
3
4
LAN
B
1
2
A
3
4
FG1 FG2 FG3
IN
B
1
A
2
B
ACO
A B
7
A
8
3 5 9
4 6 10
ENVIRONMENTAL ALARMS
IN/OUT
IN
FG4 FG5 FG6
IN
B
1
A
2
B
1
A
2
3 3 3
4
MODEM
4 4
CRAFT
FG7 FG8 FG9
1
A
2
B
1
A
2
3
4
LOCAL ALARMS
VIS AUD
FG10
B
11
A
12
FG11
IN
B
FG12
1-56
Violet
Slate
Green
Blue
Brown
Red
Table 1-24 shows the backplane pin assignments and corresponding signals on the AIC-I and AEP.
Table 1-24 Pin Assignments for the AEP
AEP Cable Wire Backplane Pin AIC-I Signal
Black A1 GND
White
Slate
A2
A3
AE_+5
VBAT–
AEP Signal
AEP_GND
AEP_+5
VBAT–
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
78-17191-01
1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
Table 1-24 Pin Assignments for the AEP (continued)
AEP Cable Wire Backplane Pin AIC-I Signal
Violet
Blue
A4
A5
VB+
AE_CLK_P
Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
Brown
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
AE_CLK_N
AE_DIN_P
AE_DIN_N
AEP Signal
VB+
AE_CLK_P
AE_CLK_N
AE_DOUT_P
AE_DOUT_N
AE_DOUT_P AE_DIN_P
AE_DOUT_N AE_DIN_N
Figure 1-38 is a circuit diagram of the alarm inputs (Inputs 1 and 32 are shown in the example).
Figure 1-38 Alarm Input Circuit Diagram
Station AEP/AIE
48 V
GND max. 2 mA
Input 1
VBAT–
Input 48
VBAT–
lists the connections to the external alarm sources.
Table 1-25 Alarm Input Pin Association
4
5
2
3
6
7
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
1 ALARM_IN_1–
GND
ALARM_IN_3–
ALARM_IN_5–
GND
ALARM_IN_7–
ALARM_IN_9–
28
29
30
31
32
33
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
27 GND
ALARM_IN_2–
ALARM_IN_4–
GND
ALARM_IN_6–
ALARM_IN_8–
GND
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-57
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
Table 1-25 Alarm Input Pin Association (continued)
21
22
23
24
25
26
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
8
9
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
GND
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
34
ALARM_IN_11– 35
ALARM_IN_10–
ALARM_IN_12–
ALARM_IN_13– 36
GND 37
ALARM_IN_15– 38
GND
ALARM_IN_14–
ALARM_IN_16–
ALARM_IN_17–
GND
GND
GND
39
40
ALARM_IN_19– 41
ALARM_IN_21– 42
43
ALARM_IN_23– 44
ALARM_IN_25– 45
46
GND
ALARM_IN_18–
ALARM_IN_20–
GND
ALARM_IN_22–
ALARM_IN_24–
GND
ALARM_IN_26–
ALARM_IN_27– 47
ALARM_IN_29– 48
GND 49
ALARM_IN_31– 50
ALARM_IN_+
ALARM_IN_0–
51
52
ALARM_IN_28–
GND
ALARM_IN_30–
N.C.
GND1
GND2
is a circuit diagram of the alarm outputs (Outputs 1 and 16 are shown in the example).
1-58
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-39
Station
Alarm Output Circuit Diagram
max. 60 V/100 mA
1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections
AEP/AIE
Output 1
Output 16
78-17191-01
Use the pin numbers in
to connect to the external elements being switched by external alarms.
Table 1-26 Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
1
2
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
N.C.
COM_1
NO_1
N.C.
COM_3
NO_3
N.C.
COM_5
NO_5
N.C.
COM_7
NO_7
N.C.
COM_9
NO_9
N.C.
COM_11
NO_11
N.C.
40
41
42
43
44
45
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
29
30
31
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
27
28
COM_0
N.C.
NO_2
COM_2
N.C.
NO_4
COM_4
N.C.
NO_6
COM_6
N.C.
NO_8
COM_8
N.C.
NO_10
COM_10
N.C.
NO_12
COM_12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-59
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.13 1.13 Filler Card
Table 1-26 Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins (continued)
22
23
24
25
26
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
20
21
COM_13
NO_13
N.C.
COM_15
NO_15
N.C.
NO_0
AMP Champ
Pin Number Signal Name
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
N.C.
NO_14
COM_14
N.C.
N.C.
GND1
GND2
1.13 Filler Card
Filler cards are designed to occupy empty multiservice and AIC-I slots in the Cisco ONS 15454 (Slots
1 – 6, 9, and 12 – 17). The filler card cannot operate in the XC slots (Slots 8 and 10) or TCC slots (7 and
11). When installed, the filler card aids in maintaining proper air flow and EMI requirements.
Note
There are two types of filler cards, a detectable version (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) and a non-detectable version (Cisco P/N 15454-BLANK). The detectable card has the label FILLER on the faceplate. The non-detectable card has no faceplate label. In Software Release 6.0 and greater, the former card is detectable through CTC when installed in the ONS 15454 shelf.
shows the faceplate of the detectable filler card. The filler cards have no card-level LED indicators.
1-60
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-40 Detectable Filler Card Faceplate
FILLER
1.14 1.14 Fan-Tray Assembly
1.14 Fan-Tray Assembly
The fan-tray assembly is located at the bottom of the ONS 15454 bay assembly. The fan tray is a removable drawer that holds fans and fan-control circuitry for the ONS 15454. The front door can be left in place or removed before installing the fan-tray assembly. After you install the fan tray, you should only need to access it if a fan failure occurs or if you need to replace or clean the fan-tray air filter.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-61
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.14 1.14.1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements
The front of the fan-tray assembly has an LCD screen that provides slot- and port-level information for all ONS 15454 card slots, including the number of Critical, Major, and Minor alarms. For optical cards, you can use the LCD to determine if a port is in working or protect mode and is active or standby. The
LCD also tells you whether the software load is SONET or SDH and the software version number.
Note
The 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly and 15454-FTA3 fan-tray assembly are required with any ONS 15454 that has XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards.
Caution
The 15454-FTA3-T fan-tray assembly can only be installed in ONS 15454 Release 3.1 and later shelf assemblies (15454-SA-ANSI, P/N: 800-19857; 15454-SA-HD, P/N: 800-24848). The fan-tray assembly has a pin that prevents it from being installed in ONS 15454 shelf assemblies released before ONS 15454
Release 3.1 (15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3, and 15454-SA-R1, P/N: 800-07149). Equipment damage can result from attempting to install the 15454-FTA3 in a noncompatible shelf assembly.
Note
The 15454-FTA3 is not I-temp compliant. To obtain an I-temp fan tray, install the 15454-FTA3-T fan-tray assembly in an ONS 15454 Release 3.1 shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD).
However, do not install the ONS 15454 XC10G cross-connect cards with the 15454-FTA2 fan-tray assembly.
1.14.1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements
Fan speed is controlled by TCC2/TCC2P card temperature sensors. The sensors measure the input air temperature at the fan-tray assembly. Fan speed options are low, medium, and high. If the TCC2/TCC2P card fails, the fans automatically shift to high speed. The temperature measured by the TCC/TCC2P2 sensors is displayed on the LCD screen.
Table 1-27 lists power requirements for the fan-tray assembly.
Table 1-27 Fan Tray Assembly Power Requirements
Fan Tray Assembly
FTA2
FTA3 -T
Watts
53
86.4
Amps
1.21
1.8
BTU/Hr
198
295
1.14.2 Fan Failure
If one or more fans fail on the fan-tray assembly, replace the entire assembly. You cannot replace individual fans. The red Fan Fail LED on the front of the fan tray illuminates when one or more fans fail.
For fan tray replacement instructions, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide. The red Fan
Fail LED clears after you install a working fan tray.
1-62
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.15 1.14.3 Air Filter
1.14.3 Air Filter
The ONS 15454 contains a reusable air filter; Model 15454-FTF2, that is installed either beneath the fan-tray assembly or in the optional external filter brackets. Earlier versions of the ONS 15454 used a disposable air filter that is installed beneath the fan-tray assembly only. However, the reusable air filter is backward compatible.
The reusable filter is made of a gray, open-cell, polyurethane foam that is specially coated to provide fire and fungi resistance. All versions of the ONS 15454 can use the reusable air filter. Spare filters should be kept in stock.
Caution
Do not operate an ONS 15454 without the mandatory fan-tray air filter.
Caution
Inspect the air filter every 30 days, and clean the filter every three to six months. Replace the air filter every two to three years. Avoid cleaning the air filter with harsh cleaning agents or solvents. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for information about cleaning and maintaining the fan-tray air filter.
1.15 Power and Ground Description
Ground the equipment according to Telcordia standards or local practices.
Cisco recommends the following wiring conventions, but customer conventions prevail:
•
•
Red wire for battery connections (–48 VDC)
Black wire for battery return connections (0 VDC)
•
The battery return connection is treated as DC-I, as defined in GR-1089-CORE, issue 3.
The ONS 15454 has redundant –48 VDC #8 power terminals on the shelf-assembly backplane. The terminals are labeled BAT1, RET1, BAT2, and RET2 and are located on the lower section of the backplane behind a clear plastic cover.
To install redundant power feeds, use four power cables and one ground cable. For a single power feed, only two power cables (#10 AWG, 2.588 mm² [0.1018 inch], copper conductor, 194°F [90°C]) and one ground cable (#6 AWG, 4.115 mm² [0.162 inch]) are required. Use a conductor with low impedance to ensure circuit overcurrent protection. However, the conductor must have the capability to safely conduct any faulty current that might be imposed.
The existing ground post is a #10-32 bolt. The nut provided for a field connection is also a #10 AWG
(2.588 mm² [0.1018 inch]), with an integral lock washer. The lug must be a dual-hole type and rated to accept the #6 AWG (4.115 mm² [0.162 inch]) cable. Two posts are provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 to accommodate the dual-hole lug.
shows the location of the ground posts.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-63
1.16 1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections
Figure 1-41 Ground Posts on the ONS 15454 Backplane
Attach #6 AWG
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
FRAME GROUND
1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections
Caution
Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.
The ONS 15454 has a backplane pin field located at the bottom of the backplane. The backplane pin field provides 0.045 square inch (29 mm
2
) wire-wrap pins for enabling external alarms, timing input and output, and craft interface terminals. This section describes the backplane pin field and the pin
assignments for the field. Figure 1-42
shows the wire-wrap pins on the backplane pin field. Beneath each wire-wrap pin is a frame ground pin. Frame ground pins are labeled FG1, FG2, FG3, etc. Install the ground shield of the cables connected to the backplane to the ground pin that corresponds to the pin field used.
Note
The AIC-I requires a shelf assembly running Software Release 3.4.0 or later. The backplane of the ANSI shelf contains a wire-wrap field with pin assignment according to the layout in
assembly might be an existing shelf that has been upgraded to R3.4 or later. In this case the backplane pin labelling appears as indicated in
. But you must use the pin assignments provided by the AIC-I as shown in
.
1-64
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.16 1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections
Figure 1-42 ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts (Release 3.4 or Later)
2
3
1
A
4
BITS
B
1
A
2
3
4
LAN
B
1
2
3
4
FG1 FG2
A
FG3
IN
B
1
A
2
3
B
ACO
A B
7
A
8
9 5
4 6 10
ENVIRONMENTAL ALARMS
FG4
IN/OUT
FG5
IN
FG6
IN
B
1
2
3
A B
1
A
2
3
4
MODEM
4 4
CRAFT
FG7 FG8 FG9
2
3
1
A B
1
A
2
3
4
LOCAL ALARMS
VIS AUD
FG10
B
11
A
12
FG11
IN
B
FG12
Field Pin Function Field Pin Function
BITS
LAN
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
BITS Output 2 negative (–)
BITS Output 2 positive (+)
BITS Input 2 negative (–)
BITS Input 2 positive (+)
BITS Output 1 negative (–)
BITS Output 1 positive (+)
BITS Input 1 negative (–)
BITS Input 1 positive (+)
A1
Connecting to a hub, or switch
RJ-45 pin 6 RX–
B1 RJ-45 pin 3 RX+
A2
B2
ENVIR
ALARMS
IN
A1
B1
A2
A2 RJ-45 pin 2 TX–
B2
RJ-45 pin 1 TX+
Connecting to a PC/Workstation or router
A1
B1
RJ-45 pin 2 RX–
RJ-45 pin 1 RX+
RJ-45 pin 6 TX–
RJ-45 pin 3 TX+
Alarm input pair number 1: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 2: Reports closure on connected wires.
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
Alarm input pair number 3: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 4: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 5: Reports closure on connected wires.
B6
A7
B7
A8
A5
B5
A6
Alarm input pair number 6: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 7: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 8: Reports closure on connected wires.
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
Alarm input pair number 9: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 10: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 11: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 12: Reports closure on connected wires.
ENVIR
ALARMS
IN/OUT
A1/A13 Normally open output pair number 1
B1/B13
A2/A14 Normally open output pair number 2
N/O
B2/B14
A3/A15 Normally open output pair number 3
B3/B15
ACO A1
B1
CRAFT A1
A4/A16 Normally open output pair number 4
B4/B16
Normally open ACO pair
A2
A3
Receive (PC pin #2)
Transmit (PC pin #3)
Ground (PC pin #5)
DTR (PC pin #4) A4
LOCAL
ALARMS
AUD
(Audible)
A1
B1
A2
B2
N/O
A3
B3
Alarm output pair number 1: Remote audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 2: Critical audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 3: Major audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 4: Minor audible alarm.
A4
B4
LOCAL
ALARMS
VIS
(Visual)
A1
B1
A2
B2
N/O
A3
B3
A4
B4
Alarm output pair number 1: Remote visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 2: Critical visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 3: Major visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 4: Minor visual alarm.
If you are using an
AIC-I card, contacts provisioned as OUT are 1-4. Contacts provisioned as IN are 13-16.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-65
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.16 1.16.1 Alarm Contact Connections
Figure 1-43 ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts
3
4
1
A
2
FG1
BITS
B
1
A
2
3
4
FG2
LAN
B
1
A B
1
A B
1
A B
1
A B
1
A B
1
A
1
A B
1
A B
1
A B
1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4
FG3
ENVIR
IN
4 4
FG4
ALARMS
OUT
FG5
ACO
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
4
FG6
X . 25
4 4 4 4 4
FG7
MODEM
FG8
CRAFT
FG9
LOCAL
VIS
FG10
ALARMS
AUD
FG11
TBOS
FG12
Field Pin Function
BITS A1
B1
A2
B2
BITS Output 2 negative (-)
BITS Output 2 positive (+)
BITS Input 2 negative (-)
BITS Input 2 positive (+)
A3
B3
A4
BITS Output 1 negative (-)
BITS Output 1 positive (+)
BITS Input 1 negative (-)
LAN
B4 BITS Input 1 positive (+)
A1
Connecting to a hub, or switch
RJ-45 pin 6 RX-
B2
A1
ENVIR
ALARMS
IN
B1
A2
B1
A2
B2
A1
RJ-45 pin 1 TX+
Connecting to a PC/Workstation or router
RJ-45 pin 2 RX-
B1
A2
RJ-45 pin 3 RX+
RJ-45 pin 2 TX-
RJ-45 pin 1 RX+
RJ-45 pin 6 TX-
RJ-45 pin 3 TX+
Alarm input pair number 1: Reports closure on connected wires.
Alarm input pair number 2: Reports closure on connected wires.
B2
A3
B3
Alarm input pair number 3: Reports closure on connected wires.
A4
B4
Alarm input pair number 4: Reports closure on connected wires.
Field Pin
ENVIR
ALARMS
OUT
A1
B1
A2
N/O
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
ACO A1
B1
CRAFT A1
A2
A3
LOCAL
ALARMS
AUD
(Audible)
A4
A1
B1
A2
B2
N/O
A3
B3
A4
B4
LOCAL
ALARMS
VIS
(Visual)
A1
B1
A2
B2
N/O
A3
B3
A4
B4
Function
Normally open output pair number 1
Normally open output pair number 2
Normally open output pair number 3
Normally open output pair number 4
Normally open ACO pair
Receive (PC pin #2)
Transmit (PC pin #3)
Ground (PC pin #5)
DTR (PC pin #4)
Alarm output pair number 1: Remote audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 2: Critical audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 3: Major audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 4: Minor audible alarm.
Alarm output pair number 1: Remote visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 2: Critical visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 3: Major visual alarm.
Alarm output pair number 4: Minor visual alarm.
1.16.1 Alarm Contact Connections
The alarm pin field supports up to 17 alarm contacts, including four audible alarms, four visual alarms, one alarm cutoff (ACO), and four user-definable alarm input and output contacts.
Audible alarm contacts are in the LOCAL ALARM AUD pin field and visual contacts are in the LOCAL
ALARM VIS pin field. Both of these alarms are in the LOCAL ALARMS category. User-definable contacts are in the ENVIR ALARM IN (external alarm) and ENVIR ALARM OUT (external control) pin fields. These alarms are in the ENVIR ALARMS category; you must have the AIC-I card installed to use the ENVIR ALARMS. Alarm contacts are Normally Open (N/O), meaning that the system closes the alarm contacts when the corresponding alarm conditions are present. Each alarm contact consists of two wire-wrap pins on the shelf assembly backplane. Visual and audible alarm contacts are classified as
critical, major, minor, and remote. Figure 1-43
shows alarm pin assignments.
1-66
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.16 1.16.2 Timing Connections
Visual and audible alarms are typically wired to trigger an alarm light or bell at a central alarm collection point when the corresponding contacts are closed. You can use the Alarm Cutoff pins to activate a remote
ACO for audible alarms. You can also activate the ACO function by pressing the ACO button on the
TCC2/TCC2P card faceplate. The ACO function clears all audible alarm indications. After clearing the audible alarm indication, the alarm is still present and viewable in the Alarms tab in CTC. For more information, see the
“2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls” section on page 2-29
.
1.16.2 Timing Connections
The ONS 15454 backplane supports two building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock pin fields. The first four BITS pins, rows 3 and 4, support output and input from the first external timing device. The last four BITS pins, rows 1 and 2, perform the identical functions for the second external timing device.
lists the pin assignments for the BITS timing pin fields.
Note
For timing connection, use 100-ohm shielded BITS clock cable pair #22 or #24 AWG (0.51 mm² [0.020 inch] or 0.64 mm² [0.0252 inch]), twisted-pair T1-type.
Table 1-28 BITS External Timing Pin Assignments
External Device
First external device
Contact
A3 (BITS 1 Out)
B3 (BITS 1 Out)
A4 (BITS 1 In)
B4 (BITS 1 In)
Second external device A1 (BITS 2 Out)
B1 (BITS 2 Out)
A2 (BITS 2 In)
B2 (BITS 2 In)
Tip and Ring
Primary ring (–)
Primary tip (+)
Secondary ring (–)
Secondary tip (+)
Primary ring (–)
Primary tip (+)
Secondary ring (–)
Secondary tip (+)
Function
Output to external device
Output to external device
Input from external device
Input from external device
Output to external device
Output to external device
Input from external device
Input from external device
Note
Refer to Telcordia SR-NWT-002224 for rules about provisioning timing references.
For more information, see
1.16.3 LAN Connections
Use the LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane to connect the ONS 15454 to a workstation or Ethernet
LAN, or to a LAN modem for remote access to the node. You can also use the LAN port on the
TCC2/TCC2P card faceplate to connect a workstation or to connect the ONS 15454 to the network.
shows the LAN pin assignments.
Before you can connect an ONS 15454 to other ONS 15454s or to a LAN, you must change the default
IP address that is shipped with each ONS 15454 (192.1.0.2).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-67
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.17 1.16.4 TL1 Craft Interface Installation
Table 1-29 LAN Pin Assignments
Pin Field
LAN 1
Connecting to data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE
1
, a hub or switch)
LAN 1
Connecting to data terminal equipment
(DTE) (a PC/workstation or router)
A1
B1
A1
B2
A2
Backplane Pins
B2
A2
B1
1.
The Cisco ONS 15454 is DCE.
2
3
6
6
1
2
3
RJ-45 Pins
1
1.16.4 TL1 Craft Interface Installation
You can use the craft pins on the ONS 15454 backplane or the EIA/TIA-232 port on the TCC2/TCC2P card faceplate to create a VT100 emulation window to serve as a TL1 craft interface to the ONS 15454.
Use a straight-through cable to connect to the EIA/TIA-232 port.
Table 1-30 shows the pin assignments
for the CRAFT pin field.
Note
You cannot use the craft backplane pins and the EIA/TIA-232 port on the TCC2/TCC2P card simultaneously.
Note
To use the serial port craft interface wire-wrap pins on the backplane, the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire-wrap pin must be connected and active.
Table 1-30
Pin Field
Craft
Craft Interface Pin Assignments
Contact
A1
A2
A3
A4
Function
Receive
Transmit
Ground
DTR
1.17 Cards and Slots
ONS 15454 cards have electrical plugs at the back that plug into electrical connectors on the shelf- assembly backplane. When the ejectors are fully closed, the card plugs into the assembly backplane.
shows card installation.
1-68
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
Figure 1-44 Installing Cards in the ONS 15454
1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements
FAN F
AIL
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Guide rail
Ejector
1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements
The ONS 15454 shelf assembly has 17 card slots numbered sequentially from left to right. Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 are multiservice slots that are used for electrical, optical, and Ethernet cards (traffic cards).
Card compatibility depends on the EIA, protection scheme, and cross-connect card type used in the shelf. Refer to the
“3.1.2 Card Compatibility” section on page 3-3
for more detailed compatibility information.
Slots 7 and 11 are dedicated to TCC2/TCC2P cards. Slots 8 and 10 are dedicated to cross-connect
(XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G) cards. Slot 9 is reserved for the optional AIC-I card. Slots 3 and
15 can also host electrical cards that are used for 1:N protection. (See the
Protection” section on page 7-1
for a list of electrical cards that can operate as protect cards.)
Caution
Do not operate the ONS 15454 with a single TCC2/TCC2P card or a single
XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G card installed. Always operate the shelf assembly with one working and one protect card of the same type.
Shelf assembly slots have symbols indicating the type of cards that you can install in them. Each
ONS 15454 card has a corresponding symbol. The symbol on the card must match the symbol on the slot.
shows the slot and card symbol definitions.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-69
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements
Note
Protection schemes and EIA types can affect slot compatibility.
Table 1-31
Symbol
Color/Shape
Orange/Circle
Blue/Triangle
Purple/Square
Green/Cross
Red/P
Red/Diamond
Gold/Star
Blue/Hexagon
Slot and Card Symbols
Definition
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a circle symbol on the faceplate.
Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13. Only install ONS 15454 cards with circle or a triangle symbol on the faceplate.
TCC2/TCC2P slot, Slots 7 and 11. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a square symbol on the faceplate.
Cross-connect (XCVT/XC10G) slot, Slots 8 and 10. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a cross symbol on the faceplate.
Protection slot in 1:N protection schemes.
AIC-I slot (Slot 9). Only install ONS 15454 cards with a diamond symbol on the faceplate.
Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a star symbol on the faceplate.
(Only used with the 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly) Slots 3 and 15. Only install
ONS 15454 cards with a blue hexagon symbol on the faceplate.
Table 1-32 lists the number of ports, line rates, connector options, and connector locations for
ONS 15454 optical and electrical cards.
Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors
Card
DS1-14
Ports
14
Line Rate per Port
1.544 Mbps
Connector
Location
Backplane
DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
DS3-12
DS3N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
14
56
12
12
12
12
6
12
1.544 Mbps
1.544 Mbps
44.736 Mbps
44.736 Mbps
44.736 Mbps
44.736 Mbps
44.736 Mbps
89.472 Mbps
Connector Types
SMB w/wire wrap adapter, AMP Champ connector
SMB w/wire wrap
1 adapter, AMP Champ connector
SMB w/wire wrap
2 adapter, AMP Champ connector
SMB or BNC
1
SMB or BNC
1
SMB or BNC
1
SMB or BNC
1
SMB or BNC
1
SMB or BNC
1
—
—
Backplane
—
Backplane
—
Backplane
Backplane
1-70
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements
Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued)
Card
DS3/EC1-48
EC1-12
E100T-12
E1000-2
E100T-G
E1000-2-G
G1K-4
ML100T-12
ML100X-8
CE-100T-8
ML1000-2
OC-3 IR
OC3 IR/STM4 SH
1310-8
Ports
48
12
12
2
12
2
4
12
8
8
2
4
8
OC-12/STM4-4
(IR/LR)
OC-12 (IR/LR)
OC-48 ELR
(100GHz, 200GHz)
OC192 SR/STM64
IO 1310
4
1
OC-48
(IR/LR/ELR)
1
OC-48 AS (IR/LR) 1
1
1
1 OC192 IR/STM64
SH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64
LH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64
LH ITU 15xx.xx
FC_MR-4
1
1
4 (only 2 available in R4.6)
Line Rate per Port
2.147 Gbps
51.84 Mbps
100 Mbps
1 Gbps
100 Mbps
1 Gbps
1 Gbps
100 Mbps
100 Mbps
100 Mbps
1 Gbps
155.52 Mbps (STS-3)
155.52 Mbps (STS-3)
622.08 Mbps (STS-12)
622.08 Mbps (STS-12)
2488.32 Mbps (STS-48)
2488.32 Mbps (STS-48)
2488.32 Mbps (STS-48)
9.95 Gbps (STS-192)
9.95 Gbps (STS-192)
9.95 Gbps (STS-192)
9.95 Gbps (STS-192)
1.0625 Gbps
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
Connector Types
SMB or BNC
SMB or BNC
1
RJ-45
SC (GBIC)
RJ-45
SC (GBIC)
SC (GBIC)
RJ-45
SC (SFP)
RJ-45
LC (SFP)
SC
LC
SC
Connector
Location
Backplane
Backplane
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
Faceplate
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-71
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.17 1.17.2 Card Replacement
Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued)
Card
15454_MRC-12
Ports
12
Line Rate per Port
Up to 2488.32 Mbps
(STM-16), depending on
SFP
9.95 Gbps (STM-64)
Connector Types
LC
Connector
Location
Faceplate
OC192SR1/STM64
IO Short Reach/
OC192/STM64
Any Reach
3
1 LC Faceplate
1.
When used as a protect card, the card does not have a physical external connection. The protect card connects to the working card(s) through the backplane and becomes active when the working card fails. The protect card then uses the physical connection of the failed card.
2.
When used as a protect card, the card does not have a physical external connection. The protect card connects to the working card(s) through the backplane and becomes active when the working card fails. The protect card then uses the physical connection of the failed card.
3.
These cards are designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
1.17.2 Card Replacement
To replace an ONS 15454 card with another card of the same type, you do not need to make any changes to the database; remove the old card and replace it with a new card. To replace a card with a card of a different type, physically remove the card and replace it with the new card, then delete the original card from CTC. For specifics, refer to the “Install Cards and Fiber-Optic Cable” chapter in the Cisco ONS
15454 Procedure Guide.
Caution
Removing any active card from the ONS 15454 can result in traffic interruption. Use caution when replacing cards and verify that only inactive or standby cards are being replaced. If the active card needs to be replaced, switch it to standby prior to removing the card from the node. For traffic switching procedures, refer to the “Maintain the Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Note
An improper removal (IMPROPRMVL) alarm is raised whenever a card is removed and reinserted
(reseated) is performed, unless the card is deleted in CTC first. The alarm clears after the card replacement is complete.
Note
In a path protection, pulling the active XCVT/XC10G without a lockout causes path protection circuits to switch.
1.17.3 Ferrites
Place third-party ferrites on certain cables to dampen electromagnetic interference (EMI) from the ONS
15454. Ferrites must be added to meet the requirements of Telcordia GR-1089-CORE. Refer to the ferrite manufacturer documentation for proper use and installation of the ferrites. Ferrite placements on the ONS 15454 can include power cables, AMP Champ connectors, baluns, BNC/SMB connectors, and the wire-wrap pin field.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-72 78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
shows ONS 15454 software and hardware compatibility for nodes configured with XC or
XCVT cards for Releases 4.6, 4.7, 5.0, 6.0, and 7.0.
For software compatibility for a specific card, refer to the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html
Note
Partially supported : Once a card has been through End Of Life(EOL), new features would not be supported for the card. However bug fixes would be available.
Note
TCC and TCC+ are only supported up to Release 4.x.
Hardware
TCC2
TCC2P
AIC
AIC-I
DS1-14
DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
DS3-12
3
DS3N-12
DS3i-N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
Table 1-33
EC1-12
E100T-12
E1000-2
E100T-12-G
E1000-2-G
G1000-4
G1K-4
ML100T-12
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC
1
and XCVT Configurations
Shelf
Assembly
2
All
All
All
All
All
All
SA-HD
All
All
All
All
All
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Fully compatible
Not supported
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
4.6.0x
(4.6)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
5.0.0x
(5.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
6.0.0x
(6.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Partially supported
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
7.0.0x
(7.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Partially supported
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-73
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
Table 1-33
Hardware
ML1000-2
ML100X-8
ML-MR-10
4
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC
1
and XCVT Configurations (continued)
Shelf
Assembly
All
All
2
4.6.0x
(4.6)
Fully compatible
Not supported
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Not supported
CE-MR-10
CE-100T-8
CE-1000-4
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
Not supported
Not Supported
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
Not Supported
Fully compatible OC3 IR
4/STM1 SH
1310
OC3IR/STM1S
H 1310-8
All
OC12 IR 1310 All
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported OC12 IR/4
1310
All
OC12 LR 1310 All
OC12 LR 1550 All
OC48 IR 1310 All
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
OC48 LR 1550 All
OC48 ELR
DWDM
All
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
OC48
IR/STM16 SH
AS 1310
OC48
LR/STM16 LH
AS 1550
All
All
OC192
SR/STM64 IO
1310
OC192
IR/STM64 SH
1550
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Not supported
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
OC192
LH/STM64 LH
1550
OC192
LR/STM64 LH
ITU 15xx.xx
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Not supported
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
Not supported
5.0.0x
(5.0)
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Fully Compatible
Not Supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
6.0.0x
(6.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully Compatible
Not Supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
7.0.0x
(7.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully Compatible
Fully Compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Partially supported
Fully compatible Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
1-74
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
Table 1-33 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC
1
and XCVT Configurations (continued)
Hardware
FC_MR-4
MRC-12
5
Shelf
Assembly
2
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
4.6.0x
(4.6)
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported OC192SR1/ST
M64IO Short
Reach/
OC192/STM64
Any Reach
6
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
5.0.0x
(5.0)
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
6.0.0x
(6.0)
7.0.0x
(7.0)
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
1.
The XC card does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
2.
The shelf assemblies supported are 15454-SA-HD, 15454-SA-ANSI, and 15454-NEBS3E.
3.
DS3 card having the part number 87-31-0001 does not work in Cisco ONS 15454 R8.0 and later.
4.
ML-MR-10 and CE-MR-10 cards are not supported on XCVT.
5.
Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 give a total bandwidth of up to 622 Mb/s. Slots 5, 6 , 12 , and 13 give a total bandwidth of up to 2.5 Gb/s
6.
These cards are designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
shows ONS 15454 software and hardware compatibility for systems configured with XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards for Releases 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 5.0, 6.0, and 7.0. The 15454-SA-ANSI or
15454-SA-HD shelf assembly is required to operate the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card. XC-VXC-10G is only supported from Release 6.0. Refer to the older ONS 15454 documentation for compatibility with older software releases.
Note
Release 4.7 is for MSTP only. The cards supported in Release 4.7 are TCC2, TCC2P, and AIC , AIC-I.
Table 1-34
Hardware
TCC2
TCC2P
XC10G
AIC
AIC-I
DS1-14
DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
Note
Partially supported : Once a card has been through End Of Life(EOL), new features would not be supported for the card. However bug fixes would be available.
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations
Shelf
Assembly
1
All
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
All
All
All
SA-HD
4.6.0x (4.6)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
5.0.0x (5.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
6.0.0x (6.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
7.0.0x (7.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-75
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
Table 1-34
Hardware
DS3-12
DS3i-N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
DS3/EC1-48
1
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
EC1-12
E100T
E1000
2
DS3N-12
E100T-12-G
E1000-2-G
G1000-4
G1K-4
ML100T-12
ML1000-2
ML100X-8
ML-MR-10
CE-MR-10
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
All
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
CE-100T-8
CE-1000-4
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
OC3 IR 4/STM1
SH 1310
All
OC3IR/STM1SH
1310-8
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations (continued)
Shelf
Assembly
1
All
All
All
All
All
SA-HD
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
4.6.0x (4.6)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
5.0.0x (5.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
6.0.0x (6.0)
Partially supported
Partially supported
Partially supported
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
7.0.0x (7.0)
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
All
All
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Partially supported
Partially supported
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
1-76
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
Table 1-34 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations (continued)
Hardware
OC12/STM4-4
Shelf
Assembly
1
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
OC12 IR 1310 All
OC12 LR 1310 All
OC12 LR 1550 All
OC48 IR 1310 All
OC48 LR 1550 All
OC48 IR/STM16
SH AS 1310
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
OC48
LR/STM16 LH
AS 1550
OC192
SR/STM64 IO
1310
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
OC192
IR/STM64 SH
1550
OC192
LH/STM64 LH
1550
OC192
LR/STM64 LH
ITU 15xx.xx
FC_MR-4
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
MRC-12
3
OC192SR1/STM
64IO Short
Reach/
OC192/STM64
Any Reach
4
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
All
SA-HD and
SA-ANSI
4.6.0x (4.6)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
5.0.0x (5.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Not supported
Not supported
6.0.0x (6.0)
Fully compatible Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
7.0.0x (7.0)
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Partially supported
Partially supported
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
1.
The shelf assemblies supported are 15454-SA-HD and 15454-SA-ANSI.
2.
DS3 card having the part number 87-31-0001 does not work in Cisco ONS 15454 R8.0 and later.
3.
Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 give a total bandwidth of up to 2.5 Gb/s. Slots 5, 6, 12 , and 13 give a total bandwidth of up to 10 Gb/s
4.
These cards are designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
If an upgrade is required for compatibility, contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). For contact information, go to http://www.cisco.com/tac .
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
1-77
1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware
1-78
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Common Control Cards
C H A P T E R
2
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 common control card functions. For installation and turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
2.1 Common Control Card Overview, page 2-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.6 XC-VXC-10G Card, page 2-22
2.1 Common Control Card Overview
The card overview section summarizes card functions and compatibility.
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the
Requirements” section on page 1-69
for a list of slots and symbols.
2.1.1 Cards Summary
lists the common control cards for the Cisco ONS 15454 and summarizes card functions.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-1 78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.1 2.1.1 Cards Summary
Table 2-1
Card
TCC2
TCC2P
XCVT
XC10G
XC-VXC-10G
AIC-I
AEP
Common Control Card Functions
Description
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control
(TCC2) card is the main processing center for the
ONS 15454 and provides system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, and diagnostics. It has additional features including supply voltage monitoring, support for up to 84 data communications channel/generic communications channel (DCC/GCC) terminations, and an on-card lamp test.
For Additional Information...
See the
“2.2 TCC2 Card” section on page 2-6 .
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control
Plus (TCC2P) card is the main processing center for the ONS 15454 and provides system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, and diagnostics. It also provides supply voltage monitoring, support for up to 84 DCC/GCC terminations, and an on-card lamp test. This card also has Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock building integrated timing supply (BITS) timing.
The Cross Connect Virtual Tributary (XCVT) card is the central element for switching; it establishes connections and performs time-division switching
(TDS). The XCVT can manage STS and Virtual
Tributary (VT) circuits up to 48c.
See the
“2.3 TCC2P Card” section on page 2-10
.
See the
“2.4 XCVT Card” section on page 2-14
.
The 10 Gigabit Cross Connect (XC10G) card is the central element for switching; it establishes connections and performs TDS. The XC10G can manage STS and VT circuits up to 192c. The XC10G allows up to four times the bandwidth of XC and
XCVT cards.
See the
“2.5 XC10G Card” section on page 2-18
.
The 10 Gigabit Cross Connect Virtual
Tributary/Virtual Container (XC-VXC-10G) card serves as the switching matrix for the Cisco 15454
ANSI multiservice platform. The module operates as a superset of the XCVT or XC10G cross-connect module. The XC-VXC-10G card provides a maximum of 1152 STS-1 or 384 VC4 cross-connections and supports cards with speeds up to 10 Gbps.
See the
“2.6 XC-VXC-10G Card” section on page 2-22
.
The Alarm Interface Card–International (AIC-I) provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms with its additional input/output alarm contact closures. It also provides orderwire, user data channels, and supply voltage monitoring.
The alarm expansion panel (AEP) board provides
48 dry alarm contacts: 32 inputs and 16 outputs. It can be used with the AIC-I card.
See the
“2.7 AIC-I Card” section on page 2-27
.
See the
“1.12 Alarm Expansion Panel” section on page 1-55
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-2 78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.1 2.1.2 Card Compatibility
2.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 2-2
lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software release compatibility for each common-control card. In the tables below, “Yes” means cards are compatible with the listed software versions. Table cells with dashes mean cards are not compatible with the listed software versions.
Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility
Card
TCC+
TCC2
TCC2P
XC
XCVT
XC10G
XC-VXC-10G
AIC
AIC-I
AEP
R2.2.1
R2.2.2
R3.0.1 R3.1
R3.2
R3.3
R3.4
R4.0
R4.1
R4.5
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes —
R4.6
—
R4.7
—
R5.0
—
R6.0
—
R7.0
—
— — — — — — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes — Yes — Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes —
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
—
—
Yes —
Yes —
— —
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
— Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
— — — — — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
— — — — — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1.
The XC card does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility
The following tables list the compatible cross-connect cards for each Cisco ONS 15454 common-control card. The tables are organized according to type of common-control card. In the tables below, “Yes” means cards are compatible with the listed cross-connect card. Table cells with dashes mean cards are not compatible with the listed cross-connect card.
lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each common-control card.
Table 2-3
Card
TCC+
2
TCC2
TCC2P
XC
3
XCVT
XC10G
XC-VXC-10G
AIC-I
AEP
Common-Control Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
XCVT Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
XC10G Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
4
Yes
Yes
1.
Requires SA-ANSI or SA-HD shelf assembly.
1
XC-VXC-10G Card
1
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-3
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.1 2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility
2-4
2.
The TCC+ is not compatible with Software R4.5 or greater.
3.
The XC card does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
4.
These cross-connect cards are compatible only during an upgrade.
compatiblilty, see
Note
The XC card is compatible with most electrical cards, with the exception of the DS3i-N-12,
DS3/EC1-48, DS1/E1-56, and transmux cards, but does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
Table 2-4
Electrical Card
EC1-12
Electrical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
DS1-14
DS1N-14
DS3-12
DS3N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
DS3/EC1-48
DS3XM-6 (Transmux)
DS3XM-12 (Transmux)
DS3i-N-12
DS1/E1-56
XCVT Card
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XC10G Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.
Requires a 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly.
1
XC-VXC-10G Card
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
compatibility, see
Note
The XC card is compatible with most optical cards, with the exception of those cards noted as incompatible with the XCVT card, but does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
Table 2-5
Optical Card
OC3 IR 4 1310
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310
OC3 IR /STM1SH 1310-8
OC12 IR 1310
OC12 LR 1310
Optical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
XCVT Card
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
XC10G Card
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XC-VXC-10GCard
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.1 2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility
Table 2-5 Optical Card Cross-Connect Compatibility (continued)
Optical Card
OC12 LR 1550
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4
OC48 IR 1310
OC48 LR 1550
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550
XCVT Card
Yes
Yes
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz
OC48 ELR 200 GHz
Yes
Yes
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550
—
—
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
—
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx
—
OC192SR1/STM64 IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach
(OC192-XFP cards)
15454_MRC-12
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
2
1.
Requires a 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly.
2.
Requires Software Release 3.2 and later in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XC10G Card
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XC-VXC-10GCard
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each Ethernet card. For Ethernet card software compatibility, see
Note
The XC card is compatible with most Ethernet cards, with the exception of the G1000-4, but does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater.
Table 2-6 Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
Ethernet Cards XCVT Card
E100T-12
Yes
E1000-2
E100T-G
E1000-2-G
Yes
Yes
Yes
G1K-4
ML100T-12
ML1000-2
Yes, in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13
Yes, in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13
Yes, in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13
XC10G Card
1
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XC-VXC-10G Card
1
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-5
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.2 2.2 TCC2 Card
Table 2-6 Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility (continued)
Ethernet Cards XCVT Card
ML100X-8
CE-100T-8
CE-1000-4
Yes, in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13
Yes
Yes
XC10G Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.
Requires a 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly.
1
XC-VXC-10G Card
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
card software compatibility, see the
“6.1.3 FC_MR-4 Compatibility” section on page 6-4 .
Table 2-7
SAN Cards
FC_MR-4
SAN Card Cross-Connect Compatibility
XCVT Card
Yes
1.
Requires SA-ANSI or SA-HD shelf assembly
XC10G Card
1
Yes
XC-VXC-10G Card
1
Yes
2.2 TCC2 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.1 TCC2 Card Specifications” section on page A-10
.
The TCC2 card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics,
IP address detection/resolution, SONET section overhead (SOH) DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3
(Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
Note
The TCC2 card requires Software Release 4.0.0 or later.
Note
The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius).
The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to
32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2 card.
2-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.2 2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP
Figure 2-1
TCC2
FAIL
PWR
A B
ACT/STBY
RS-232
TCP/IP
TCC2 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
-48V PWR
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
System
Timing
FPGA
DCC
Processor
Serial
Debug
400MHz
Processor
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
MCC1
SCC1
MCC2
SCC2
SCC3
FCC1
Communications
Processor
SCC4 FCC2
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
HDLC
Message
Bus
Modem
Interface
BACKPLANE
Ref Clocks
(all I/O Slots)
BITS Input/
Output
SCL Links to
All Cards
Modem
Interface
(Not Used)
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
Ethernet
Repeater
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Faceplate
RS-232 Port
RS-232 Craft
Interface
Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Backplane
RS-232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality
The TCC2 card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the DCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC2 card and up to 84 section DCCs can be terminated at the TCC2 card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels). The TCC2 card selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-7
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.2 2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators
The TCC2 card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards.
The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2 card nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
The TCC2 card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. The TCC2 monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports (DS1, 1.544 MHz) for frequency accuracy.
The TCC2 selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TCC2 to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost.
The TCC2 monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2. All TCC2 protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms.
The TCC2 card has two built-in interface ports for accessing the system: an RJ-45 10BaseT LAN interface and an EIA/TIA-232 ASCII interface for local craft access. It also has a 10BaseT LAN port for user interfaces over the backplane.
Note
When using the LAN RJ-45 craft interface or back panel wirewrap LAN connection, the connection must be 10BASE T, half duplex. Full duplex and autonegotiate settings should not be used because they might result in a loss of visibility to the node.
Note
Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC2 card. For full functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2 cards.
Note
When a second TCC2 card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and its database with the active TCC2. If the software version of the new TCC2 does not match the version on the active TCC2, the newly inserted TCC2 copies from the active TCC2, taking about
15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2 does not match the version on the active TCC2, the newly inserted TCC2 copies the backup software from the active TCC2 again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2 takes about 3 minutes.
Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2 started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes.
2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators
The TCC2 faceplate has ten LEDs.
describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2 card faceplate.
2-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.2 2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators
Table 2-8
Card-Level LEDs
Red FAIL LED
TCC2 Card-Level Indicators
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Definition
This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists.
Indicates the TCC2 is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The
ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TCC2 is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2 database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TCC2 when the active or standby LED is blinking.
2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators
describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate.
Table 2-9 TCC2 Network-Level Indicators
System-Level LEDs
Red CRIT LED
Red MAJ LED
Amber MIN LED
Red REM LED
Green SYNC LED
Green ACO LED
Definition
Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals.
Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference.
After pressing the alarm cutoff (ACO) button, the ACO LED turns green.
The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the
ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-9
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.3 2.2.4 Power-Level Indicators
2.2.4 Power-Level Indicators
Table 2-10 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate.
Table 2-10 TCC2 Power-Level Indicators
Power-Level LEDs
Green/Amber/Red
PWR A LED
Green/Amber/Red
PWR B LED
Definition
The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
2.3 TCC2P Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.2 TCC2P Card Specifications” section on page A-11
.
The TCC2P card is an enhanced version of the TCC2 card. For Software Release 5.0 and later, the primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS timing.
The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P card also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3
(Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
Note
The TCC2P card requires Software Release 4.0.0 or later.
Note
The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius).
The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to
32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card.
2-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.3 2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality
Figure 2-2 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram
TCC2P
FAIL
PWR
A B
ACT/STBY
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP
RS-232
TCP/IP
-48V PWR
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
System
Timing
FPGA
DCC
Processor
Serial
Debug
MCC1
SMC1
MCC2
SCC2
400MHz
Processor
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
SCC3
FCC1
Communications
Processor
SCC1
SCC4 FCC2
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
HDLC
Message
Bus
BACKPLANE
Ref Clocks
(all I/O Slots)
BITS Input/
Output
SCL Links to
All Cards
Modem
Interface
Modem
Interface
(Not Used)
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Ethernet
Phy
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
Faceplate
RS-232 Port
RS-232 Craft
Interface
Ethernet Switch
Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
RS-232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality
The TCC2P card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the DCC.
Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC2P card and up to 84 section DCCs can be terminated at the
TCC2P card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels). The TCC2P selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-11
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.3 2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality
The TCC2P card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards.
The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2P card nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
The TCC2P card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. The TCC2P card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2P card selects a recovered clock, a BITS clock, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TCC2P card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost.
The TCC2P card supports a 64 kHz + 8 kHz composite clock BITS input (BITS IN) as well as a
6.312-MHz BITS OUT clock. The BITS clock on the system is configurable as DS1 (default),
1.544 MHz, or 64 kHz. The BITS OUT clock runs at a rate determined by the BITS IN clock, as follows:
If BITS IN = DS1, then BITS OUT = DS1 (default)
A BITS output interface configured as 6.312 MHz complies with ITU-T G.703, Appendix II, Table II.4, with a monitor level of –40 dBm +/– 4 dBm.
The TCC2P card monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P card fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2P card. All TCC2P card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the BER counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms.
The TCC2P card has two built-in Ethernet interface ports for accessing the system: one built-in RJ-45 port on the front faceplate for on-site craft access and a second port on the backplane. The rear Ethernet interface is for permanent LAN access and all remote access via TCP/IP as well as for Operations
Support System (OSS) access. The front and rear Ethernet interfaces can be provisioned with different
IP addresses using CTC.
Two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports, one on the faceplate and a second on the backplane, allow for craft interface in TL1 mode.
Note
To use the serial port craft interface wire-wrap pins on the backplane, the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire-wrap pin must be connected and active.
Note
When using the LAN RJ-45 craft interface or back panel wirewrap LAN connection, the connection must be 10BASE T, half duplex. Full duplex and autonegotiate settings should not be used because they might result in a loss of visibility to the node.
Note
Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC2P card. For full functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2P cards.
Note
When a second TCC2P card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and its database with the active TCC2P card. If the software version of the new TCC2P card does not match the version on the active TCC2P card, the newly inserted TCC2P card copies from the active TCC2P
2-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.3 2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators
card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2P card does not match the version on the active TCC2P card, the newly inserted TCC2P card copies the backup software from the active TCC2P card again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2P card takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2P card started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes.
2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators
The TCC2P faceplate has ten LEDs.
describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate.
Table 2-11 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Definition
This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists.
Indicates the TCC2P is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The
ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TCC2P is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2P database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TCC2P when the active or standby LED is blinking.
2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators
describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate.
Table 2-12 TCC2P Network-Level Indicators
System-Level LEDs
Red CRIT LED
Red MAJ LED
Amber MIN LED
Red REM LED
Green SYNC LED
Green ACO LED
Definition
Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Provides first-level alarm isolation. The REM LED turns red when an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals.
Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference.
After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-13
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.4 2.3.4 Power-Level Indicators
2.3.4 Power-Level Indicators
Table 2-13 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate.
Table 2-13 TCC2P Power-Level Indicators
Power-Level LEDs
Green/Amber/Red
PWR A LED
Green/Amber/Red
PWR B LED
Definition
The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
2.4 XCVT Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.3 XCVT Card Specifications” section on page A-12 .
The Cross Connect Virtual Tributary (XCVT) card establishes connections at the STS-1 and VT levels.
The XCVT provides STS-48 capacity to Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and STS-12 capacity to Slots 1 to 4 and
14 to 17. Any STS-1 on any port can be connected to any other port, meaning that the STS cross-connections are nonblocking.
shows the XCVT faceplate and block diagram.
2-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
Figure 2-3
XCVT
XCVT Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY Input ports
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
STS
ASIC1
Ports 0
1
2
3
4
5
VT
ASIC
5
6
0 Ports
1
2
3
4
STS
ASIC2
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
Output ports
2.4 2.4.1 XCVT Functionality
2.4.1 XCVT Functionality
The STS-1 switch matrix on the XCVT card consists of 288 bidirectional ports and adds a VT matrix that can manage up to 336 bidirectional VT1.5 ports or the equivalent of a bidirectional STS-12. The
VT1.5-level signals can be cross connected, dropped, or rearranged. The TCC2/TCC2P card assigns bandwidth to each slot on a per STS-1 or per VT1.5 basis. The switch matrices are fully crosspoint and broadcast supporting.
The XCVT card provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
288 STS bidirectional ports
144 STS bidirectional cross-connects
672 VT1.5 ports via 24 logical STS ports
336 VT1.5 bidirectional cross-connects
Nonblocking at the STS level
STS-1/3c/6c/12c/48c cross-connects
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-15
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.4 2.4.2 VT Mapping
The XCVT card works with the TCC2/TCC2P cards to maintain connections and set up cross-connects within the node. The cross-connect cards (such as the XCVT and XC10G), installed in Slots 8 and 10, are required to operate the ONS 15454. You can establish cross-connect (circuit) information through
CTC. The TCC2/TCC2P cards establish the proper internal cross-connect information and relay the setup information to the XCVT card.
Caution
Do not operate the ONS 15454 with only one cross-connect card. Two cross-connect cards of the same type (two XCVT or two XC10G cards) must always be installed.
shows the cross-connect matrix.
Figure 2-4
8X
STS-12
4X
STS-12/48
XCVT Cross-Connect Matrix
XCVT STS-1 Cross-connect ASIC (288x288 STS-1)
4
5
2
3
Input Ports
1
Output Ports
1
2
3
4
5
6
VT 1.5 Cross-connect ASIC
8X
STS-12
4X
STS-12/48
VTXC
336 bidirectional VT 1.5 cross-connects
2.4.2 VT Mapping
The VT structure is designed to transport and switch payloads below the DS-3 rate. The ONS 15454 performs VT mapping according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards.
numbering scheme for the ONS 15454 as it relates to the Telcordia standard.
Table 2-14 VT Mapping
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT1
VT2
VT3
VT4
VT5
VT6
VT7
VT8
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group1/VT1
Group2/VT1
Group3/VT1
Group4/VT1
Group5/VT1
Group6/VT1
Group7/VT1
Group1/VT2
2-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.4 2.4.3 XCVT Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
Table 2-14 VT Mapping (continued)
VT22
VT23
VT24
VT25
VT26
VT27
VT28
VT14
VT15
VT16
VT17
VT18
VT19
VT20
VT21
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT9
VT10
VT11
VT12
VT13
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group2/VT2
Group3/VT2
Group4/VT2
Group5/VT2
Group6/VT2
Group7/VT2
Group1/VT3
Group2/VT3
Group3/VT3
Group4/VT3
Group5/VT3
Group6/VT3
Group7/VT3
Group1/VT4
Group2/VT4
Group3/VT4
Group4/VT4
Group5/VT4
Group6/VT4
Group7/VT4
2.4.3 XCVT Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
A DS3XM card can demultiplex (map down to a lower rate) M13-mapped DS-3 signals into 28 DS-1s that are then mapped to VT1.5 payloads. The VT1.5s can then be cross-connected by the XCVT card.
The XCVT card can host a maximum of 336 bidirectional VT1.5s.
2.4.4 XCVT Card-Level Indicators
shows the two card-level LEDs on the XCVT card faceplate.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-17
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.5 2.5 XC10G Card
Table 2-15 XCVT Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Definition
Indicates that the cards processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red
FAIL LED persists.
Indicates whether the XCVT card is active and carrying traffic (green) or in standby mode to the active XCVT card (amber).
2.5 XC10G Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.4 XC10G Card Specifications” section on page A-12 .
The 10 Gigabit Cross Connect (XC10G) card establishes connections at the STS-1 and VT levels. The
XC10G provides STS-192 capacity to Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and STS-48 capacity to Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The XC10G allows up to four times the bandwidth of the XCVT cards. The XC10G provides a maximum of 576 STS-1 cross-connections through 1152 STS-1 ports. Any STS-1 on any port can be connected to any other port, meaning that the STS cross-connections are nonblocking.
shows the XC10G faceplate and block diagram.
2-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.5 2.5.1 XC10G Functionality
Figure 2-5
XC10G
XC10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
FLASH
RAM uP Interface
VT
Cross-Connect
Matrix
Cross-Connect
Matrix
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Span 1
Span 2
Span 3
Span 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Ref Clk A
Ref Clk B p l a n e
B a c k
TCCA
ASIC uP uP Interface
SCL Link
Main SCL
Protect
SCL
2.5.1 XC10G Functionality
The XC10G card manages up to 672 bidirectional VT1.5 ports and 1152 bidirectional STS-1 ports. The
TCC2/TCC2P cards assign bandwidth to each slot on a per STS-1 or per VT1.5 basis.
Two cross-connect cards, installed in Slots 8 and 10, are required to operate the ONS 15454. You can establish cross-connect (circuit) information through the CTC. The cross-connect card establishes the proper internal cross-connect information and sends the setup information to the cross-connect card.
The XC10G card provides:
•
1152 STS bidirectional ports
•
•
•
•
•
576 STS bidirectional cross-connects
672 VT1.5 ports via 24 logical STS ports
336 VT1.5 bidirectional cross-connects
Nonblocking at STS level
STS-1/3c/6c/12c/48c/192c cross-connects
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-19
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.5 2.5.2 VT Mapping
Caution
Do not operate the ONS 15454 with only one XCVT or XC10G card. Two cross-connect cards of the same type (either two XCVT or two XC10G cards) must always be installed.
shows the cross-connect matrix.
Figure 2-6
8X
STS-48
4X
STS-192
XC10G Cross-Connect Matrix
XC10G STS-1 Cross-connect ASIC (1152x1152 STS-1)
.
.
.
25
2
.
Input Ports
1
Output Ports
1
2
.
.
.
.
25
8X
STS-48
4X
STS-192
VT 1.5 Cross-connect ASIC
VTXC
336 bidirectional VT 1.5 cross-connects
VT cross-connection occurs on the 25th port.
2.5.2 VT Mapping
The VT structure is designed to transport and switch payloads below the DS-3 rate. The ONS 15454 performs VT mapping according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards.
numbering scheme for the ONS 15454 as it relates to the Telcordia standard.
Table 2-16 VT Mapping
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT1
VT2
VT3
VT4
VT5
VT6
VT7
VT8
VT9
VT10
VT11
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group1/VT1
Group2/VT1
Group3/VT1
Group4/VT1
Group5/VT1
Group6/VT1
Group7/VT1
Group1/VT2
Group2/VT2
Group3/VT2
Group4/VT2
2-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.5 2.5.3 XC10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
Table 2-16 VT Mapping (continued)
VT17
VT18
VT19
VT20
VT21
VT22
VT23
VT24
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT12
VT13
VT14
VT15
VT16
VT25
VT26
VT27
VT28
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group5/VT2
Group6/VT2
Group7/VT2
Group1/VT3
Group2/VT3
Group3/VT3
Group4/VT3
Group5/VT3
Group6/VT3
Group7/VT3
Group1/VT4
Group2/VT4
Group3/VT4
Group4/VT4
Group5/VT4
Group6/VT4
Group7/VT4
2.5.3 XC10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
A DS3XM card can demultiplex (map down to a lower rate) M13-mapped DS-3 signals into 28 DS-1s that are then mapped to VT1.5 payloads. The VT1.5s can then be cross-connected by the XC10G card.
The XC10G card can host a maximum of 336 bidirectional VT1.5s.
2.5.4 XC10G Card-Level Indicators
describes the two card-level LEDs on the XC10G faceplate.
Table 2-17 XC10G Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Definition
Indicates that the cards processor is not ready. This LED illuminates during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
Indicates whether the XC10G is active and carrying traffic (green), or in standby mode to the active XC10G card (amber).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-21
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.6 2.5.5 XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
2.5.5 XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
The XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards support the same features as the XCVT card. The XC10G or
XC-VXC-10G cards are required for OC-192, OC-48 any-slot (AS), OC3-8, and OC12-4 operation. Do not use the XCVT card if you are using an OC-192, OC3-8, or OC12-4 card or if you install an OC-48
AS card in Slots 1 to 4 or 14 to 17.
Note
A configuration mismatch alarm occurs when an XCVT cross-connect card co-exists with an OC-192,
OC3-8, or OC12-4 card placed in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 or with an OC-48 card placed in Slots 1 to 4 or 14 to 17.
If you are using Ethernet cards, the E1000-2-G or the E100T-G must be used when the XC10G or
XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card is in use. Do not pair an XCVT card with an XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card. When upgrading from an XCVT to the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card, refer to the “Upgrade Cards and Spans” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information.
2.6 XC-VXC-10G Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.5 XC-VXC-10G Card Specifications” section on page A-13 .
The XC-VXC-10G card establishes connections at the STS and VT levels. The XC-VXC-10G provides
STS-192 capacity to Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and STS-48 capacity to Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. Any STS-1 on any port can be connected to any other port, meaning that the STS cross-connections are nonblocking.
shows the XC-VXC-10G faceplate and block diagram.
2-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.6 2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality
Figure 2-7
XC-VXC-
10G
XC-VXC-10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
IBPIA (2)
XC-VXC-10G Backplane Connectors
SCL Bus
IBPIA (2)
TCCA
STS-1 Cross Connect ASIC
Clock
FPGA
FLASH
EDVT
Serial
Port
2 VT
Ports
2 VT
Ports
6 AUX
Ports
6 AUX
Ports
TU Cross Connect ASIC
2 VT
Ports
VT Cross Connect ASIC
2 VT
Ports
TULA
GDX2
TARAN
GDX1
EEPROM
CPU
CPLD
DDR
SDRAM
DETLEF
DDR
FPGA
2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality
The XC-VXC-10G card manages up to 1152 bidirectional high-order STS-1 ports. In addition, it is able to simultaneously manage one of the following low-order VT cross-connect arrangements:
•
2688 bidirectional VT1.5 low-order ports, or
•
•
2016 VT2 low-order ports, or
1344 bidirectional VT1.5 ports and 1008 bidirectional VT2 ports (mixed grooming)
The TCC2/TCC2P card assigns bandwidth to each slot on a per STS-1, per VT1.5, or per VT2 basis. The switch matrices are fully crosspoint and broadcast supporting.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 2-23
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.6 2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality
At the STS level (high-order cross-connect), the XC-VXC-10G is always non-blocking (any STS-1 from the system can be cross-connected to any other STS-1 without limitation up to 1152 bidirectional STS-1 ports (576 STS-1 cross-connects).
In addition, for “mixed” VT1.5 and VT2 grooming, 50% of the available VT resources (ports) are allocated to each VT circuit type. The following three modes are supported (only one mode is available at a time):
•
Mode 1: full VT1.5 cross-connect, which is 2688 bidirectional VT1.5 ports (1344 bidirectional
VT1.5 cross-connects)
•
•
Mode 2: full VT2 cross-connect, which is 2016 bidirectional VT2 ports (1008 bidirectional VT2 cross-connects)
Mode 3 (mixed grooming): 50% VT1.5 and 50% VT2 XC, which is 1344 bidirectional VT1.5 ports and 1008 bidirectional VT2 ports (672 bidirectional VT1.5 and 504 VT2 bidirectional cross-connects)
The XC-VXC-10G card provides:
•
1152 STS bidirectional ports
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
576 STS bidirectional cross-connects
2688 VT1.5 ports via 96 logical STS ports
1344 VT1.5 bidirectional cross-connects
2016 VT2 ports via 96 logical STS ports
1008 VT2 bidirectional cross-connects
Mixed grooming (50% VT1.5 and 50% VT2)
Nonblocking at the STS level
VT1.5, VT2, and STS-1/3c/6c/12c/48c/192c cross-connects
Note
VT 2 circuit provisioning works between optical cards and the DS3/EC1-48 card (EC1 ports, not the ports provisioned for DS3)
The XC-VXC-10G supports errorless side switches (switching from one XC-VXC-10G on one side of the shelf to the other XC-VXC-10G on the other side of the shelf) when the switch is initiated through software and the shelf is equipped with TCC2/TCC2P cards.
Cross-connect and provisioning information is established through the user interface on the
TCC2/TCC2P card. In turn, the TCC2/TCC2P card establishes the proper internal cross-connect information and relays the setup information to the XC-VXC-10G card so that the proper cross-connection is established within the system.
The XC-VXC-10G card is deployed in Slots 8 or 10. Upgrading a system to an XC-VXC-10G from an earlier cross-connect module type is performed in-service, with hitless operation (less than 50-ms impact to any traffic). The XC-VXC-10G can be used with either the standard ANSI shelf assembly (15454-SA-
ANSI) or high-density shelf assembly (15454-SA-HD).
Caution
Do not operate the ONS 15454 with only one XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card. Two cross-connect cards must always be installed.
shows the XC-VXC-10G cross-connect matrix.
2-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.6 2.6.2 VT Mapping
Figure 2-8
8X
STS-48
4X
STS-192
XC-VXC-10G Cross-Connect Matrix
XC-XVC-10G STS-1 Cross-connect ASIC (1152x1152 STS-1)
.
.
.
20
Input Ports
1
2
.
Output Ports
1
2
.
.
.
.
20
8X
STS-48
4X
STS-192
6X STS-48
2X STS-48 (VT Ports)
TUXC
TU-3 Cross-connect ASIC
(bypassed in SONETmode)
2X STS-48 (VT Ports)
VTXC
VT 1.5/VT 2 Cross-connect ASIC
1344 bidirectional VT 1.5 cross-connects, or
1008 bidirectional VT 2 cross-connects, or
Mixed grooming (50% VT1.5 and 50% VT2)
2.6.2 VT Mapping
The VT structure is designed to transport and switch payloads below the DS-3 rate. The ONS 15454 performs VT mapping according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards.
shows the VT numbering scheme for the ONS 15454 as it relates to the Telcordia standard.
Table 2-18 VT Mapping
VT8
VT9
VT10
VT11
VT12
VT13
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT1
VT2
VT3
VT4
VT5
VT6
VT7
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group1/VT1
Group2/VT1
Group3/VT1
Group4/VT1
Group5/VT1
Group6/VT1
Group7/VT1
Group1/VT2
Group2/VT2
Group3/VT2
Group4/VT2
Group5/VT2
Group6/VT2
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-25
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.6 2.6.3 XC-VXC-10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
Table 2-18 VT Mapping (continued)
VT19
VT20
VT21
VT22
VT23
VT24
VT25
VT26
VT27
VT28
ONS 15454 VT Number
VT14
VT15
VT16
VT17
VT18
Telcordia Group/VT Number
Group7/VT2
Group1/VT3
Group2/VT3
Group3/VT3
Group4/VT3
Group5/VT3
Group6/VT3
Group7/VT3
Group1/VT4
Group2/VT4
Group3/VT4
Group4/VT4
Group5/VT4
Group6/VT4
Group7/VT4
2.6.3 XC-VXC-10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12
A DS3XM card can demultiplex (map down to a lower rate) M13-mapped DS-3 signals into 28 DS-1s that are then mapped to VT1.5 payloads. The VT1.5s can then be cross-connected by the XC-VXC-10G card. The XC-VXC-10G card can host a maximum of 1344 bidirectional VT1.5s.
2.6.4 XC-VXC-10G Card-Level Indicators
Table 2-19 describes the two card-level LEDs on the XC-VXC-10G faceplate.
Table 2-19 XC-VXC-10G Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Definition
Indicates that the cards processor is not ready. This LED illuminates during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
Indicates whether the XC10G is active and carrying traffic (green), or in standby mode to the active XC10G card (amber).
2-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.6.5 XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
2.6.5 XC-VXC-10G Compatibility
The XC-VXC-10G card supports the same features as the XC10G card. Either the XC10G or
XC-VXC-10G card is required for OC-192, OC3-8, and OC12-4 operation and OC-48 AS operation.
If you are using Ethernet cards, the E1000-2-G or the E100T-G must be used when the XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card is in use. When upgrading from an XC10G card to an XC-VXC-10G card, refer to the “Upgrade Cards and Spans” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information.
Also refer to the
“2.1.2 Card Compatibility” section on page 2-3 .
2.7 AIC-I Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.4.6 AIC-I Card Specifications” section on page A-13 .
The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined
(environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides
12 customer-defined input and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are through the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals. If you use the additional AEP, the AIC-I card can support up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs, which are connected on the AEP connectors. A power monitoring function monitors the supply voltage (–48 VDC).
Figure 2-9 shows the AIC-I faceplate and a block
diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-27
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
Figure 2-9
AIC-1
AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram
UDC-A
UDC-B
DCC-A
DCC-B
RING
LOW
EOW
RING
FAIL
PWR
A B
ACT
INPUT/OUTPUT
ACC
Fail
Act
ACC
AIC-I
Ring
Express orderwire
(DTMF)
Local orderwire
(DTMF)
Ring
Ringer
Input
Output
LED x2
EEPROM
AIC-I FPGA
SCL links
12/16 x IN
4 x
IN/OUT
Power
Monitoring
UDC-A
UDC-B
DCC-A
DCC-B
2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
Table 2-20 describes the eight card-level LEDs on the AIC-I card faceplate.
Table 2-20
Card-Level LEDs
Red FAIL LED
AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
Green ACT LED
Description
Indicates that the cards processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during
Reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL
LED persists.
Indicates the AIC-I card is provisioned for operation.
2-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls
Table 2-20 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators (continued)
Card-Level LEDs Description
Green/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input A. It is red when the input voltage on supply input A is out of range.
Green/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input B. It is red when the input voltage on supply input B is out of range.
Amber INPUT LED The INPUT LED is amber when there is an alarm condition on at least one of the alarm inputs.
Amber OUTPUT LED The OUTPUT LED is amber when there is an alarm condition on at least one of the alarm outputs.
Green RING LED The RING LED on the local orderwire (LOW) side is flashing green when a call is received on the LOW.
Green RING LED The RING LED on the express orderwire (EOW) side is flashing green when a call is received on the EOW.
2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls
The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to twelve external alarm inputs and 4 external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made using the backplane wire-wrap pins. See the
“1.12 Alarm Expansion Panel” section on page 1-55 for
information about increasing the number of input/output contacts.
LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm lines, one LED representing all of the inputs and one LED representing all of the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans.
You can program each of the twelve input alarm contacts separately. You can program each of the sixteen input alarm contacts separately. Choices include:
•
•
•
•
Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open
Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported)
Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level
63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log. You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you unprovision the alarm input.
You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you provision the alarm input.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-29
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.7.3 Orderwire
The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire:
•
•
Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a
Minor alarm or above is the trigger.
Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local network element (NE) alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only.
•
Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output.
You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present.
Note
The number of inputs and outputs can be increased using the AEP. The AEP is connected to the shelf backplane and requires an external wire-wrap panel.
2.7.3 Orderwire
Orderwire allows a craftsperson to plug a phoneset into an ONS 15454 and communicate with craftspeople working at other ONS 15454s or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead.
The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead signal) orderwire channels on an SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device.
You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for
DCC/GCC channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up so that all NEs on the ring can reach one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can be configured as on or off on a particular SONET facility. The ONS 15454 supports up to four orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small hub-and-spoke configurations. Keep in mind that orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as bidirectional line switched rings (BLSRs) and path protection configurations.
Caution
Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel.
The ONS 15454 implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The line acts as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the express orderwire party line. Up to four OC-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are provisionable as orderwire paths.
Note
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card does not support the express orderwire channel.
2-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.7.4 Power Monitoring
The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity, which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the
DTMF pad.
shows the pins on the orderwire connector that correspond to the tip and ring orderwire assignments.
Table 2-21 Orderwire Pin Assignments
4
5
6
2
3
RJ-11 Pin Number
1
Description
Four-wire receive ring
Four-wire transmit tip
Two-wire ring
Two-wire tip
Four-wire transmit ring
Four-wire receive tip
When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel.
RJ-11 Connector Figure 2-10
RJ-11
Pin 1 Pin 6
2.7.4 Power Monitoring
The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for presence, undervoltage, or overvoltage.
2.7.5 User Data Channel
The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two user data channels, UDC-A and UDC-B, through separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Use an unshielded RJ-11 cable. Each
UDC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454. For UDC circuit provisioning, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles.
lists the UDC pin assignments.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
2-31
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards
2.7 2.7.6 Data Communications Channel
Table 2-22 UDC Pin Assignments
4
5
6
2
3
RJ-11 Pin Number
1
Description
For future use
TXN
RXN
RXP
TXP
For future use
2.7.6 Data Communications Channel
The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an
ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two DCCs, DCC-A and DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Use a shielded RJ-45 cable. Each DCC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454.
The DCC ports are synchronous serial interfaces. The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles.
Table 2-23 lists the DCC pin assignments.
Table 2-23 DCC Pin Assignments
RJ-45 Pin Number
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
Description
TCLKP
TCLKN
TXP
TXN
RCLKP
RCLKN
RXP
RXN
2-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
3
Electrical Cards
This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 electrical card features and functions. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. For information on the electrical interface assemblies (EIAs), see the
“1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies” section on page 1-14 .
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
3.1 Electrical Card Overview, page 3-1
3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards, page 3-6
•
•
•
•
•
3.5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards, page 3-12
3.6 DS3/EC1-48 Card, page 3-15
3.8 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards, page 3-20
3.1 Electrical Card Overview
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the
“1.17 Cards and Slots” section on page 1-68 for a list of slots and symbols.
3.1.1 Card Summary
lists the Cisco ONS 15454 electrical cards.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-1 78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.1 3.1.1 Card Summary
Table 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards
Card Name Description
EC1-12
The EC1-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant,
GR-253 STS-1 electrical ports per card. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps over a single 750-ohm,
728A or equivalent coaxial span.
DS1-14
DS1N-14
The DS1-14 card provides 14 Telcordia-compliant
GR-499 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at
1.544 Mbps over a 100-ohm, twisted-pair copper cable.
The DS1N-14 card supports the same features as the
DS1-14 card but can also provide 1:N (N <= 5) protection.
DS1/E1-56
For Additional Information
See the
“3.2 EC1-12 Card” section on page 3-4 .
See the
DS1N-14 Cards” section on page 3-6
.
See the
DS1N-14 Cards” section on page 3-6
See the
.
“3.4 DS1/E1-56 Card” section on page 3-9 .
DS3-12
The DS1/E1-56 card provides 56 Telcordia- compliant, GR-499 DS-1 ports per card, or 56 E1 ports per card. Each port operates at 1.544 Mbps
(DS-1) or 2.048 Mbps (E1). The DS1/E1-56 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:N protection schemes, where N <= 2.
The DS3-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant
GR-499 DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at
44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span.
See the
DS3N-12 Cards” section on page 3-12
.
DS3N-12
DS3/EC1-48
The DS3N-12 card supports the same features as the
DS3-12 but can also provide 1:N (N <= 5) protection.
The DS3/EC1-48 provides 48 Telcordia-compliant ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span.
See the
DS3N-12 Cards” section on page 3-12
.
See the “3.6 DS3/EC1-48 Card” section on page 3-15
.
DS3i-N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
Provides 12 DS-3 ports and supports 1:1 or 1:N protection. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and Slots 12 to
17.
See the
“3.7 DS3i-N-12 Card” section on page 3-18
.
The DS3-12E card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3-12E card provides enhanced performance monitoring functions.
See the
DS3N-12E Cards” section on page 3-20
.
The DS3N-12E card supports the same features as the DS3-12E but can also provide 1:N (N <= 5) protection.
See the
DS3N-12E Cards” section on page 3-20
.
3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.1 3.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards (continued)
Card Name Description
DS3XM-6
(Transmux)
The DS3XM-6 card provides six Telcordia- compliant GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing functions. The DS3XM-6 converts six framed DS-3 network connections to 28x6 or 168 VT1.5s.
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
The DS3XM-12 card provides 12 Telcordia- compliant GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing functions. The DS3XM-12 converts twelve framed
DS-3 network connections to 28x12 or 168 VT1.5s.
For Additional Information
See the “3.9 DS3XM-6 Card” section on page 3-24
.
See the
“3.10 DS3XM-12 Card” section on page 3-26
.
3.1.2 Card Compatibility
lists the CTC software compatibility for each electrical card. See
list of cross-connect cards that are compatible with each electrical card.
Note
“Yes” indicates that this card is fully or partially supported by the indicated software release. Refer to the individual card reference section for more information about software limitations for this card.
Table 3-2 Electrical Card Software Release Compatibility
Electrical
Card
EC1-12
DS1-14
DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
DS3-12
DS3N-12
DS3-12E
DS3N-12E
DS3XM-6
(Transmux)
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
DS3/EC1-48
DS3i-N-12
—
—
—
R2.2.2
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
R3.0.1
R3.1
R3.2
R3.3
R3.4
R4.0 R4.1
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
— — — — — — —
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — Yes
(4.1.2)
R4.5
R4.6 R4.7
R5.0
R6.0 R7.0
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— — — — Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
— — — Yes Yes Yes
— — — Yes Yes Yes
— Yes — Yes Yes Yes
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-3
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.2 3.2 EC1-12 Card
3.2 EC1-12 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.1 EC1-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-15 .
The EC1-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant, GR-253 STS-1 electrical ports per card. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps over a single 75-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span.
STS path selection for UNEQ-P, AIS-P, and bit error rate (BER) thresholds is done on the SONET ring interfaces (optical cards) in conjunction with the STS cross-connect. The EC1-12 terminates but does not select the 12 working STS-1 signals from the backplane. The EC1-12 maps each of the 12 received
EC1 signals into 12 STS-1s with visibility into the SONET path overhead.
An EC1-12 card can be 1:1 protected with another EC1-12 card but cannot protect more than one EC1-12 card. You must install the EC1-12 in an even-numbered slot to serve as a working card and in an odd-numbered slot to serve as a protect card.
3.2.1 EC1-12 Slots and Connectors
You can install the EC1-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. Each EC1-12 interface features DSX-level (digital signal cross-connect frame) outputs supporting distances up to 450 feet
(137 meters) depending on facility conditions. See the “7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the
Backplane” section on page 7-5
for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.2.2 EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
shows the EC1-12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
Figure 3-1
EC1
12
EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.2 3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF main STS1 protect STS1
Line
Interface
Unit
STS-1
Framer
x12
STS-12/
12xSTS-1
Mux/Demux
ASIC
BTC
ASIC k p l
B a c a n e
3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
All 12 STS-1 payloads from an EC1-12 card are carried to the XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G card where the payload is further aggregated for efficient transport. XCVT cards can host a maximum of
288 bidirectional STS-1s. The XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards can host up to 1152 bidirectional
STS-1s.
3.2.4 EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the EC1-12 card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-5
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.3 3.2.5 EC1-12 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-3
Green ACT LED
Amber SF LED
EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the EC1-12 card processor is not ready.
Replace the unit if the FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the EC1-12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF) or high BER on one or more card ports.
3.2.5 EC1-12 Port-Level Indicators
You can obtain the status of the EC1-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan tray.
Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Specifications” section on page A-16 .
The ONS 15454 DS1-14 card provides 14 Telcordia-compliant, GR-499 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at 1.544 Mbps over a 100-ohm, twisted-pair copper cable. The DS1-14 card can function as a working or protect card in 1:1 protection schemes and as a working card in 1:N protection schemes. Each DS1-14 port has digital signal cross-connect frame (DSX)-level outputs supporting distances up to 655 feet (200 meters).
The DS1-14 card supports 1:1 protection. The DS1-14 can be a working card in a 1:N protection scheme with the proper backplane EIA and wire-wrap or AMP Champ connectors. You can also provision the
DS1-14 to monitor for line and frame errors in both directions.
You can group and map DS1-14 card traffic in STS-1 increments to any other card in an ONS 15454 except DS-3 cards. Each DS-1 is asynchronously mapped into a SONET VT1.5 payload and the card carries a DS-1 payload intact in a VT1.5. For performance monitoring purposes, you can gather bidirectional DS-1 frame-level information (LOF, parity errors, cyclic redundancy check [CRC] errors, and so on).
3.3.1 DS1N-14 Features and Functions
The DS1N-14 card supports the same features as the DS1-14 card in addition to enhanced protection schemes. The DS1N-14 is capable of 1:N (N <= 5) protection with the proper backplane EIA and wire-wrap or AMP Champ connectors. The DS1N-14 card can function as a working or protect card in
1:1 or 1:N protection schemes.
3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.3 3.3.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Slot Compatibility
If you use the DS1N-14 as a standard DS-1 card in a 1:1 protection group, you can install the DS1N-14 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. If you use the card’s 1:N functionality, you must install a DS1N-14 card in Slots 3 and 15. Each DS1N-14 port features DS-n-level outputs supporting distances of up to 655 feet (200 meters) depending on facility conditions.
3.3.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Slot Compatibility
You can install the DS1-14 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454.
3.3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the DS1-14 faceplate and the block diagram of the card.
Figure 3-2 DS1-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
DS1-
14
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
Protection
Relay
Matrix
14 Line
Interface
Units
STS1 to
14 DS1
Mapper
STS-1 / STS-12
Mux/Demux
ASIC
Cross
Connect
Matrix
BTC
ASIC l a n e c k p
B a uP
DRAM FLASH
78-17191-01
Figure 3-3 shows the DS1N-14 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-7
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.3 3.3.4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
Figure 3-3
DS1N-
14
DS1N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
Protection
Relay
Matrix
14 Line
Interface
Units
STS1 to
14 DS1
Mapper
STS-1 / STS-12
Mux/Demux ASIC
BTC
ASIC p l a n e
B a c k uP
DRAM FLASH
3.3.4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G
All 14 VT1.5 payloads from DS1-14 and DSIN-14 cards are carried in a single STS-1 to the XCVT,
XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G cards, where the payload is further aggregated for efficient STS-1 transport.
The XC10G and XCVT cards manage up to 336 bidirectional VT1.5 ports. The XC-VXC-10G card can manage up to 2688 bidirectional VT1.5 ports
3.3.5 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card-Level Indicators
Table 3-4 describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 card faceplates.
3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.4 3.3.6 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-4
Green (Active)
DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green/amber ACT/STBY LED indicates whether the card is operational and ready to carry traffic (green) or in standby mode (amber).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more card ports.
3.3.6 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Port-Level Indicators
You can obtain the status of the DS1-14 and DS1N-14 card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.4 DS1/E1-56 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.3 DS1/E1-56 Card Specifications” section on page A-17
.
The ONS 15454 DS1/E1-56 card provides 56 Telcordia-compliant, GR-499 DS-1 ports per card, or
56 E1 ports per card. Each port operates at 1.544 Mbps (DS-1) or 2.048 Mbps (E1). The DS1/E1-56 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:N protection schemes, where N <= 2. The DS1/E1-56 card can be used with the XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards.
Note
The DS1/E1-56 card does not support VT-2 (virtual tributary-2) circuit creation on E1 ports.
Caution
When a protection switch moves traffic from the active (or working) DS1/E1-56 card to the standby (or protect) DS1/E1-56 card, ports on the now standby (or protect) card cannot be moved to Out of Service state. Traffic is dropped if the ports are in Out of Service state.
3.4.1 DS1/E1-56 Slots and Connectors
For SONET applications, the DS1/E1-56 card requires a high-density (HD) shelf (15454-SA-HD),
UBIC EIA, and Software Release 6.0 or greater.
Note
The UBIC-H EIA supports the termination of both DS-1 and E-1 signals when used with the appropriate cables. The UBIC-V EIA only supports the termination of DS-1 signals.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-9
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.4 3.4.2 DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Note
The DS1/E1-56 card supports an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and TCC2/TCC2P cards.
You can install the DS1/E1-56 card in Slots 1 to 3 or 15 to 17 on the ONS 15454, but installing this card in certain slots will block the use of other slots.
Table 3-5 shows which slots become unusable for other
electrical cards when the DS1/E1-56 card is installed in a particular slot.
Table 3-5 DS1/E1-56 Slot Restrictions
15
16
17
2
3
Slot
1
Additional Unusable Slots for Electrical Cards
5 and 6
3 or 4 (except another DS1/E1-56 protect card can be installed in Slot 3)
—
—
14 and 15 (except another DS1/E1-56 protect card can be installed in Slot 15)
12 and 13
Caution
Do not install low-density DS-1 cards in the same side of the shelf as DS1/E1-56 cards.
With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports SCSI (UBIC) connectors. See the
Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5 for more information about electrical card slot
protection and restrictions.
3.4.2 DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram
shows the DS1/E1-56 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
Figure 3-4 DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.4 3.4.3 DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators
U
B
I
C
DS1 x56 ports
XFMR/
MUX
DS1
Analog x8 ports
DS1
Analog x8 ports
DS1/E1
Octal
LIU
#1
DS1/E1
Octal
LIU
#2
LIUs
3 thru 6 not shown
DS1
Digital x8 ports
622MHz
Ref
TSWC
Clock
Synth
DS1
Digital x8 ports
Agere
Ultramapper
38MHz
Ref’s
STS-12
Data
4 Bit
155Mhz
STS-12 MAIN
Data
PROT
Data
Stingray
FPGA
4 Bit
155Mhz
STS-12 a n p l
B a c k e
DS1
Analog x8 ports
DS1/E1
Octal
LIU
#7
DS1
Digital x8 ports
SCL
LINK to
TCC
AD BUS to
PROC
3.4.3 DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators
The DS1/E1-56 card has three card-level LED indicators (
).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-11
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.5 3.4.4 DS1/E1-56 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-6
Green (Active)
DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset.
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red
FAIL LED persists in flashing.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS or LOF on one or more card ports.
3.4.4 DS1/E1-56 Port-Level Indicators
You can obtain the status of the DS1/E1-56 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Cards
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-19 .
Note
Any new features that are available as part of this software release are not enabled for this card.
The ONS 15454 DS3-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant, GR-499 DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3-12 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:1 protection schemes and as a working card in 1:N protection schemes.
The DS3-12 card supports 1:1 protection with the proper backplane EIA. EIAs are available with BNC,
SMB, or SCSI (UBIC) connectors.
Caution
When a protection switch moves traffic from the DS3-12 working/active card to the DS3-12 protect/standby card, ports on the now active/standby card cannot be taken out of service. Lost traffic can result if you take a port out of service, even if the DS3-12 standby card no longer carries traffic.
Other than protection capabilities, the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 cards are identical. The DS3N-12 can operate as the protect card in a 1:N (N <= 5) DS3 protection group. It has additional circuitry that is not present on the basic DS3-12 card that allows it to protect up to five working DS3-12 cards. The basic
DS3-12 card can only function as the protect card for one other DS3-12 card.
3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.5 3.5.1 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Slots and Connectors
3.5.1 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Slots and Connectors
You can install the DS3-12 or DS3N-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. Each DS3-12 or DS3N-12 card port features DSX-level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters (450 feet) depending on facility conditions. With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SMB connectors. See the
“7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5 for more
information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.5.2 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-5 shows the DS3-12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Figure 3-5 DS3-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
DS3
12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
Protection
Relay
Matrix
12
Line
Interface
Units
DS3A
ASIC
BTC
ASIC
B a c k p l a n e
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-13
3.5 3.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators
shows the DS3N-12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Figure 3-6 DS3N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
DS3N
12
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
Protection
Relay
Matrix
12
Line
Interface
Units
DS3A
ASIC
BTC
ASIC
B a c k p l a n e
3.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators
Table 3-7 describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 card faceplates.
Table 3-7 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as port LOS.
3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.6 3.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Port-Level Indicators
3.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the 12 DS3-12 and 12 DS3N-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.6 DS3/EC1-48 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Specifications” section on page A-18 .
The ONS 15454 DS3/EC1-48 card provides 48 Telcordia-compliant, GR-499 DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3/EC1-48 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:N protection schemes, where N <= 2.
Caution
When a protection switch moves traffic from the DS3/EC1-48 working/active card to the DS3/EC1-48 protect/standby card, ports on the now active/standby card cannot be taken out of service. Lost traffic can result if you take a port out of service, even if the DS3/EC1-48 standby card no longer carries traffic.
3.6.1 DS3/EC1-48 Slots and Connectors
For SONET applications, the DS3/EC1-48 card requires an HD shelf (15454-SA-HD) and EIA (UBIC,
MiniBNC); Software Release 5.0 or greater; and XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards.
Note
The DS3/EC1-48 card supports an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and TCC2/TCC2P cards.
You can install the DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1 to 3 or 15 to 17 on the ONS 15454, but installing this card in certain slots will block the use of other slots.
shows which slots become unusable for other electrical cards when the DS3/EC1-48 card is installed in a particular slot.
Table 3-8 DS3/EC1-48 Slot Restrictions
Slot
1
2
3
15
16
17
Additional Unusable Slots for Electrical Cards
5 and 6
3 or 4 (except another DS3/EC1-48 card can be installed in Slot 3)
—
—
14 and 15 (except another DS3/EC1-48 card can be installed in Slot 15)
12 and 13
78-17191-01
Caution
Do not install low-density DS-1 cards in the same side of the shelf as DS3/EC1-48 cards.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-15
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.6 3.6.2 DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Caution
Do not install a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1 or 2 if you have installed an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3.
Likewise, do not install a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 16 or 17 if you have installed an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 15. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors.
With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SCSI (UBIC) connectors. See the
“7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5
for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.6.2 DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram
shows the DS3/EC1-48 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
Figure 3-7
DS3
EC1
48
DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.6 3.6.3 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
48 DS3/EC1
Ports
(UBIC-V,
UBIC-H, or
HD MiniBNC)
Transformers
& Protection
Mux/Relays
4x
DS3/EC1
Framer/
Mapper/
LIU
STS-48
Mapper
FPGA
Main & Protect
SCL Bus’s
MAIN
IBPIA
ASIC p l a n e
B a c k
PROTECT
IBPIA
ASIC
Processor
3.6.3 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators
The DS3/EC1-48 card has three card-level LED indicators (
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-17
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.7 3.6.4 DS3/EC1-48 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-9
Green (Active)
DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset.
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red
FAIL LED persists in flashing.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS or LOF on one or more card ports.
3.6.4 DS3/EC1-48 Port-Level Indicators
You can obtain the status of the DS3/EC1-48 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.7 DS3i-N-12 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-20 .
The 12-port ONS 15454 DS3i-N-12 card provides 12 ITU-T G.703, ITU-T G.704, and
Telcordia GR-499-CORE compliant DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a
75-ohm coaxial cable. The DS3i-N-12 card supports 1:1 or 1:N protection with the proper backplane
EIA. The DS3i-N-12 card works with the XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards. Four sets of three adjacent DS-3 signals (Port 1 through Port 3, Port 4 through Port 6, Port 7 through Port 9, and Port 10 through Port 12) are mapped to VC3s into a VC4 and transported as an STC-3c.
The DS3i-N-12 can also aggregate DS3 and E1 traffic and transport it between SONET and SDH networks through AU4/STS 3 trunks, with the ability to add and drop DS3s to an STS3 trunk at intermediate nodes.
3.7.1 DS3i-N-12 Slots and Connectors
You can install the DS3i-N-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The DS3i-N-12 can operate as the protect card in a 1:N (N <= 5) DS-3 protection group on a half-shelf basis, with protection cards in Slots 3 and
15. It has circuitry that allows it to protect up to five working DS3i-N-12 cards. With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SMB connectors. See the
“7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5
for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
shows the DS3i-N-12 faceplate and block diagram.
3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.7 3.7.1 DS3i-N-12 Slots and Connectors
Figure 3-8
DS3I- N
12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
DS3i-N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
main DS3-m1 protect DS3-p1
Line
Interface
Unit #1 main DS3-m12 protect DS3-p12
Line
Interface
Unit #1
DS3
ASIC
BERT
FPGA
BTC
ASIC
OHP
FPGA a n p l e c k
B a uP bus
Processor SDRAM Flash
78-17191-01
The following list summarizes the DS3i-N-12 card features:
•
Provisionable framing format (M23, C-bit, or unframed)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Autorecognition and provisioning of incoming framing
VC-3 payload mapping as per ITU-T G.707, mapped into VC-4 and transported as STS-3c
Idle signal (“1100”) monitoring as per Telcordia GR-499-CORE
P-bit monitoring
C-bit parity monitoring
X-bit monitoring
M-bit monitoring
F-bit monitoring
Far-end block error (FEBE) monitoring
Far-end alarm and control (FEAC) status and loop code detection
Path trace byte support with TIM-P alarm generation
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-19
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.8 3.7.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators
3.7.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators
Table 3-10 describes the three LEDs on the DS3i-N-12 card faceplate.
Table 3-10 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset.
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red
FAIL LED persists in flashing.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3i-N-12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the DS3i-N-12 card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS or LOF on one or more card ports.
3.7.3 DS3i-N-12 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the DS3i-N-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
3.8 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards
3-20
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.7 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Specifications” section on page A-21 .
The ONS 15454 DS3-12E card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant GR-499 DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3-12E card provides enhanced performance monitoring functions. The DS3-12E can detect several different errored logic bits within a DS3 frame. This function allows the ONS 15454 to identify a degrading DS3 facility caused by upstream electronics (DS3 Framer). In addition, DS3 frame format autodetection and J1 path trace are supported. By monitoring additional overhead in the DS3 frame, subtle network degradations can be detected.
The following list summarizes DS3-12E card features:
•
Provisionable framing format M23, C-bit or unframed
•
•
•
•
•
•
Autorecognition and provisioning of incoming framing
P-bit monitoring
C-bit parity monitoring
X-bit monitoring
M-bit monitoring
F-bit monitoring
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.8 3.8.1 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Slots and Connectors
•
•
FEBE monitoring
FEAC status and loop code detection
Path trace byte support with TIM-P alarm generation
•
The DS3-12E supports a 1:1 protection scheme, meaning it can operate as the protect card for one other
DS3-12E card.
The DS3N-12E can operate as the protect card in a 1:N (N <= 5) DS3 protection group. It has additional circuitry not present on the basic DS3-12E card that allows it to protect up to five working DS3-12E cards. The basic DS3-12E card can only function as the protect card for one other DS3-12E card.
3.8.1 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Slots and Connectors
You can install the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E cards in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. Each
DS3-12E and DS3N-12E port features DSX-level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters
(450 feet). With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SMB connectors. See the
“7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5 for more information about
electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.8.2 DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-9 shows the DS3-12E faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-21
3.8 3.8.2 DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-9
DS3
12E
DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF main DS3-m1 protect DS3-p1
Line
Interface
Unit #1 main DS3-m12 protect DS3-p12
Line
Interface
Unit #1
DS3
ASIC
BERT
FPGA
OHP
FPGA
BTC
ASIC k p l
B a c a n e uP bus
Processor SDRAM Flash
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
shows the DS3N-12E faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.8 3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators
Figure 3-10
DS3 N
12E
DS3N-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF main DS3-m1 protect DS3-p1
Line
Interface
Unit #1 main DS3-m12 protect DS3-p12
Line
Interface
Unit #1
DS3
ASIC
BERT
FPGA
OHP
FPGA
BTC
ASIC l a n e c k p
B a uP bus
Processor SDRAM Flash
3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E card faceplates.
Table 3-11 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as port LOS or AIS.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-23
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.9 3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators
3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.9 DS3XM-6 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.9 DS3XM-6 Card Specifications” section on page A-24 .
The DS3XM-6 card, commonly referred to as a transmux card, provides six Telcordia-compliant,
GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing ports. The DS3XM-6 converts six framed DS-3 network connections to 28 x6 or 168 VT1.5s. DS3XM-6 cards operate at the VT1.5 level.
3.9.1 DS3XM-6 Slots and Connectors
The DS3XM-6 card supports 1:1 protection with the proper backplane EIA. EIAs are available with BNC or SMB connectors.
Note
A DS3XM-12 card cannot protect a DS3XM-6 card, except during a card upgrade.
You can install the DS3XM-6 in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Each DS3XM-6 port features DSX-level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters (450 feet) depending on facility conditions. See
Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5
for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.9.2 DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram
shows the DS3XM-6 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.9 3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G
Figure 3-11
DS3XM
6
DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Mapper unit
Protection
Relay
Matrix
6 x Line
Interface
Units
6 x M13
Units
6 STS1 to
28 DS1
Mapper uP
DRAM FLASH
6 STS-1 / STS-12
Mux/Demux ASIC
DC/DC unit
BTC
ASIC p l a n e
B a c k
3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G
The DS3XM-6 card works in conjunction with the XCVT card. A single DS3XM-6 can demultiplex six
DS-3 signals into 168 VT1.5s that the XCVT card then manages and cross connects. XCVT cards host a maximum of 336 bidirectional VT1.5s on two DS3XM-6 cards. In most network configurations, two
DS3XM-6 cards are paired together as working and protect cards.
3.9.4 DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3XM-6 card faceplate.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-25
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.9.5 DS3XM-6 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-12
Green (Active)
DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3XM-6 card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the DS3XM-6 card is operational and in standby in a 1:1 protection group.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BER on one or more card ports.
3.9.5 DS3XM-6 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the six DS3XM-6 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
3.10 DS3XM-12 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-23 .
The DS3XM-12 card, commonly referred to as a transmux card, provides twelve Telcordia-compliant,
GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing ports. The DS3XM-12 converts up to 12 framed DS-3 network connections to 12 x 28 VT1.5s.
3.10.1 Backplane Configurations
The DS3XM-12 card has 12 framed DS-3 physical ports (known as “ported” mode). The card also supports a maximum of 12 “portless” DS3-mapped STS1 interfaces depending on the type of cross-connect used. Each physical port corresponds to two portless ports. If a circuit is provisioned to a physical port, its associated portless pair becomes unavailable and vice versa. See the
Transmux” section on page 11-15
for more information.
The DS3XM-12 card is compatible with the XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards.
Note
The DS3XM-12 card supports an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and TCC2/TCC2P cards.
Caution
During an upgrade of the DS3XM-6 card to DS3XM-12 card, the DS-3XM-12 card (in slots 1 to 5) encounters an insufficient cable loss of margin when the LBO setting on the DS-3 input ports are set between 225 to 450 feet cable lengths.
3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.10.2 Ported Mode
The DS3XM-12 supports three different backplane throughput configurations:
•
•
STS-48 when an XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card is used. This configuration supports the OC-48 rate in any slot.
STS-48 for the Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 when an XCVT card is used.
•
STS-12 for Slot 1 through 4, and 7 through 12 slots when an XCVT card is used. This configuration is bandwidth-limiting in the portless mode of operation.
The backplane throughput configuration is selected in CTC card view using the Maintenance > Card tab.
3.10.2 Ported Mode
The “ported” mode supports up to 12 framed DS-3 bidirectional mapped signals to each DS3XM-12 card, where the traffic is demultiplexed and mapped into a VT1.5 payload. This payload is then mapped and multiplexed up to a bidirectional STS-1.
3.10.3 Portless Mode
The “portless” mode allows for IXC hand off connections through a standard SONET fiber optical interface with DS-3-mapped STS-1s as a payload. This physical connection is accomplished with any of the OC-N cards. The system cross-connect grooms the DS-3 mapped STS1 traffic to the appropriate
DS3XM-12 card, where the traffic is demultiplexed and mapped into a VT1.5 payload. This payload is then mapped and multiplexed up to a higher rate STS-1. See the
“11.4 Portless Transmux” section on page 11-15
for more information.
3.10.4 Shelf Configurations
The DS3XM-12 card supports the XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cards. The DS3XM-12 card is supported in any of the multiservice slots (Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17).
The DS3XM-12 card operates at the VT1.5 level and supports a maximum of 6 or 12 ports of “portless”
(DS-3-mapped STS1s) interface, depending on the shelf configuration (see Table 3-13 ).
Table 3-13 DS3XM-12 Shelf Configurations
Port Maximums
Portless Ports
Ported Ports
Slots 1 through 4, and
14 through 17
(XCVT Card)
6
12
Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13
(XCVT, XC10G, or
XC-VXC-10G Cards)
12
12
XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Shelf
(any multiservice slot)
12
12
Caution
Do not install low-density DS-1 cards in the same side of the shelf as the DS3XM-12 cards.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-27
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.10.5 Protection Modes
3.10.5 Protection Modes
The DS3XM-12 card supports 1:1 and 1:N protection groups, where N <= 5. However, N <= 7 if one of the following conditions is true:
•
Only portless connections are used.
•
A combination of ported and portless connections is used but all the ported cards being protected are on the same side of the chassis as the protecting card.
These protection groups can be implemented in the ONS 15454 SONET platform for both the A and B sides and do not require a special protect card.
Note
A DS3XM-12 card cannot protect a DS3XM-6 card, except during a card upgrade.
In 1:N protection, the protect card must be in Slot 3 or 15. In 1:1 protection, the working and protect cards must be in adjacent slots. The protection switches cause a traffic hit of no more than 50 ms. See
the “7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane” section on page 7-5
for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions.
3.10.6 Card Features
Table 3-14 summarizes the DS3XM-12 features.
Table 3-14 DS3XM-12 Features
Feature
Protection
Upgrade
Performance
Monitoring
Loopbacks
•
•
•
Description
1:1 and 1:N protection (“ported” and “portless”)
•
Errorless software upgrade
•
•
•
•
•
In-service upgrade of legacy DS3XM-6 to DS3XM-12 (> 60 ms hit)
DS-3 M2-3 near-end performance monitoring (PM) parameters
DS-3 C-bit near end and far end PM parameters
DS-1 near end PM parameters
DS-1 Extended Super Frame (ESF) PM far end parameters based on FDL
PRM messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
1989 AT&T TR 54016 DS1 ESF PM
SPRM and NPRM DS1 PM parameters
DS3 terminal and facility
DS1 facility
DS1 terminal
FEAC based DS1 and DS3 loopbacks (TX and RX)
DS1 ESF-FDL TX line and payload loopbacks
DS1 SF (D4) “in-band” TX loopbacks
AT&T TR 54016 ESF DS1 TX line and payload loopbacks
3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.10.7 DS3XM-12 Slots and Connectors
Table 3-14
Feature
DS1 Auto-Frame
Detection
Diagnostics
DS3XM-12 Features
Description
DS1 frame autodetection and autoprovisioning
Manual DS1 frame provisioning
Manual DS3 frame provisioning
J1
J2
Portless
Works in conjunction with the DS1 autoframe detection and gives you override capability
Legacy feature (C-Bit and M23 frame formats are supported)
Legacy feature (extended to 6 additional ports)
336 J2 strings are supported
Supports DS3 data from the backplane in addition to the DS3 data from the line interface unit
Power-up diagnostics on working and protect cards
3.10.7 DS3XM-12 Slots and Connectors
The DS3XM-12 card can be used with BNC, SMB, SCSI (UBIC), or MiniBNC EIA connectors.
The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Each DS3XM-12 port features DSX-level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters (450 feet) depending on facility conditions.
3.10.8 DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-12 shows the DS3XM-12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-29
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.10.9 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 3-12
DS3XM
12
DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
12 DS3
Ports
Transformers
& Protection
Mux/Relays
12 Port
DS3 LIU
4x
VT1.5 Mapped
STS-1's
(Both Modes)
DS3/VT1.5
Framer/
Mapper
STS-24
Mapper
FPGA
Main & Protect
SCL Bus’s
MAIN
IBPIA
ASIC
PROTECT
IBPIA
ASIC p l a n e
B a c k
DS3 Mapped
STS’1s
(Portless Mode)
Processor
3.10.9 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators
Table 3-15 describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3XM-12 card faceplate.
3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3.10 3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators
Table 3-15 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. It is steady while the self-test runs, and blinks during provisioning.
Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3XM-12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the DS3XM-12 card is operational and in standby in a 1:1 protection group.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BER on one or more card ports.
3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the twelve DS3XM-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
3-31
3.10 3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards
3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
4
Optical Cards
78-17191-01
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 optical card features and functions. It includes descriptions, hardware specifications, and block diagrams for each optical card. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
4.1 Optical Card Overview, page 4-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card, page 4-5
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card, page 4-7
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card, page 4-9
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card, page 4-11
4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card, page 4-13
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card, page 4-15
4.8 OC48 IR 1310 Card, page 4-17
4.9 OC48 LR 1550 Card, page 4-19
4.10 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card, page 4-21
4.11 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card, page 4-23
4.12 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards, page 4-25
4.13 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Cards, page 4-27
4.14 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card, page 4-29
4.15 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card, page 4-31
4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card, page 4-33
4.17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card, page 4-38
4.18 15454_MRC-12 Multirate Card, page 4-41
4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards, page 4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-1
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.1 4.1 Optical Card Overview
•
4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs, page 4-49
4.1 Optical Card Overview
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the
“1.17 Cards and Slots” section on page 1-68 for a list of slots and symbols.
4.1.1 Card Summary
Table 4-1 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 optical cards.
Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 15454
Card
OC3 IR 4 SH 1310
Port Description
The OC3 IR 4 SH 1310 card provides four intermediate- or short-range OC-3 ports and operates at 1310 nm.
Note
The OC3 IR 4 SH 1310 and OC3 IR 4/STM1
SH 1310 cards are functionally the same.
For Additional Information...
See the
4/STM1 SH 1310 Card” section on page 4-5
.
OC3 IR 4/ STM1
SH 1310
OC3 IR/ STM1 SH
1310-8
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card provides four intermediate- or short-range OC-3 ports and operates at 1310 nm.
The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card provides eight intermediate- or short-range OC-3 ports and operates at 1310 nm.
OC12 IR 1310
See the
4/STM1 SH 1310 Card” section on page 4-5
See the
SH 1310-8 Card” section on page 4-7 .
.
The OC12 IR 1310 card provides one intermediate- or short-range OC-12 port and operates at 1310 nm.
Note
The OC12 IR 1310 and OC12/STM4 SH 1310 cards are functionally the same.
See the
IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card” section on page 4-9
.
OC12 IR/STM4 SH
1310
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card provides one intermediate- or short-range OC-12 port and operates at 1310 nm.
See the
IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card” section on page 4-9
.
OC12 LR 1310
The OC12 LR 1310 card provides one long-range
OC-12 port and operates at 1310 nm.
Note
The OC12 LR 1310 and OC12 LR/STM4 LH
1310 cards are functionally the same.
See the
LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card” section on page 4-11 .
OC12 LR/STM4
LH 1310
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card provides one long-range OC-12 port and operates at 1310 nm.
OC12 LR 1550
The OC12 LR 1550 card provides one long-range
OC-12 port and operates at 1550 nm.
Note
The OC12 LR 1550 and OC12 LR/STM4 LH
1550 cards are functionally the same.
See the
LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card” section on page 4-11 .
See the
LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card” section on page 4-13 .
4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.1 4.1.1 Card Summary
Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued)
Card
OC12 LR/STM4
LH 1550
Port Description
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card provides one long-range OC-12 port and operates at 1550 nm.
For Additional Information...
See the
LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card” section on page 4-13
.
OC12 IR/STM4 SH
1310-4
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card provides four intermediate- or short-range OC-12 ports and operates at 1310 nm.
OC48 IR 1310
The OC48 IR 1310 card provides one intermediate-range OC-48 port and operates at
1310 nm.
OC48 LR 1550
OC48 IR/STM16
SH AS 1310
The OC48 LR 1550 card provides one long-range
OC-48 port and operates at 1550 nm.
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card provides one intermediate- or short-range OC-48 port at 1310 nm.
See the
IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card” section on page 4-15
See the
.
See the
OC48 LR/STM16
LH AS 1550
OC48 ELR
200 GHz
OC192 SR/STM64
IO 1310
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card provides one long-range OC-48 port at 1550 nm.
See the
OC48 ELR/STM16
EH 100 GHz
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card provides one long-range (enhanced) OC-48 port and operates in
Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. This card is available in 18 different wavelengths (9 in the blue band and 9 in the red band) in the 1550-nm range, every second wavelength in the ITU grid for 100-GHz spacing dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).
See the
.
The OC48 ELR 200 GHz card provides one long-range
(enhanced) OC-48 port and operates in Slot 5, 6, 12, or
13. This card is available in 18 different wavelengths
(9 in the blue band and 9 in the red band) in the
1550-nm range, every fourth wavelength in the ITU grid for 200-GHz spacing DWDM.
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card provides one intra-office-haul OC-192 port at 1310 nm.
See the
200 GHz Cards” section on page 4-27
.
OC192 IR/STM64
SH 1550
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card provides one intermediate-range OC-192 port at 1550 nm.
See the
SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card” section on page 4-29
.
See the
IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card” section on page 4-31
.
OC192 LR/STM64
LH 1550
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card provides one long-range OC-192 port at 1550 nm.
OC192 LR/ STM64
LH ITU 15xx.xx
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card provides one extended long-range OC-192 port. This card is available in multiple wavelengths in the 1550-nm range of the ITU grid for 100-GHz-spaced DWDM.
See the
LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card” section on page 4-33
.
See the
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-3
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.1 4.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued)
Card
15454_MRC-12
OC192SR1/STM6
4IO Short Reach and
OC192/STM64
Any Reach
1
Port Description
The 15454_MRC-12 card provides up to twelve OC-3 or OC-12 ports, or up to four STM-16 ports, using dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM) SFPs. The card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
For Additional Information...
See the
Multirate Card” section on page 4-41 .
The OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and
OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards each provide a single
OC-192/STM-64 interface capable of operating with
SR-1, IR-2, and LR-2 XFP modules (depending on the card) at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. The cards operate in
Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
See the
1.
In the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) GUI, these cards are known as OC192-XFP.
Note
The Cisco OC3 IR/STM1 SH, OC12 IR/STM4 SH, and OC48 IR/STM16 SH interface optics, all working at 1310 nm, are optimized for the most widely used SMF-28 fiber, available from many suppliers.
Corning MetroCor fiber is optimized for optical interfaces that transmit at 1550 nm or in the C and L
DWDM windows, and targets interfaces with higher dispersion tolerances than those found in
OC3 IR/STM1 SH, OC12 IR/STM4 SH, and OC48 IR/STM16 SH interface optics. If you are using
Corning MetroCor fiber, OC3 IR/STM1 SH, OC12 IR/STM4 SH, and OC48 IR/STM16 SH interface optics become dispersion limited before they become attenuation limited. In this case, consider using
OC12 LR/STM4 LH and OC48 LR/STM16 LH cards instead of OC12 IR/STM4 SH and
OC48 IR/STM16 SH cards.
With all fiber types, network planners/engineers should review the relative fiber type and optics specifications to determine attenuation, dispersion, and other characteristics to ensure appropriate deployment.
4.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 4-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical card. See
Table 2-5 on page 2-4 for a list
of cross-connect cards that are compatible with each optical card.
Note
“Yes” indicates that this card is fully or partially supported by the indicated software release. Refer to the individual card reference section for more information about software limitations for this card.
Table 4-2
Optical Card
OC3 IR 4 1310
Optical Card Software Release Compatibility
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310
R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0 R4.1 R4.5
1
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
R4.6 R4.7
Yes —
Yes —
R5.0 R6.0 R7.0
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.2 4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card
Table 4-2 Optical Card Software Release Compatibility (continued)
Optical Card
OC3 IR /STM1 SH 1310-8
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310
OC12 IR 1310
OC12 LR 1310
OC12 LR 1550
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4
OC48 IR 1310
OC48 LR 1550
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310
2
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550
3
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz
OC48 ELR 200 GHz
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310
Yes
—
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
(15454-OC192LR1550)
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
(15454-OC192-LR2)
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx
15454_MRC-12
—
—
—
OC192SR1/STM64IO Short
Reach and OC192/STM64 Any
Reach
4
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0 R4.1 R4.5
1
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes —
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes —
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes —
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
R4.6 R4.7
Yes —
Yes —
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
Yes —
—
—
—
Yes —
Yes —
— —
— —
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
— Yes Yes
— Yes Yes
1.
DWDM-only release.
2.
To enable OC-192 and OC-48 any-slot card operation, use the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card, the TCC+/TCC2/TCC2P card, Software R3.1 or later, and the
15454-SA-ANSI or 154545-SA-HD shelf assembly. Note that the TCC+ card is not compatible with Software 4.5 or later.
3.
To enable OC-192 and OC-48 any-slot card operation, use the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card, the TCC+/TCC2/TCC2P card, Software R3.1 or later, and the
15454-SA-ANSI or 154545-SA-HD shelf assembly. Note that the TCC+ card is not compatible with Software 4.5 or later.
4.
These cards are designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
R5.0 R6.0 R7.0
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-25 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-5
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.2 4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card provides four intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-3 ports compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at
155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports Virtual Tributary (VT), nonconcatenated
(STS-1), or concatenated (STS-1 or STS-3c) payloads. Figure 4-1
shows the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Note
The OC3 IR 4 SH 1310 and OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 cards are functionally the same.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4-1
OC3IR4
STM1SH
1310
Tx
3
Rx
Tx
2
Rx
Tx
1
Rx
Tx
4
Rx
FAIL
ACT
SF
OC-3
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
STS-3 termination/ framing
STS-3 termination/ framing
STS-3 termination/ framing
STS-3 termination/ framing
Flash
RAM uP
STS-12
STS-12/
STS-3
Mux/Demux
BTC
ASIC uP bus k p l
B a c a n e
You can install the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be provisioned as part of a path protection or in a linear add/drop multiplexer (ADM) configuration. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors.
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card supports 1+1 unidirectional or bidirectional protection switching.
You can provision protection on a per port basis.
4-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.3 4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card detects loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer
(LOP), line-layer alarm indication signal (AIS-L), and line-layer remote defect indication (RDI-L) conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions.
The card also counts section and line bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors.
To enable automatic protection switching (APS), the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card extracts the K1 and
K2 bytes from the SONET overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The data communication channel/general communication channel (DCC/GCC) bytes are forwarded to the
TCC2/TCC2P card, which terminates the DCC/GCC.
4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card.
Table 4-3
Amber SF LED
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Green ACT LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high bit error rate (BER) on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the links are working, the light turns off.
4.2.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port. The LEDs are green if the port is available to carry traffic, is provisioned as in-service, and is part of a protection group, in the active mode. You can find the status of the four card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1SH 1310-8 Card Specifications” section on page A-26 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card provides eight intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-3 ports compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at
155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3C) payloads.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-7
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.3 4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
shows the card faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 4-2
OC3IR
STM1SH
1310-8
FAIL
ACT
SF
OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #1
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #2
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #3
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #4
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #5
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #6
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #7
STM-1
Optical
Transceiver #8
OCEAN
ASIC
BPIA RX
Prot
BPIA RX
Main
BPIA TX
Prot
BPIA TX
Main
Flash RAM uP uP bus l a k p n
B a c e
You can install the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The card can be provisioned as part of a path protection or in an ADM configuration. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses LC connectors on the faceplate that are angled downward 12.5 degrees.
The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
You can provision protection on a per port basis.
The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
To enable APS, the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card supports full
DCC/GCC connectivity for remote network management.
4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.4 4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators
4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the eight-port OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card.
Table 4-4 OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
Green ACT LED
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the links are working, the light turns off.
4.3.2 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Port-Level Indicators
Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port. The LEDs show green if the port is available to carry traffic, is provisioned as in-service, is part of a protection group, or is in the active mode. You can also find the status of the eight card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.4 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-27 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card provides one intermediate or short range SONET OC-12 port compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The port operates at
622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c) payloads.
Figure 4-3 shows the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310
faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Note
The OC12 IR 1310 and OC12/STM4 SH 1310 cards are functionally the same.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-9
4.4 4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-3
OC12IR
STM4SH
1310
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Tx
1
Rx
OC-12
Optical
Transceiver
Flash
RAM uP
Mux/
Demux
STS-12 uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-12
Main SCI
Protect SCI k p l
B a c a n e
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
You can install the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, and provision the card as a drop card or span card in a two-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card uses SC optical connections and supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIT errors.
To enable APS, the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The DCC/GCC bytes are forwarded to the
TCC2/TCC2P card, which terminates the DCC/GCC.
4.4.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-5 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card.
4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.5 4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-5
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC-12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-28 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card provides one long-range SONET OC-12 port per card compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c,
STS-6c, or STS-12c) payloads.
Figure 4-4 shows the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 faceplate and a block
diagram of the card.
Note
The OC12 LR 1310 and OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 cards are functionally the same.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-11
4.5 4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-4
OC12LR
STM4LH
1310
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
Tx
1
Rx
OC-12
Optical
Transceiver
Flash
RAM uP
Mux/
Demux
STS-12 uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-12
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e c k p
B a
You can install the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, and provision the card as a drop card or span card in a two-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC optical connections and supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIT errors.
To enable APS, the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead to perform appropriate protection switches. The DCC/GCC bytes are forwarded to the
TCC2/TCC2P card, which terminates the DCC/GCC.
4.5.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-6 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card.
4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.6 4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-6
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications” section on page A-29 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card provides one long-range SONET/SDH OC-12 port compliant with
ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c,
STS-6c, or STS-12c) payloads.
Figure 4-5 shows the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 faceplate and a block
diagram of the card.
Note
The OC12 LR 1550 and OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 cards are functionally the same.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on.
Statement 293
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-13
4.6 4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-5
OC12LR
STM4LH
1550
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Tx
1
Rx
FAIL
ACT
SF
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
OC-12
Optical
Transceiver
Flash
RAM uP
Mux/
Demux
STS-12 uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-12
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e
B a c k p
You can install the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 can be provisioned as part of a two-fiber BLSR, path protection, or linear
ADM.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 uses long-reach optics centered at 1550 nm and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 uses SC optical connections and supports 1+1 bidirectional or unidirectional protection switching.
The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The card also counts section and line BIT errors.
4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-7 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card.
4-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.7 4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-7
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Specifications” section on page A-30 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card provides four intermediate or short range SONET/SDH
OC-12/STM-4 ports compliant with the ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
Each port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c) payloads.
Warning
The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-6 shows the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-15
4.7 4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card
Figure 4-6
OC12IR
STM4SH
1310-4
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
Tx
3
Rx
Tx
2
Rx
Tx
1
Rx
Tx
4
Rx
FAIL
ACT
SF
OC-12
STM-4
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
Optical
Transceiver
STS-12/STM-4 termination/ framing
STS-12/STM-4 termination/ framing
STS-12/STM-4 termination/ framing
STS-12/STM-4 termination/ framing
Flash
RAM uP uP bus
STS-12
ASIC n e l a c k
B a p
You can install the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. Each interface features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
You can provision protection on a per port basis.
The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card detects LOS, LOF, LOP, MS-AIS, and MS-FERF conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
To enable BLSR, the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead and processes them to switch accordingly. The DCC/GCC bytes are forwarded to the
TCC2/TCC2P card, which terminates the DCC/GCC.
Note
If you ever expect to upgrade an OC-12/STM-4 ring to a higher bit rate, you should not put an
OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card in that ring. The four-port card is not upgradable to a single-port card.
The reason is that four different spans, possibly going to four different nodes, cannot be merged to a single span.
4-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.8 4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators
4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card.
Table 4-8 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Green ACT LED
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready.
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the four card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.8 OC48 IR 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.7 OC48 IR 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-31
.
See
for optical card compatibility.
Note
Any new features that are available as part of this software release are not enabled for this card.
The OC48 IR 1310 card provides one intermediate-range, SONET OC-48 port per card, compliant with
Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-7 shows the OC48 IR 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-17
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.8 4.8.1 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-7
OC48
IR
1310
OC48 IR 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Tx
1
Rx
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash
RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI
B l k p a c a n e
You can install the OC48 IR 1310 card in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or in an ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC-48 port features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC48 IR 1310 uses SC connectors. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
The OC48 IR 1310 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
4.8.1 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-9 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 IR 1310 card.
4-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.9 4.8.2 OC48 IR 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-9
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.8.2 OC48 IR 1310 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 IR 1310 card port by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.9 OC48 LR 1550 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.8 OC48 LR 1550 Card Specifications” section on page A-32
.
See
for optical card compatibility.
Note
Any new features that are available as part of this software release are not enabled for this card.
The OC48 LR 1550 card provides one long-range, SONET OC-48 port per card, compliant with
Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-8 shows the OC48 LR 1550 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-19
4.9 4.9.1 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-8
OC48
LR
1550
OC48 LR 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Tx
1
Rx
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e c k p
B a
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
You can install OC48 LR 1550 cards in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC48 LR 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors, and it supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
The OC48 LR 1550 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
4.9.1 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-10 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 LR 1550 card.
4-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.10 4.9.2 OC48 LR 1550 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-10
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.9.2 OC48 LR 1550 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 LR 1550 card port by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.10 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.9 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-33
. See
for optical card compatibility.
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card provides one intermediate-range SONET/SDH OC-48 port compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The port operates at
2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning
The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-9 shows the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-21
4.10 4.10.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-9
OC48IR
STM16SH
AS
1310
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
TX
1
RX
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e c k p
B a
You can install the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC-48 port features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 uses SC connectors. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
4.10.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-11 lists the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card.
4-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.11 4.10.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-11
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF,
AIS-L, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.10.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.11 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.10 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications” section on page A-33 . See
for optical card compatibility.
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card provides one long-range SONET/SDH OC-48 port compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-3c,
STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning
The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-10 shows a block diagram and the faceplate of the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-23
4.11 4.11.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-10
OC48LR
STM16LH
AS
1550
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
TX
1
RX
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e c k p
B a
You can install OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors, and it supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
The OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 detects LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors.
4.11.1 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-12 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card.
4-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.12 4.11.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-12
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.11.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.12 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.11 OC48 ELR/STM 16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications” section on page A-34 . See
for optical card compatibility.
Thirty-seven distinct OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards provide the ONS 15454 DWDM channel plan. Each OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card has one SONET OC-48/SDH STM-16 port that complies with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.692, and ITU-T G.958.
The port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card carries VT, concatenated
(STS-1), and nonconcatenated (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-11 shows the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-25
4.12 4.12 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards
Figure 4-11
OC48ELR
STM16EH
100GHz
1560.61
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
TX
1
RX
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI k p l
B a c a n e
Nineteen of the cards operate in the blue band with spacing of 100 GHz on the ITU grid (1528.77 nm,
1530.33 nm, 1531.12 nm, 1531.90 nm, 1532.68 nm, 1533.47 nm, 1534.25 nm, 1535.04 nm,
1535.82 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1538.98 nm, 1539.77 nm, 1540.56 nm, 1541.35 nm,
1542.14 nm, 1542.94 nm, 1543.73 nm, and 1544.53 nm). ITU spacing conforms to ITU-T G.692 and
Telcordia GR-2918-CORE, Issue 2.
The other eighteen cards operate in the red band with spacing of 100 GHz on the ITU grid (1546.12 nm,
1546.92 nm, 1547.72 nm, 1548.51 nm,1549.32 nm, 1550.12 nm, 1550.92 nm, 1551.72 nm, 1552.52 nm,
1554.13 nm, 1554.94 nm, 1555.75 nm, 1556.55 nm, 1557.36 nm, 1558.17 nm, 1558.98 nm,
1559.79 nm, and 1560.61 nm). These cards are also designed to interoperate with the Cisco ONS 15216
DWDM solution.
You can install the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
Each OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card uses extended long-reach optics operating individually within the ITU-T 100-GHz grid. The OC-48 DWDM cards are intended to be used in applications with long unregenerated spans of up to 300 km (186 miles) (with mid-span amplification). These transmission distances are achieved through the use of inexpensive optical amplifiers (flat gain amplifiers) such as
Cisco ONS 15216 erbium-doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs).
Maximum system reach in filterless applications is 26 dB without the use of optical amplifiers or regenerators. However, system reach also depends on the condition of the facilities, the number of splices and connectors, and other performance-affecting factors. When used in combination with
4-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.13 4.12.1 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators
ONS 15216 100-GHz filters, the link budget is reduced by the insertion loss of the filters plus an additional 2-dB power penalty. The wavelength stability of the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards is +/– 0.12 nm for the life of the product and over the full range of operating temperatures. Each interface contains a transmitter and receiver.
The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards detect LOS, LOF, LOP, and AIS-L conditions. The cards also count section and line BIP errors.
4.12.1 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators
lists the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards.
Table 4-13
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz
Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.12.2 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.13 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Cards
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.12 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Specifications” section on page A-35 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
Eighteen distinct OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards provide the ONS 15454 DWDM channel plan. Each
OC48 ELR 200 GHz card provides one SONET OC-48 port that is compliant with Telcordia
GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card carries VT, concatenated (STS-1), or nonconcatenated (STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c) payloads.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-12 shows the OC48 ELR 200 GHz faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-27
4.13 4.13 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Cards
Figure 4-12
OC48
ELR
1530.33
OC48 ELR 200 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
1
RX
OC-48
Optical
Transceiver
Flash RAM uP
Mux/
Demux uP bus
BTC
ASIC
STS-48
Main SCI
Protect SCI l a n e c k p
B a
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
Nine of the cards operate in the blue band with spacing of 200 GHz on the ITU grid (1530.33 nm,
1531.90 nm, 1533.47 nm, 1535.04 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1539.77 nm, 1541.35 nm, and
1542.94 nm).
The other nine cards operate in the red band with spacing of 200 GHz on the ITU grid
(1547.72 nm, 1549.32 nm, 1550.92 nm, 1552.52 nm, 1554.13 nm, 1555.75 nm, 1557.36 nm,
1558.98 nm, and 1560.61 nm). These cards are also designed to interoperate with the Cisco ONS 15216
DWDM solution.
You can install the OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration. Each
OC48 ELR 200 GHz card uses extended long-reach optics operating individually within the
ITU-T 200-GHz grid. The OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards are intended to be used in applications with long unregenerated spans of up to 200 km (124 miles) (with mid-span amplification). These transmission distances are achieved through the use of inexpensive optical amplifiers (flat gain amplifiers) such as
EDFAs. Using collocated amplification, distances up to 200 km (124 miles) can be achieved for a single channel, 160 km (99 miles) for 8 channels.
Maximum system reach in filterless applications is 24 dB or approximately 80 km (50 miles) without the use of optical amplifiers or regenerators. However, system reach also depends on the condition of the facilities, the number of splices and connectors, and other performance-affecting factors. The
OC48 ELR DWDM cards feature wavelength stability of +/–0.25 nm. Each interface contains a transmitter and receiver.
4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.14 4.13.1 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators
The OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards support extended long-reach applications in conjunction with optical amplification. Using electro-absorption technology, the OC48 DWDM cards provide a solution at the lower extended long-reach distances.
The OC48 ELR 200 GHz interface features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses SC connectors and supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching.
The OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards detect LOS, LOF, LOP, AIS-L, and RDI-L conditions. The cards also count section and line BIP errors. To enable APS, the OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards extract the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead. The DCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P card; the
TCC2/TCC2P terminates the DCC/GCC.
4.13.1 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards.
Table 4-14 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Green/Amber ACT
LED
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.13.2 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC48 ELR 200 GHz card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
4.14 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.13 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications” section on page A-36
. See
for optical card compatibility.
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card provides one intra-office haul SONET/SDH OC-192 port in the
1310-nm wavelength range, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia
GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 2 km (1.24 miles).
The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated payloads.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-29
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.14 4.14.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
shows the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 4-13 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Tx
1
Rx
FAIL
ACT
SF
OC192SR
STM64IO
1310
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
Demux
CDR
Mux
CK Mpy
Demux
Mux
BTC
ASIC
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL
B n e l a k p a c
ADC x 8 SRAM Flash Processor
You can install OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as part of a BLSR, a path protection, a linear configuration, or as a regenerator for longer span reaches.
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 port features a 1310-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports
1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur.
The OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.
4.14.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-15 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card.
4-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.15 4.14.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-15
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card in standby mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.14.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.15 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.14 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications” section on page A-37
. See
for optical card compatibility.
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card provides one intermediate reach SONET/SDH OC-192 port in the
1550-nm wavelength range, compliant with ITU-T G.707,ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia
GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 40 km (25 miles) with SMF-28 fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated payloads.
Warning
The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
Figure 4-14 shows the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 faceplate and block diagram.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-31
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.15 4.15.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-14
OC192IR
STM64SH
1550
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
Demux
CDR
Demux
FAIL
ACT
SF
BTC
ASIC
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
Mux
CK Mpy
Mux
Tx
1
Rx
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL p l a n e
B a c k
ADC x 8 SRAM Flash Processor
Note
You must use a 3 to 15 dB fiber attenuator (5 dB recommended) when working with the
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card. Using fiber loopbacks can cause irreparable damage to the card.
You can install OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as part of a BLSR, path protection, or linear configuration, or also as a regenerator for longer span reaches.
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports
1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur.
The OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.
4.15.1 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-16 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card.
4-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.16 4.15.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-16
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.15.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card ports by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.15 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications” section on page A-38
. See
for optical card compatibility.
Note
Any new features that are available as part of this software release are not enabled for this card.
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card provides one long-range SONET/SDH OC-192 port compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE (except minimum and maximum transmit power, and minimum receive power). The card port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated payloads.
There are two versions of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550. The earliest version has the product ID
15454-OC192LR1550, and the latest card’s product ID is 15454-OC192-LR2. These cards have slight specification differences that are noted throughout this description.
Note
You can differentiate this OC-192/STM-64 card (15454-OC192-LR2, 15454E-L64.2-1) from the
OC-192/STM-64 card with the product ID 15454-OC192LR1550 by looking at the faceplate. This card does not have a laser on/off switch.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-33
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Figure 4-15 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) Faceplate and Block Diagram
OC192LR
STM64LH
1550
TX
1
RX
TX
DANGER - INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
MAY BE EMITTED
FROM THE END OF
UNTERMINATED
FIBER CABLE OR
CONNECTOR. DO
NOT STARE INTO
BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS.
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 10dBm
Class 1M (IEC)
Class 1 (CDRH)
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
0
1 OC-192
Optical transceiver
OC-192
Optical transceiver
Demux
CDR
Mux
CK Mpy
Mux
Mux
DAC x 8
ADC x 8
Dig Pol x 2
SRAM Flash Processor
BTC
ASIC
STS
SCL
STS
SCL a n e p l c k
B a
shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning for 15454-OC192-LR2.
4-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
Figure 4-16
TX
Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) Faceplate
DANGER - INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
MAY BE EMITTED
FROM THE END OF
UNTERMINATED
FIBER CABLE OR
CONNECTOR. DO
NOT STARE INTO
BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS.
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 10dBm
Class 1M (IEC)
Class 1 (CDRH)
Figure 4-17 shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2) faceplate and a block diagram
of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-35
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
Figure 4-17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2) Faceplate and Block Diagram
1550
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
1
RX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
-7 dBm
OC-192/STM-64
OC-192/STM-64
Optical transceiver
Optical transceiver
Demux
CDR
Mux
CK Mpy
Mux
Mux
BTC
ASIC
STS
SCL
STS
SCL a n p l e c k
B a
ADC x 8 SRAM Flash Processor
shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning on 15454-OC192LR1550.
4-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card
Figure 4-18 Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2)Faceplate
1550
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
-7 dBm
TX
1
RX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
-7 dBm
78-17191-01
Caution
You must use a 19 to 24 dB (14 to 28 dB for 15454-OC192-LR2) (20 dB recommended) fiber attenuator when connecting a fiber loopback to an OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card. Never connect a direct fiber loopback. Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the card. A transmit-to-receive (Tx-to-Rx) connection that is not attenuated damages the receiver.
You can install OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 cards in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, ADM (linear) configuration, or as a regenerator for longer span reaches.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-37
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.17 4.16.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
The card port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate.The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports 1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur.
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility. The card also counts section and line BIT errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.
4.16.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-17 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card.
Table 4-17
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
Red FAIL LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on the card’s port. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.
4.16.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card port by using the LCD screen on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of the port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
Note
The optical output power of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (+4 dBm to +7 dBm) is 6 dB lower than in
L-64.2b of the 10/2000 prepublished unedited version of ITU-T G.691 (+10 dBm to +13 dBm). However, the total attenuation range of the optical path, 22 to 16 dB, is maintained by the optical receiver sensitivity range of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (–7 dBm to –24 dBm). This sensitivity range outperforms the specification in L-64.2b of the 10/2000 prepublished unedited version of ITU-T G.691.
The resulting link budget of the card is 26 dBm.
4.17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card
Note
. See
for optical card compatibility.
4-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.17 4.17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card
Sixteen distinct OC-192/STM-64 ITU 100 GHz DWDM cards comprise the ONS 15454 DWDM channel plan. Each OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE (except minimum and maximum transmit power, and minimum receive power). The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 60 km (37 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion.
Note
Longer distances are possible in an amplified system using dispersion compensation.
Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser
to be on. Statement 293
The card supports VT, nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated payloads.
shows the
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx faceplate.
Figure 4-19 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Faceplate
OC192LR
STM64LH
ITU
FAIL
ACT
SF
Tx
1
Rx
RX
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
-8 dBm
RX
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
-8 dBm
78-17191-01
Figure 4-20 shows a block diagram of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-39
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.17 4.17.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators
Figure 4-20 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Block Diagram
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
Demux
CDR
Demux
STM-64 / OC192
Optical transceiver
Mux
CK Mpy
Mux
BTC
ASIC
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL
STM-64/
OC-192
SCL l a k p n e
B a c
ADC x 8 SRAM Flash Processor
Note
You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card. Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to this card.
Eight of the cards operate in the blue band with a spacing of 100 GHz in the ITU grid (1534.25 nm,
1535.04 nm, 1535.82 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1538.98 nm, 1539.77 nm, and 1540.56 nm). The other eight cards operate in the red band with a spacing of 100 GHz in the ITU grid (1550.12 nm,
1550.92 nm, 1551.72 nm, 1552.52 nm, 1554.13 nm, 1554.94 nm, 1555.75 nm, and 1556.55 nm).
You can install OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx cards in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. You can provision this card as part of an BLSR, path protection, or linear configuration or also as a regenerator for longer span reaches.
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx port features a laser on a specific wavelength in the
1550-nm range and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports 1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur.
The OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card detects SF, LOS, or LOF conditions on the optical facility.
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line BIP errors from B1 and B2 byte registers in the section and line overhead.
4.17.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-18 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card.
4-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.18 4.17.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-18
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.17.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.18 15454_MRC-12 Multirate Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.17 15454_MRC-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-41 . See
Table 4-2 on page 4-4 for optical card compatibility.
The 15454_MRC-12 multirate card provides up to twelve OC-3/STM-1 ports, twelve OC-12/STM-4 ports, or four OC-48/STM-16 ports using small form-factor pluggables (SFPs), in any combination of line rates. All ports are Telcordia GR-253 compliant. The SFP optics can use SR, IR, LR, coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM), and DWDM SFPs to support unrepeated spans. See the
“4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs” section on page 4-49 for more information about SFPs.
The ports operate at up to 2488.320 Mbps over a single-mode fiber. The 15454_MRC-12 card has twelve physical connector adapters with two fibers per connector adapter (Tx and Rx). The card supports VT payloads, STS-1 payloads, and concatenated payloads at STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c,
STS-24c, STS-36c, or STS-48c signal levels. It is fully interoperable with the ONS 15454 G-Series
Ethernet cards.
The 15454_MRC-12 port contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports 1+1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur. You can provision this card as part of an BLSR, path protection, or 1+1 linear configuration.
Note
Longer distances are possible in an amplified system using dispersion compensation.
Figure 4-21 shows the 15454_MRC-12 faceplate and block diagram.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-41
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.18 4.18.1 Slot Compatibility by Cross-Connect Card
Figure 4-21 15454_MRC-12 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
OC-3/12/48
(STM-1/4/16)
Port 1
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4/)
Port 2
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 3
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12/48
(STM-1/4/16)
Port 4
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 5
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 6
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12/48
(STM-1/4/16)
Port 7
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 8
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 9
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12/48
(STM-1/4/16)
Port 0
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 11
SFP Optical XCVR
OC-3/12
(STM-1/4)
Port 12
SFP Optical XCVR
Amazon
ASIC
Main SCL Intfc.
Protect SCL Intfc.
Main iBPIA
Protect iBPIA
Processor
Flash
Memory
B a c k p l a n e
4.18.1 Slot Compatibility by Cross-Connect Card
You can install 15454_MRC-12 cards in Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17 with an XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G.
Note
The 15454_MRC-12 card supports an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and TCC2/TCC2P cards.
4-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.18 4.18.2 Ports and Line Rates
The maximum bandwidth of the 15454_MRC-12 card is determined by the cross-connect card, as shown in
.
Table 4-19 Maximum Bandwidth by Shelf Slot for the 15454_MRC-12 in Different Cross-Connect
Configurations
XC Card Type
XCVT
XC10G/XC-VXC-10G
Maximum Bandwidth in Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17
Maximum Bandwidth in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13
OC-12
OC-48
OC-48
OC-192
4.18.2 Ports and Line Rates
Each port on the 15454_MRC-12 card can be configured as OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, or
OC-48/STM-16, depending on the available bandwidth and existing provisioned ports. Based on the cross-connect card and slot limitations shown in
, the following rules apply for various synchronous transport signal (STS) available bandwidths. (
shows the same information in tabular format.)
•
STS-12
–
–
Port 1 is the only port that is usable as an OC-12. If Port 1 is used as an OC-12, all other ports are disabled.
Ports 1, 4, 7, and 10 are the only ports usable as OC-3. If any of these ports is used as an OC-3,
Ports 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, and 12 are disabled.
•
•
STS-48
–
Port 1 is the only port usable as an OC-48. If Port 1 is used as an OC-48, all other ports are disabled.
–
–
Ports 1, 4, 7, and 10 are the only ports usable as OC-12.
If Port 4 is used as an OC-12, Ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
–
–
If Port 7 is used as an OC-12, Ports 5, 6, and 8 are disabled.
If Port 10 is used as an OC-12, Ports 9, 11, and 12 are disabled.
–
Any port can be used as an OC-3 as long as all of the above rules are followed.
STS-192
–
–
Ports 1, 4, 7, and 10 are the only ports usable as OC-48.
If Port 4 is used as an OC-48, Ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
–
–
If Port 7 is used as an OC-48, Ports 5, 6, and 8 are disabled.
If Port 10 is used as an OC-48, Ports 9, 11, and 12 are disabled.
–
–
If Port 4 is used as an OC-12, Ports 2 and 3 can be used as an OC-12 or OC-3.
If Port 7 is used as an OC-12, Ports 5, 6, and 8 can be used as an OC-12 or OC-3.
–
–
If Port 10 is as used as an OC-12, Ports 9, 11, and 12 can be used as an OC-12 or OC-3.
If Port 4 is used as an OC-3, Ports 2 and 3 can be used as an OC-3 or OC-12.
–
If Port 7 is used as an OC-3, Ports 5, 6, and 8 can be used as an OC-3 or OC-12.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-43
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.18 4.18.2 Ports and Line Rates
–
If Port 10 is used as an OC-3, Ports 9, 11, and 12 can be used as an OC-3 or OC-12.
–
Any port can be used as an OC-12 or OC-3, as long as all of the above rules are followed.
Table 4-20 shows the 15454_MRC-12 port availability and line rate for each port, based on total
available bandwidth. To use the table, go to the rows for the bandwidth that you have available, as determined in
. Each row indicates what line rate can be provisioned for each port (identified in the MCR-12 Port Number row). The Ports Used column shows the total number of ports that can be used with each bandwidth scheme.
Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC-12 Port, Based on Available Bandwidth Table 4-20
MRC-12 Port
Number
Permitted
Rate(s)
STS-12
Available
Bandwidth
1
OC-3
OC-1
2
OC-4
8
12
3
2
OC-3
OC-1
2
—
—
STS-48
Available
Bandwidth
3
3
3
3
—
—
12
12
12
3
3
12
12
12
3
48
48
3
—
3
3
3
—
3
—
3
—
—
3
OC-3
OC-1
2
4 5
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
OC-3
OC-1
2
—
—
3
—
—
—
3
—
—
—
3
3
3
3
—
3
—
3
—
—
3
—
—
3
3
12
3
12
3
12
12
3
12
12
—
—
12
3
3
—
—
—
3
3
—
3
3
—
—
—
12
3
3
—
—
—
3
3
—
3
3
—
6
OC-3
OC-1
2
7 8
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
OC-3
OC-1
2
—
—
—
3
—
—
12
—
12
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
3
3
12
—
—
12
3
3
—
—
—
3
3
—
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
3
—
3
—
—
3
3
—
3
3
3
3
9
OC-3
OC-1
2
10
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
11
OC-3
OC-1
2
12
OC-3
OC-1
2
Ports
Used
Total
STSs
— —
—
3
3
3
3
12
3
3
3
12
3
12
12
12
—
3
—
—
3
3
3
—
3
3
3
—
3
—
—
—
—
3
—
—
3
3
3
—
3
3
3
—
3
—
—
—
—
3
1
4
12
12
6
1
11
4
9
9
9
4
12
10
7
12
10
7
48
45
45
36
36
48
114
39
45
48
48
36
39
39
4-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.18 4.18.3 15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators
Table 4-20 Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC-12 Port, Based on Available Bandwidth (continued)
3
3
12
12
3
12
12
12
3
—
—
—
—
—
3
3
—
—
—
2
3
12
12
12
3
MRC-12 Port
Number 1
STS-192
Available
Bandwidth
(when installing additional
SFPs from the top port to the bottom port)
1
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
STS-192
Available
Bandwidth
(when installing additional
SFPs from the bottom port to the
3
3
12
12
48
48
48
3
12
3
12
12
3
3
12
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
12
3
—
—
4
3
12
12
12
3
3
48
48
48
48
48
48
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
12
3
48
48
5
3
3
12
3
3
12
12
12
12
—
—
—
3
12
12
12
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
3
3
12
3
3
12
12
12
12
—
—
—
3
12
12
12
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
3
3
12
3
3
12
12
12
12
48
48
48
3
12
12
12
3
3
48
48
48
48
48
48
8
3
3
12
3
3
12
12
12
12
—
—
—
3
12
12
12
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
9
3
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
3
12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
3
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
3
12
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
11
3
3
3
12
12
12
3
3
12
3
12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1.
If the MRC-12 card is initially populated with OC-3/12 on all its 12 ports, you can later add OC-48 SFPs on that card from top port to bottom port or from bottom port to top port. The maximum available bandwidth usage is different for these two cases.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
12
—
—
12
3
3
12
12
3
3
3
12
12
9
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
6
4
4
7
7
4
9
12
10
10
10
12
12
12
Ports
Used
Total
STSs
12
12
81
108
144
180
153
156
192
192
72
117
120
156
192
81
108
135
144
108
135
144
108
117
147
156
4.18.3 15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the 15454_MRC-12 card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-45
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.19 4.18.4 15454_MRC-12 Port-Level Indicators
Table 4-21
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.18.4 15454_MRC-12 Port-Level Indicators
Each port has an Rx indicator. The LED flashes green if the port is receiving a signal, and it flashes red if the port is not receiving a signal.
You can also find the status of the 15454_MRC-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any
Reach Cards
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.6.18 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach Card Specifications” section on page A-42
and the
“A.6.19 OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Specifications” section on page A-43 . See
for optical card compatibility.
The OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards each provide a single
OC-192/STM-64 interface, as follows:
•
•
OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach card (SR-1)
OC192/STM-64 Any Reach card (SR-1, IR-2, and LR-2)
In CTC, these cards are referred to as “OC192-XFP” cards.
The interface operates at 9.952 Gbps over single-mode fiber spans and can be provisioned for both concatenated and nonconcatenated payloads on a per STS-1/VC-4 basis. Specification references can be found for the OC-192/STM-64 interface in ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.693, and ITU-T G.959.1, and
Telcordia GR-253.
The optical interface uses a 10-Gbps form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical transceiver that plugs into a receptacle on the front of the card. The OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach card is used only with an
SR-1 XFP, while the OC192/STM-64 Any Reach card can be provisioned for use with an SR-1, IR-2, or
4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.19 4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards
LR-2 XFP module. The XFP SR, IR, and LR interfaces each provide one bidirectional OC192/STM64 interface compliant with the recommendations defined by ITU-T G.91. SR-1 is compliant with ITU-T
I-64.1, IR-2 is compliant with ITU G.691 S-64.2b, and LR-2 is compliant with ITU G.959.1 P1L1-2D2.
The cards are used only in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13. and only with 10-Gbps cross-connect cards, such as the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G.
Note
The OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards support an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and
TCC2/TCC2P cards.
Figure 4-22 shows the faceplates and block diagram for the two cards.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-47
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.19 4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards
Figure 4-22 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Faceplates and
Block Diagram
OC192
STM64
ANY
REACH
OC192SR1
STM64IO
SHORT
REACH
XFP
OC-192
Main
IBPIA
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
I2C
Mux
FLASH
Transport OH
Processor and Backplane I/F
Protect
IBPIA a n p l e c k
B a
T x
1
R x
T x
1
R x DDR
SDRAM
Serial
EEPROM uP
ID
The cards’ spans depend on the XFP module that is used:
•
A card using the SR-1 XFP is intended to be used in applications requiring 10-Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 2.0 km.
•
•
A card using the IR-2 XFP is intended to be used in applications requiring 10-Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 40 km.
A card using the LR-2 XFP is intended to be used in applications requiring 10-Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 80 km.
4-48
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.20 4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators
4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach
Card-Level Indicators
describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and
OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards.
Table 4-22
Card-Level LED
Red FAIL LED
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Amber SF LED
OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode or is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.
4.19.2 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC-192/STM-64 Any Reach
Port-Level Indicators
You can find the status of the OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs
The ONS 15454 optical cards use industry-standard SFPs and XFP modular receptacles.
Currently, the only optical cards that use SFPs and XFPs are the 15454_MRC-12, OC192SR1/STM64IO
Short Reach, and OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards.
For all optical cards, the type of SFP or XFP plugged into the card is displayed in CTC and TL1. Cisco offers SFPs and XFPs as separate orderable products.
4.20.1 Compatibility by Card
lists Cisco ONS 15454 optical cards and their compatible SFPs and XFPs.
Caution
Only use SFPs and XFPs certified for use in Cisco Optical Networking Systems (ONSs). The qualified
Cisco SFP and XFP pluggable module’s top assembly numbers (TANs) are provided in
.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-49
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.20 4.20.2 SFP Description
Table 4-23 SFP and XFP Card Compatibility
Card
15454_MRC-12
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
Compatible SFPs and XFPs
(Cisco Product ID)
ONS-SI-2G-S1
ONS-SI-2G-I1
ONS-SI-2G-L1
ONS-SI-2G-L2
ONS-SC-2G-30.3 through
ONS-SC-2G-60.6
ONS-SI-622-I1
ONS-SI-622-L1
ONS-SI-622-L2
ONS-SE-622-1470 through
ONS-SE-622-1610
ONS-SI-155-I1
ONS-SI-155-L1
ONS-SI-155-L2
ONS_SE-155-1470 through
ONS-SE-155-1610
Cisco Top Assembly Number
(TAN)
1
10-1992-01
10-1993-01
10-2102-01
10-1990-01
10-2155-01 through
10-2186-01
10-1956-01
10-1958-01
10-1936-01
10-2004-01 through
10-2011-01
10-1938-01
10-1957-01
10-1937-01
10-1996-01 through
10-2003-01
ONS-XC-10G-S1 10-2012-01 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
2
OC192/STM64 Any Reach
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
10-2012-01
10-2193-01
10-2194-01
1.
The TAN indicated for the pluggables are backward compatible. For example, TAN 10-2307-02 is compatible with
10-2307-01.
2.
This card is designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
4.20.2 SFP Description
SFPs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the modules. There is no correlation between the type of latch to the model type (such as SX or LX/LH) or technology type (such as Gigabit Ethernet).
See the label on the SFP for technology type and model. Three latch types are available: mylar
(
), actuator/button (
Figure 4-24 ), and bail clasp ( Figure 4-25 ).
Figure 4-23 Mylar Tab SFP
4-50
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
Figure 4-24 Actuator/Button SFP
4.20 4.20.3 XFP Description
Figure 4-25 Bail Clasp SFP
SFP dimensions are:
•
Height 0.03 in. (8.5 mm)
•
•
Width 0.53 in. (13.4 mm)
Depth 2.22 in. (56.5 mm)
SFP temperature ranges are:
•
COM—Commercial operating temperature range: 23 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit (–5 to 70 degrees
Celsius)
•
•
EXT—Extended operating temperature range: 23 to185 degrees Fahrenheit (–5to 85 degrees
Celsius)
IND—Industrial operating temperature range: –40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 85 degrees
Celsius)
4.20.3 XFP Description
The 10-Gbps 1310-nm and 1550-nm XFP transceivers are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links at the following signaling rates: 9.95 Gbps, 10.31 Gbps, and 10.51 Gbps. The
XFP integrates the receiver and transmit path. The transmit side recovers and retimes the 10-Gbps serial data and passes it to a laser driver. The laser driver biases and modulates a 1310-nm or 1550-nm distributed feedback (DFB) laser, enabling data transmission over single-mode fiber (SMF) through an
LC connector. The receive side recovers and retimes the 10-Gbps optical data stream from a positive-intrinsic-negative (PIN) photodetector, transimpedance amplifier and passes it to an output driver.
The XFP module uses the bail clasp latching mechanism, shown unlatched in
and latched in
Figure 4-27 . See the label on the XFP for technology type and model.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
4-51
Chapter 4 Optical Cards
4.20 4.20.4 PPM Provisioning
Figure 4-26 Bail Clasp XFP (Unlatched)
Figure 4-27 Bail Clasp XFP (Latched)
XFP dimensions are:
•
Height 0.33 in. (8.5 mm)
•
•
Width 0.72 in. (18.3 mm)
Depth 3.1 in. (78 mm)
XFP temperature ranges are:
•
COM—Commercial operating temperature range: 23 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit (–5 to 70 degrees
Celsius)
•
•
EXT—Extended operating temperature range: 23 to185 degrees Fahrenheit (–5to 85 degrees
Celsius)
IND—Industrial operating temperature range: –40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 85 degrees
Celsius)
4.20.4 PPM Provisioning
SFPs and XFPs are known as pluggable-port modules (PPMs) in the CTC. Multirate PPMs for the
15454_MRC-12 card can be provisioned for different line rates in CTC. For more information about provisioning PPMs, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
4-52
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
5
Ethernet Cards
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
The Cisco ONS 15454 integrates Ethernet into a SONET platform through the use of Ethernet cards.
This chapter describes the E-Series, G-Series, ML-Series, and CE-Series Ethernet cards. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. For ML-Series configuration information, refer to the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Chapter topics include:
•
5.1 Ethernet Card Overview, page 5-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.11 CE-100T-8 Card, page 5-25
5.12 CE-1000-4 Card, page 5-28
5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs, page 5-31
5.1 Ethernet Card Overview
The card overview section summarizes the Ethernet card functions and provides the software compatibility for each card.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 5-1
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.1 5.1.1 Ethernet Cards
Note
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide for a list of slots and symbols.
5.1.1 Ethernet Cards
Table 5-1 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 Ethernet cards.
Table 5-1 Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454
Card Port Description
E100T-12 The E100T-12 card provides 12 switched, autosensing,
10/100BaseT Ethernet ports and is compatible with the
XCVT card.
E100T-G The E100T-G card provides 12 switched, autosensing,
10/100BaseT Ethernet ports and is compatible with the
XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
For Additional Information...
See the
“5.2 E100T-12 Card” section on page 5-3
.
See the
“5.3 E100T-G Card” section on page 5-6
.
E1000-2 The E1000-2 card provides two IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. Gigabit Interface Converters
(GBICs) are separate.
E1000-2-G The E1000-2-G card provides two IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. GBICs are separate. The E1000-2-G card is compatible with the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
G1000-4 The G1000-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. GBICs are separate. The G1000-4 requires the XC10G card.
See the
“5.4 E1000-2 Card” section on page 5-8
.
See the
“5.5 E1000-2-G Card” section on page 5-11
.
See the
“5.6 G1000-4 Card” section on page 5-14
G1K-4 The G1K-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. GBICs are separate. The G1K-4 card is functionally identical to the G1000-4 card, but can operate with XCVT, XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards.
M100T-12 The ML100T-12 card provides 12 switched, autosensing, 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports.
See the
“5.7 G1K-4 Card” section on page 5-16
.
See the
M100X-8 The ML100X-8 card provides eight switched,
100BaseFX Ethernet ports.
M1000-2 The ML1000-2 card provides two IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) connectors are separate.
See the
“5.9 ML100X-8 Card” section on page 5-21
.
See the
5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.2 5.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 5-1 Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued)
Card Port Description
CE-100T-8 The CE-100T-8 card provides eight IEEE-compliant,
10/100-Mbps ports. The CE-100T-8 can operate with the XC10G, XC-VXC-10G, or XCVT cross-connect cards.
CE-1000-4 The CE-1000-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant,
1000-Mbps ports. The CE-1000-4 card can operate with the XC10G, XC-VXC-10G, or XCVT cross-connect cards.
For Additional Information...
See the
.
See the
.
5.1.2 Card Compatibility
lists the CTC software compatibility for each Ethernet card.
Note
"Yes" indicates that this card is fully or partially supported by the indicated software release. Refer to the individual card reference section for more information about software limitations for this card.
Table 5-2 Ethernet Card Software Compatibility
Ethernet
Cards
E100T-12
E1000-2
E100T-G
E1000-2-G
G1000-4
G1K-4
ML100T-12
ML100X-8
ML1000-2
CE-100T-8
CE-1000-4
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1
R3.1
R3.2
R3.3 R3.4
R4.0
R4.1
R4.5
R4.6
R4.7
R5.0
R6.0
R7.0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes — Yes — Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes —
Yes —
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— —
— —
— —
— —
—
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
—
— —
Yes —
—
—
—
—
— Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
— — Yes
5.2 E100T-12 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.1 E100T-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-44 .
The ONS 15454 uses E100T-12 cards for Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps). Each card provides 12 switched, IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports that can independently detect the speed of an attached device (autosense) and automatically connect at the appropriate speed. The ports
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 5-3
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.2 5.2 E100T-12 Card
autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and determine whether to enable or disable flow control. You can also configure Ethernet ports manually.
shows the faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Figure 5-1 E100T-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
E100T
12
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
FAIL
ACT
SF
10/100
PHYS
A/D Mux
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Flash DRAM CPU
FPGA BTC l a n e c k p
B a
Buffer memory
Control memory
The E100T-12 Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of Ethernet traffic across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self-healing protection services. This Ethernet capability enables network operators to provide multiple
10/100-Mbps access drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects, Internet traffic, and cable modem traffic aggregation. It enables the efficient transport and co-existence of traditional time-division multiplexing (TDM) traffic with packet-switched data traffic.
Each E100T-12 card supports standards-based, wire-speed, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its
Ethernet interfaces. The IEEE 802.1Q tag logically isolates traffic (typically subscribers). IEEE 802.1Q also supports multiple classes of service.
5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.2 5.2.1 Slot Compatibility
5.2.1 Slot Compatibility
You can install the E100T-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act independently or as a single Ethernet switch. You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The E100T-12 supports STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, and
STS-12c circuit sizes.
Note
When making an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as single-card
EtherSwitch.
5.2.2 E100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
The E100T-12 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
Table 5-3
SF LED
E100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the E100T-12 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E100T-12. If the
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the E100T-12 card is active and the software is operational.
Not used.
5.2.3 E100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
The E100T-12 card has 12 pairs of LEDs (one pair for each port) to indicate port conditions.
lists the port-level indicators. You can find the status of the E100T-12 card port using the LCD on the
ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
Table 5-4
LED State
Amber
Solid green
Off
E100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
Description
The port is active (transmitting and receiving data).
The link is established.
The connection is inactive, or traffic is unidirectional.
5.2.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
The E100T-12 card is compatible with the XCVT card. Do not use the E100T-12 card with the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-5
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.3 5.3 E100T-G Card
5.3 E100T-G Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.2 E100T-G Card Specifications” section on page A-44 .
The ONS 15454 uses E100T-G cards for Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps). Each card provides 12 switched, IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports that can independently detect the speed of an attached device (autosense) and automatically connect at the appropriate speed. The ports autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and determine whether to enable or disable flow control. You can also configure Ethernet ports manually.
shows the faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Figure 5-2 E100T-G Faceplate and Block Diagram
E100T-G
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
FAIL
ACT
SF
10/100
PHYS
A/D Mux
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Flash DRAM CPU
FPGA BTC k p l
B a c a n e
Buffer memory
Control memory
The E100T-G Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of Ethernet traffic across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self-healing protection services. This Ethernet capability enables network operators to provide multiple 10/100 Mbps access drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects, Internet traffic, and cable modem traffic aggregation. It enables the efficient transport and co-existence of traditional TDM traffic with packet-switched data traffic.
5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.3 5.3.1 Slot Compatibility
Each E100T-G card supports standards-based, wire-speed, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its
Ethernet interfaces. The IEEE 802.1Q tag logically isolates traffic (typically subscribers). IEEE 802.1Q also supports multiple classes of service.
Note
When making an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as single-card
EtherSwitch.
5.3.1 Slot Compatibility
You can install the E100T-G card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act independently or as a single Ethernet switch. You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning a number of STS channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454.
Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The ONS 15454 supports STS-1,
STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c circuit sizes.
5.3.2 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators
The E100T-G card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-5
SF LED
E100T-G Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the E100T-G card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E100T-G. If the
ACT LED is green it indicates that the E100T-G card is active and the software is operational.
Not used.
5.3.3 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators
The E100T-G card has 12 pairs of LEDs (one pair for each port) to indicate port conditions (
).
You can find the status of the E100T-G card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-7
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.4 5.3.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
Table 5-6
LED State
Yellow (Active)
E100T-G Port-Level Indicators
Solid Green (Link)
Description
Port is active (transmitting or receiving data). By default, indicates the transmitter is active but can be software controlled to indicate link status, duplex status, or receiver active.
Link is established. By default, indicates the link for this port is up, but can be software controlled to indicate duplex status, operating speed, or collision.
5.3.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
The E100T-G card is compatible with the XCVT, XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
5.4 E1000-2 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.3 E1000-2 Card Specifications” section on page A-44
.
The ONS 15454 uses E1000-2 cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The E1000-2 card provides two
IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps ports for high-capacity customer LAN interconnections. Each port supports full-duplex operation.
The E1000-2 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the
“5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31 .
Figure 5-3 shows the card faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
Figure 5-3
E1000
2
E1000-2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
1
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
2
TX
ACT/LINK
Gigabit Ethernet
PHYS
A/D Mux
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Flash DRAM CPU
FPGA BTC p l a n e
B a c k
Buffer memory
Control memory
5.4 5.4 E1000-2 Card
78-17191-01
The E1000-2 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of Ethernet traffic across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self-healing protection services. This enables network operators to provide multiple 1000-Mbps access drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects. It enables efficient transport and co-existence of traditional TDM traffic with packet-switched data traffic.
Each E1000-2 card supports standards-based, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its Ethernet interfaces and SONET interfaces on the ONS 15454. The IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag logically isolates traffic
(typically subscribers).
Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act together as a single switching entity or as independent single switches supporting a variety of SONET port configurations.
You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the packet switch entity within the
ONS 15454. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The ONS 15454 supports STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c circuit sizes.
Note
When making an STS-12c circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as single-card EtherSwitch.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-9
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.4 5.4.1 Slot Compatibility
5.4.1 Slot Compatibility
You can install the E1000-2 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The E1000-2 is compatible with the XCVT card but not the XC10G or and XC-VXC-10G cards. The E1000-2-G is compatible with the XC10G and
XC-VXC-10G.
5.4.2 E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
The E1000-2 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
Table 5-7
SF LED
E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the E1000-2 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E1000-2. When the ACT LED is green it indicates that the E1000-2 card is active and the software is operational.
Not used.
5.4.3 E1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
The E1000-2 card has one bicolor LED per port (
Table 5-8 ). When the LED is solid green, it indicates
that carrier is detected, meaning an active network cable is installed. When the LED is off, it indicates that an active network cable is not plugged into the port, or the card is carrying unidirectional traffic.
When the LED flashes amber, it does so at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Table 5-8
LED State
Amber
Solid green
Off
E1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
Description
The port is active (transmitting and receiving data).
The link is established.
The connection is inactive, or traffic is unidirectional.
5.4.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility
The E1000-2 is compatible with XCVT cards. The XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards require the
E1000-2-G card.
5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.5 5.5 E1000-2-G Card
5.5 E1000-2-G Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.4 E1000-2-G Card Specifications” section on page A-45
.
The ONS 15454 uses E1000-2-G cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The E1000-2-G card provides two IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps ports for high-capacity customer LAN interconnections. Each port supports full-duplex operation.
The E1000-2-G card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the
“5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31
.
Figure 5-4 shows the card faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-11
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.5 5.5 E1000-2-G Card
Figure 5-4
E1000-2-G
E1000-2-G Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
1
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
2
TX
ACT/LINK
Gigabit Ethernet
PHYS
A/D Mux
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Flash DRAM CPU
FPGA BTC a n p l e c k
B a
Buffer memory
Control memory
The E1000-2-G Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency packet switching of
Ethernet traffic across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self-healing protection services. This enables network operators to provide multiple 1000-Mbps access drops for high-capacity customer LAN interconnects. It enables efficient transport and co-existence of traditional TDM traffic with packet-switched data traffic.
Each E1000-2-G card supports standards-based, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its Ethernet interfaces and SONET interfaces on the ONS 15454. The IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag logically isolates traffic (typically subscribers).
Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act together as a single switching entity or as independent single switches supporting a variety of SONET port configurations.
5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.5 5.5.1 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators
You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the packet switch entity within the
ONS 15454. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The ONS 15454 supports STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c circuit sizes.
Note
When making an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as a single-card
EtherSwitch.
5.5.1 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators
The E1000-2-G card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-9 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
SF LED
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the E1000-2-G card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the E1000-2-G. If the
ACT LED is green it indicates that the E1000-2-G card is active and the software is operational.
The SF LED is not used in the current release.
5.5.2 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators
The E1000-2-G card has one bicolor LED per port (
). When the green LINK LED is on, carrier is detected, meaning an active network cable is installed. When the green LINK LED is off, an active network cable is not plugged into the port, or the card is carrying unidirectional traffic. The amber port
ACT LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Table 5-10 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators
LED State
Amber
Solid green
Off
Description
The port is active (transmitting and receiving data).
The link is established.
The connection is inactive, or traffic is unidirectional.
5.5.3 Cross-Connect Compatibility
The E1000-2-G is compatible with the XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cards. You can install the card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-13
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.6 5.6 G1000-4 Card
5.6 G1000-4 Card
The G1000-4 card requires the XC10G card. The ONS 15454 uses G1000-4 cards for Gigabit Ethernet
(1000 Mbps). The G1000-4 card provides four ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each port supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of OC-48 on each card.
The G1000-4 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the
“5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31 .
Note
Any new features that are available as part of this software release are not enabled for this card.
Figure 5-5 shows the card faceplate and the block diagram of the card.
Figure 5-5
G1000
4
G1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
3
TX
RX
ACT/LINK
4
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
1
RX
2
TX
ACT/LINK
Flash DRAM CPU
Decode
PLD
To FPGA, BTC,
MACs
GBICs
Power
Transceivers
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Mux/
Demux
FPGA
Interface
FPGA
POS
Function
BTC
Protect/
Main
Rx/Tx
BPIAs a n p l e c k
B a
Clock
Generation
Buffer memory
The G1000-4 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low latency transport of Ethernet encapsulated traffic (IP and other Layer 2 or Layer 3 protocols) across a SONET network. Carrier-class
Ethernet transport is achieved by hitless (< 50 ms) performance in the event of any failures or protection
5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.6 5.6.1 STS-24c Restriction
switches (such as 1+1 automatic protection switching [APS], path protection, or bidirectional line switch ring [BLSR]). Full provisioning support is possible through Cisco Transport Controller (CTC),
Transaction Language One (TL1), or Cisco Transport Manager (CTM).
The circuit sizes supported are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-48c.
5.6.1 STS-24c Restriction
Due to hardware constraints, the card imposes an additional restriction on the combinations of circuits that can be dropped onto a G-Series card. These restrictions are transparently enforced by the
ONS 15454, and you do not need to keep track of restricted circuit combinations.
When a single STS-24c terminates on a card, the remaining circuits on that card can be another single
STS-24c or any combination of circuits of STS-12c size or less that add up to no more than 12 STSs (that is a total of 36 STSs on the card).
If STS-24c circuits are not being dropped on the card, the full 48 STSs bandwidth can be used with no restrictions (for example, using either a single STS-48c or 4 STS-12c circuits).
Note
The STS-24c restriction only applies when a single STS-24c circuit is dropped; therefore, you can easily minimize the impact of this restriction. Group the STS-24c circuits together on a card separate from circuits of other sizes. The grouped circuits can be dropped on other G-Series cards on the ONS 15454.
5.6.2 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
The G1000-4 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-11 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
FAIL LED (red)
ACT LED (green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the G1000-4 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on, and it turns off if the software is deemed operational.
The red FAIL LED blinks when the card is loading software.
A green ACT LED provides the operational status of the G1000-4. If the
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the G1000-4 card is active and the software is operational.
5.6.3 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
The G1000-4 card has one bicolor LED per port.
Table 5-12 describes the status that each color
represents.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-15
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.7 5.6.4 Slot Compatibility
Table 5-12
Solid green
Flashing green
G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level LED Status
Off
Steady amber
Description
No link exists to the Ethernet port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example, an unconfigured circuit, an error on line, or a nonenabled port might inhibit traffic flow.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The LED flash rate reflects the traffic rate for the port.
5.6.4 Slot Compatibility
The G1000-4 card requires Cisco ONS 15454 Release 3.2 or later system software and the XC10G cross-connect card. You can install the card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, for a total shelf capacity of
48 Gigabit Ethernet ports. The practical G1000-4 port per shelf limit is 40, because at least two slots are typically filled by OC-N trunk cards such as the OC-192.
5.7 G1K-4 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.7 G1K-4 Card Specifications” section on page A-46 .
The G1K-4 card is the functional equivalent of the earlier G1000-4 card and provides four ports of
IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each interface supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps bidirectional per port, and 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps bidirectional per card.
Each port autonegotiates for full duplex and IEEE 802.3x flow control. The G1K-4 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the
“5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31 .
Figure 5-6 shows the card faceplate and the block diagram of the card.
5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
Figure 5-6
G1K
G1K-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
5.7 5.7.1 STS-24c Restriction
FAIL
ACT
RX
3
TX
ACT/LINK
TX
RX
ACT/LINK
4
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
1
RX
2
TX
ACT/LINK
Flash DRAM CPU
Decode
PLD
To FPGA, BTC,
MACs
GBICs
Transceivers
Ethernet
MACs/switch
Mux/
Demux
FPGA
Interface
FPGA
POS function
BTC
Protect/
Main
Rx/Tx
BPIAs c k
B a p l a n e
Power
Clock generation
Buffer memory
The G1K-4 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high-throughput, low-latency transport of Ethernet encapsulated traffic (IP and other Layer 2 or Layer 3 protocols) across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self-healing protection services. Carrier-class
Ethernet transport is achieved by hitless (< 50 ms) performance in the event of any failures or protection switches (such as 1+1 APS, path protection, BLSR, or optical equipment protection) and by full provisioning and manageability, as in SONET service. Full provisioning support is possible through
CTC or CTM. Each G1K-4 card performs independently of the other cards in the same shelf.
5.7.1 STS-24c Restriction
Due to hardware constraints, the card imposes an additional restriction on the combinations of circuits that can be dropped onto a G-Series card. These restrictions are transparently enforced by the
ONS 15454, and you do not need to keep track of restricted circuit combinations.
When a single STS-24c terminates on a card, the remaining circuits on that card can be another single
STS-24c or any combination of circuits of STS-12c size or less that add up to no more than 12 STSs (that is a total of 36 STSs on the card).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-17
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.7 5.7.2 G1K-4 Compatibility
If STS-24c circuits are not being dropped on the card, the full 48 STSs bandwidth can be used with no restrictions (for example, using either a single STS-48c or 4 STS-12c circuits).
Note
The STS-24c restriction only applies when a single STS-24c circuit is dropped; therefore, you can easily minimize the impact of this restriction. Group the STS-24c circuits together on a card separate from circuits of other sizes. The grouped circuits can be dropped on other G-Series cards on the ONS 15454.
5.7.2 G1K-4 Compatibility
The G1K-4 card operates with the XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards. With the XC10G or
XC-VXC-10G cards, you can install the G1K-4 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17, for a total shelf capacity of 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports. (The practical limit is 40 ports because at least two slots are typically populated by optical cards such as OC-192). When used with the XCVT cards, the G1K-4 is limited to
Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13.
5.7.3 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators
The G1K-4 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-13 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the G1K-4 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on, and it goes off when the software is deemed operational.
The red FAIL LED blinks when the card is loading software.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the G1K-4. If the
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the G1K-4 card is active and the software is operational.
5.7.4 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators
The G1K-4 card has four bicolor LEDs (one LED per port).
Table 5-14 describes the status that each
color represents.
Table 5-14 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level LED Status
Off
Steady amber
Description
No link exists to the Ethernet port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example, a lack of circuit setup, an error on the line, or a nonenabled port might inhibit traffic flow.
5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.8 5.8 ML100T-12 Card
Table 5-14 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators (continued)
Port-Level LED Status
Solid green
Flashing green
Description
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The LED flash rate reflects the traffic rate for the port.
5.8 ML100T-12 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.8 ML100T-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-46 .
The ML100T-12 card provides 12 ports of IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100 interfaces. Each interface supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 200 Mbps per port and 2.488 Gbps per card.
Each port independently detects the speed of an attached device (autosenses) and automatically connects at the appropriate speed. The ports autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and can determine whether to enable or disable flow control. For ML-Series configuration information, see the
Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454
SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
Figure 5-7 shows the card faceplate and block diagram.
Caution
Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for inter-building applications.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-19
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.8 5.8.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 5-7
ML100T
12
ML100T-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram
2
3
4
0
1
5
6
9
10
7
8
11
ACT
FAIL
Packet
Buffer
6MB
Packet
Buffer
6MB
Packet
Buffer
4MB
BPIA
Main
Rx
SMII
4
2
12 x
RJ45
2
4xMag.
4
2
4xMag.
2
Octal
PHY
6
6
4
4xMag.
4
Octal
PHY
RGGI RGGI
BPIA
Protect
Rx port
0 port
1 port
1 port
0 port
2 port
3 port
A
DOS
FPGA port
B
SCL
BTC192
BPIA
Main
Tx
BPIA
Protect
Tx
Control Mem
2MB ch0-1 ch4-5
Control Mem
2MB
Result Mem
2MB
Processor
Daughter Card
128MB SDRAM
16MB FLASH
8KB NVRAM p l a n e
B a c k
The card features two virtual packet over SONET (POS) ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of
STS-48. The ports function in a manner similar to OC-N card ports, and each port carries an STS circuit with a size of STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, or STS-24c. To configure an ML-Series card
SONET STS circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
The ML-Series POS ports supports virtual concatenation (VCAT) of SONET circuits and a software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). The ML-Series card supports a maximum of two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports. Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members. An ML-Series card supports STS-1c-2v, STS-3c-2v and STS-12c-2v. To configure an ML-Series card SONET VCAT circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
5.8.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
The ML00T-12 card supports two card-level LED indicators. The card-level indicators are described in
5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.9 5.8.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
Table 5-15 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100T-12 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML100T-12. If the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the ML100T-12 card is active and the software is operational.
5.8.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
The ML100T-12 card provides a pair of LEDs for each Fast Ethernet port: an amber LED for activity
(ACT) and a green LED for LINK. The port-level indicators are described in
.
Table 5-16 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level Indicators
ACT LED (Amber)
LINK LED (Green)
Both ACT and LINK LED
Description
A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected, but there is an issue inhibiting traffic. A blinking amber LED means traffic is flowing.
A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic. A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.
5.8.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
The ML100T-12 card works in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 with the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card. It works only in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XCVT card.
5.9 ML100X-8 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.10 ML100X-8 Card Specifications” section on page A-47 .
The ML100X-8 card provides eight ports with 100 base FX interfaces. The FX interfaces support one of two connectors, an LX SFP or an FX SFP. The LX SFP is a 100 Mbps 802.3-compliant SFP that operates over a pair of single-mode optical fibers and includes LC connectors. The FX SFP is a 100 Mbps 802.3- compliant SFP that operates over a pair of multimode optical fibers and includes LC connectors. For
more information on SFPs, see the “5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31 .
Each interface supports full-duplex operation for autonegotiation and a maximum bandwidth of 200
Mbps per port and 2.488 Gbps per card. For ML-Series configuration information, see the Ethernet Card
Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco
ONS 15327.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-21
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.9 5.9 ML100X-8 Card
shows the card faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 5-8 ML100X-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram
ML 100X-
8
FAIL
ACT
Tx
4
Rx
Tx
5
Rx
Tx
6
Rx
Tx
7
Rx
Tx
2
Rx
Tx
3
Rx
Tx
0
Rx
Tx
1
Rx
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
Packet
Memory
PHY
Network
Processor
Unit
SONET
Framer p l a n e
B a c k
TCAM
The card features two virtual packet over SONET (POS) ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of
STS-48. The ports function in a manner similar to OC-N card ports, and each port carries an STS circuit with a size of STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, or STS-24c. To configure an ML-Series card
SONET STS circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide.
The ML-Series POS ports supports virtual concatenation (VCAT) of SONET circuits and a software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). The ML-Series cards support a maximum of two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports. Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members. An ML-Series card supports STS-1c-2v, STS-3c-2v and STS-12c-2v. To configure an ML-Series-card SONET VCAT circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
5-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.10 5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators
5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators
The ML100X-8 card supports two card-level LED indicators.
describes the card-level indicators.
Table 5-17 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100-FX card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML100-FX. If the
ACT LED is green, it indicates that the ML100-FX card is active and the software is operational.
5.9.2 ML100X-8 Port-Level Indicators
The ML100X-8 card provides a pair of LEDs for each Fast Ethernet port: an amber LED for activity
(ACT) and a green LED for LINK.
describes the port-level indicators.
Table 5-18 ML100X-8 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level Indicators
ACT LED (Amber)
LINK LED (Green)
Both ACT and LINK LED
Description
A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected, but there is an issue inhibiting traffic. A blinking amber LED means traffic is flowing.
A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic. A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.
5.9.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
The ML100X-8 card operates in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 with the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards. It operates only in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XCVT card.
5.10 ML1000-2 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.9 ML1000-2 Card Specifications” section on page A-46 .
The ML1000-2 card provides two ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each interface supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 2 Gbps per port and 4 Gbps per card. Each port autoconfigures for full duplex and IEEE 802.3x flow control.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-23
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.10 5.10 ML1000-2 Card
SFP modules are offered as separate orderable products for maximum customer flexibility. For details, see the
“5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31
.
shows the ML1000-2 card faceplate.
Figure 5-9 ML1000-2 Faceplate
ML100T
12
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
9
10
11
7
8
ACT
FAIL
Packet
Buffer
512Kx96
Packet
Buffer
512Kx96
SSRAM
2x512Kx36
Panel Port 0
SFP
GBIC
Module
Panel Port 1
SFP
GBIC
Module
Serdes
GMII port
0 port
3
RGGI port
1 port
2
RGGI port
A
MAC 1 MAC 2
Serdes
GMII port
1 port
2
RGGI port
0 port
3
RGGI port
B
DOS
FPGA
BTC192
Control Mem
512Kx32 ch0-1 ch4-5
Control Mem
512Kx32
BPIA
Main
Rx
BPIA
Protect
Rx
BPIA
Main
Tx
BPIA
Protect
Tx
Result Mem
512Kx32
Processor
Daughter Card
(FLASHs,
SDRAMs) p l a n e
B a c k
The card features two virtual packet over SONET (POS) ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of
STS-48. The ports function in a manner similar to OC-N card ports, and each port carries an STS circuit with a size of STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, or STS-24c. To configure an ML-Series card
SONET STS circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide.
The ML-Series POS ports supports VCAT of SONET circuits and a software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). The ML-Series card supports a maximum of two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports. Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members. An ML-Series card supports STS-1c-2v, STS-3c-2v and STS-12c-2v. To configure an
ML-Series card SONET VCAT circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and VT Tunnels” chapter of the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
5-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.11 5.10.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
5.10.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
The ML1000-2 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-19 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
SF LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML1000-2 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML1000-2. When the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the ML1000-2 card is active and the software is operational.
5.10.2 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
The ML1000-2 card has three LEDs for each of the two Gigabit Ethernet ports, described in
Table 5-20 ML1000-2 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level Indicators
ACT LED (Amber)
LINK LED (Green)
Both ACT and LINK LED
Description
A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected, but there is an issue inhibiting traffic. A blinking amber LED means traffic flowing.
A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic. A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.
5.10.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
The ML1000-2 card is compatible in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 with the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card. It is only compatible in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 with the XCVT card.
5.11 CE-100T-8 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.6 CE-100T-8 Card Specifications” section on page A-45 .
The CE-100T-8 card provides eight RJ-45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports and an RJ-45 console port on the card faceplate. The CE-100T-8 card provides mapping of 10/100 Mbps Ethernet traffic into SONET
STS-12 payloads, making use of low-order (VT1.5) virtual concatenation, high-order (STS-1) virtual concatenation, generic framing procedure (GFP), and point-to-point protocol/high-level data link control (PPP/HDLC) framing protocols.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-25
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.11 5.11 CE-100T-8 Card
The CE-100T8 card also supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SONET link bandwidth. The CE-100T-8 card’s LCAS is hardware-based, but the
CE-100T-8 also supports SW-LCAS. This makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 SDH ML-Series card, which supports only SW-LCAS and does not support the standard hardware-based LCAS.
SW-LCAS is supported when a circuit from the CE-100T-8 terminates on the ONS 15454 SDH
ML-Series card.
The circuit types supported are:
•
HO-CCAT
•
•
LO-VCAT with no HW-LCAS
LO-VCAT with HW-LCAS
•
STS-1-2v SW-LCAS with ML only.
Each 10/100 Ethernet port can be mapped to a SONET channel in increments of VT1.5 or STS-1 granularity, allowing efficient transport of Ethernet and IP over the SONET infrastructure.
shows the CE-100T-8 card faceplate and block diagram.
CE-100T-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 5-10
CE100T
8
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
FAIL
ACT
CONSOLE
Packet Buffer
3x0.5MB
4 SMII
SDRAM
ETS
#1
STS3
SDRAM
4 SMII
ETS
#2
8x
10/100BaseT
RJ45
Octal
PHY
SMII
8
Packet
Processor/
Switch
Fabric
STS3
Control Mem
1x2MB
1
SMII
STS3
4 SMII
ETS
#3
3 SMII
ETS
#4
Option qMDM
FPGA
STS12
SDRAM
STS3
SDRAM
SCC1
BTC
Add_Bus
Drop_Bus a n p l e
B a c k
60x qMDM
FPGA
MII
Part of qMDM FPGA
FCC3
CPU nVRAM
Flash
8MB
SDRAM
128MB
CPLD
The following paragraphs describe the general functions of the CE-100T-8 card and relate to the block diagram.
In the ingress direction, (Ethernet-to-SONET), the PHY, which performs all of the physical layer interface functions for 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, sends the frame to the network processor for queuing in the respective packet buffer memory. The network processor performs packet processing, packet
5-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.11 5.11.1 CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators
switching, and classification. The Ethernet frames are then passed to the Ethermap where Ethernet traffic is terminated and is encapsulated using HDLC or GFP framing on a per port basis. The encapsulated
Ethernet frames are then mapped into a configurable number of virtual concatenated low and high order payloads, such as VT1.5 synchronous payload envelope (SPE), STS-1 SPE, or a contiguous concatenated payload such as STS-3c SPE. Up to 64 VT1.5 SPEs or 3 STS-1 SPEs can be virtually concatenated. The SONET SPE carrying encapsulated Ethernet frames are passed onto the qMDM
FPGA, where four STS-3 frames are multiplexed to form a STS-12 frame for transport over the SONET network by means of the Bridging Convergence Transmission (BTC) ASIC.
In the Egress direction (SONET-to-Ethernet), the FPGA extracts four STS-3 SPEs from the STS-12 frame it receives from the BTC and sends each of the STS-3s to the ET3 mappers. The STS-3 SONET
SPE carrying GFP or PPP/HDLC encapsulated Ethernet frames is then extracted and buffered in
Ethermap’s external memory. This memory is used for providing alignment and differential delay compensation for the received low-order and high-order virtual concatenated payloads. After alignment and delay compensation have been done, the Ethernet frames are decapsulated with one of the framing protocols (GFP or HDLC). Decapsulated Ethernet frames are then passed onto the network processor for
QoS queuing and traffic scheduling. The network processor switches the frame to one of the corresponding PHY channels and then to the Ethernet port for transmission to the external client(s).
For information on the CE-100T-8 QoS features, refer to the “CE-100T-8 Operations” chapter of the
Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454, and Cisco ONS 15327.
5.11.1 CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators
The CE-100T-8 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-21 CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
SF LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE-100T-8 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the CE-100T-8. When the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the CE-100T-8 card is active and the software is operational.
5.11.2 CE-100T-8 Port-Level Indicators
The CE-100T-8 card has two LEDs embedded into each of the eight Ethernet port RJ-45 connectors. The
LEDs are described in
.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-27
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.12 5.11.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
Table 5-22
Both ACT and LINK LED
OFF
CE-100T-8 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level Indicators
ACT LED (Amber)
LINK LED (Green)
Description
A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected, but there is an issue inhibiting traffic. A blinking amber LED means traffic flowing.
A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic. A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port.
Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic.
5.11.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
The CE-100T-8 card is compatible in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 with the XC10G, XC-VXC-10G, or XCVT cards.
5.12 CE-1000-4 Card
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.7.5 CE-1000-4 Card Specifications” section on page A-45 .
The CE-1000-4 card uses pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters (GBICs) to transport Ethernet traffic over a SONET network. The CE-1000-4 provides four IEEE 802.3-compliant, 1000-Mbps Gigabit
Ethernet ports at the ingress. At the egress, the CE-1000-4 card provides an integrated Ethernet over
SONET mapper with four virtual ports to transfer Ethernet packets over a SONET network.
The Ethernet ports automatically configure to operate at either half or full duplex and can determine whether to enable or disable flow control. The Ethernet ports can also be oversubscribed using flow control.
The Ethernet frames are encapsulated using the ITU-T generic framing procedure (GFP) (with or without CRC) or LEX, the point-to-point protocol (PPP) with high-level data link control (HDLC). The
CE-1000-4 card can interoperate with G1000-4/G1K-4 cards (using LEX encapsulation), CE-100T-8 cards (using LEX or GFP-F), and ML-Series cards (using LEX or GFP-F).
The Ethernet frames can be mapped into:
•
T1X1 G.707-based high-order virtual concatenated (HO VCAT) payloads
–
–
STS-3c-nv where n is 1 to 7
STS-1-nv where n is 1 to 21
•
Contiguously concatenated (CCAT) SONET payloads
–
Standard CCAT sizes (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, STS-48c)
–
Non-standard CCAT sizes (STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-18c).
To configure a CE-1000-4 card SONET STS or VCAT circuit, refer to the “Create Circuits and Tunnels” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
5-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.12 5.12 CE-1000-4 Card
The CE-1000-4 card provides multiple management options through Cisco Transport Controller (CTC),
Cisco Transport Manager (CTM), Transaction Language 1 (TL1), and Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
The CE-1000-4 card supports the software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). This makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 CE-100T-8 and ML-Series cards. The CE-1000-4 card supports VCAT groups (VCGs) that are reconfigurable when SW-LCAS is enabled (flexible VCGs). The CE-1000-4 card does not support the standard hardware-based LCAS.
The following guidelines apply to flexible VCGs:
•
•
•
•
•
Members can be added or removed from VCGs.
Members can be put into or out of service.
Cross-connects can be added or removed from VCGs.
Errored members will be automatically removed from VCGs.
•
Adding or removing members from the VCG is service affecting.
Adding or removing cross connects from the VCG is not service affecting if the associated members are not in group.
The CE-1000-4 card supports a non link capacity adjustment scheme (no-LCAS). This also makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 CE-100T-8 and ML-Series cards. The CE-1000-4 card supports VCAT groups (VCGs) that are fixed and not reconfigurable when no-LCAS is enabled (fixed VCGs).
The following guidelines apply to fixed VCGs:
•
•
Members can be added or removed from VCGs using CTC or TL1.
Members cannot be put into or out of service unless the force command mode is instantiated.
Note
This is possible with CTC as it assumes the force command mode by default. However, to put members into or out of service using TL1, the force command mode must be set.
•
The CE-1000-4 card supports VCAT differential delay and provides these associated features:
•
Supports a maximum VCG differential delay of 122 ms in each direction.
•
Cross-connects can be added or removed from VCGs using CTC or TL1. This is service affecting as long as the VCG size (TXCOUNT) is not realigned with the loss of connections.
•
Supports all protection schemes (path protection, two-fiber BLSR, four-fiber BLSR) on VCAT circuits that are split-fiber routed.
Supports 2-fiber on VCAT circuits that are common-fiber routed.
•
Differential delay compensation is automatically enabled on VCAT circuits that are diverse (split fiber) routed and disabled on VCAT circuits that are common-fiber routed.
Figure 5-11 shows the CE-1000-4 card faceplate and block diagram.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-29
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.12 5.12.1 CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 5-11
CE-1000-4
CE-1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
GBIC
Rx
3
Tx
Rx
2
Tx
Rx
1
Tx
ACT/LNK
ACT/LNK
ACT/LNK
4 ports:
GigE
Rx
4
Tx
ACT/LNK
GBIC
GBIC
GBIC
8260 Processor, SDRAM
Flash and DecodePLD
Protect
RX BPIA
SERDES
Protect
TX BPIA
SERDES
Malena FPGA
Altera
TADM
BTC
192
SERDES
SERDES
BUFFER
MEMORY
CLOCK Generation
50MHz,100Mhz
125Mhz,155MHz
CDR
Framer
Main RX
BPIA
Quicksilver
FPGA
Diff.
Delay.
Mem.
POWER
5V, 3.3V, 2.5V, 1.8V, -1.7V
Main TX
BPIA
-48V
STS48
BACKPLANE
Interface
5.12.1 CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
The CE-1000-4 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in
.
Table 5-23 CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LEDs
FAIL LED (Red)
ACT LED (Green)
Description
The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE-1000-4 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational.
The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the CE-1000-4 card.
When the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the CE-1000-4 card is active and the software is operational.
Note
If the CE-1000-4 card is inserted in a slot that has been preprovisioned for a different type of card, the red FAIL LED and the green ACT LED will flash alternately until the configuration mismatch is resolved.
5-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.13 5.12.2 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
5.12.2 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
The CE-1000-4 card provides a pair of LEDs for each Gigabit Ethernet port: an amber LED for activity
(ACT) and a green LED for link stat us (LINK).
describes the status that each color represents.
Table 5-24 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level Indicators
Off
Steady amber
Solid green
Flashing green
Description
No link exists to the Ethernet port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example, a lack of circuit setup, an error on the line, or a disabled port might inhibit traffic flow.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.
A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The
LED flash rate reflects the traffic rate for that port.
5.12.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility
The CE-1000-4 card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 when used with the XC10G and
XC-VXC-10G cards. When the shelf uses the XCVT card, the CE-1000-4 card can only be installed in
Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13.
5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs
This section describes the GBICs and SFPs used with the Ethernet cards.
The ONS 15454 Ethernet cards use industry standard small form-factor pluggable connectors (SFPs) and gigabit interface converter (GBIC) modular receptacles. The ML-Series Gigabit Ethernet cards use standard Cisco SFPs. The Gigabit E-Series, G-1K-4, and CE-1000-4 cards use standard Cisco GBICs.
With Software Release 4.1 and later, G-Series cards can also be equipped with dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) and coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) GBICs to function as
Gigabit Ethernet transponders.
For all Ethernet cards, the type of GBIC or SFP plugged into the card is displayed in CTC and TL1. Cisco offers SFPs and GBICs as separate orderable products.
5.13.1 Compatibility by Card
lists Cisco ONS 15454 Ethernet cards with their compatible GBICs and SFPs.
Caution
Use only GBICs and SFPs certified for use in Cisco Optical Networking Systems. The top assembly numbers (TANs) for each GBIC and SFP are provided in
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-31
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.13 5.13.2 GBIC Description
Table 5-25 GBIC and SFP Card Compatibility
Card
E1000-2-G
E1000-2
(ONS 15454 SONET)
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
Compatible GBIC or SFP
(Cisco Product ID)
15454-GBIC-SX
15454E-GBIC-SX
15454-GBIC-LX/LH
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH
G1K-4
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
G1000-4
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
15454-GBIC-SX
15454E-GBIC-SX
15454-GBIC-LX/LH
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH
15454-GBIC-ZX
15454E-GBIC-ZX
15454-GBIC-xx.x
2
15454E-GBIC-xx.x
15454-GBIC-xxxx
3
15454E-GBIC-xxxx
ML1000-2
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
15454-SFP-LC-SX
15454E-SFP-LC-SX
ONS-SC-GE-SX
15454-SFP-LC-LX/LH
15454E-SFP-LC-LX/LH
ONS-SC-GE-LX
ML100X-8 (
ONS 15454 SONET/SDH
) ONS-SE-100-FX
ONS-SE-100-LX10
CE-1000-4 (
ONS 15454 SONET/SDH
) 15454-GBIC-SX
15454-GBIC-LX
15454-GBIC-ZX
ONS-GC-GE-SX
ONS-GC-GE-LX
ONS-GC-GE-ZX
1.
This TAN is only compatible with ONS 15454-E1000-2 or 15454-E1000-2-G cards.
2.
xx.x defines the 32 possible wavelengths
3.
xxxx defines the 8 possible wavelengths as shown in Table 5-26 on page 5-33 .
30-1301-01
30-1301-01
10-2301-01
30-1299-01
30-1299-01
10-2298-01
10-2212-01
10-2213-01
30-0759-01
10-1743-01
30-0848-01
10-2192-01
10-2191-01
10-2190-01
Cisco Top Assembly Number
(TAN)
30-0759-01
800-06780-01
10-1743-01
1
30-0703-01
30-0759-01
800-06780-01
10-1743-01
30-0703-01
30-0848-01
10-1744-01
10-1845-01 through 10-1876-01
10-1845-01 through 10-1876-01
10-1453-01 through 10-1460-01
10-1453-01 through 10-1460-01
5.13.2 GBIC Description
GBICs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the GBIC pluggable modules. There is no correlation between the type of latch and the model type (such as SX or LX/LH) or technology type (such as Gigabit Ethernet). See the label on the GBIC for technology type and model. One GBIC model has two clips (one on each side of the GBIC) that secure the GBIC in the slot on the Ethernet card; the other has a locking handle. Both types are shown in
.
GBIC dimensions are:
•
•
Height 0.39 in. (1 cm)
Width 1.18 in. (3 cm)
5-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.13 5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs
•
•
•
Depth 2.56 in. (6.5 cm)
GBIC temperature ranges are:
•
COM—commercial operating temperature range -5•C to 70•C
EXT—extended operating temperature range 0•C to 85•C
IND—industrial operating temperature range -40•C to 85•C
Figure 5-12 GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right)
Receiver
Transmitter
Clip
Receiver
Transmitter
Handle
5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs
DWDM (15454-GBIC-xx.x, 15454E-GBIC-xx.x) and CWDM (15454-GBIC-xxxx,
15454E-GBIC-xxxx) GBICs operate in an ONS 15454 G-Series card when the card is configured in
Gigabit Ethernet Transponding mode or in Ethernet over SONET mode. DWDM and CWDM GBICs are both wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) technologies and operate over single-mode fibers with SC connectors. Cisco CWDM GBIC technology uses a 20 nm wavelength grid and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
GBIC technology uses a 1 nm wavelength grid. CTC displays the specific wavelengths of the installed
CWDM or DWDM GBICs. DWDM wavelengths are spaced closer together and require more precise lasers than CWDM. The DWDM spectrum allows for optical signal amplification. For more information on
G-Series card transponding mode, refer to the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide
for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, and Cisco ONS 15327.
The DWDM and CWDM GBICs receive across the full 1300 nm and 1500 nm bands, which includes all
CWDM, DWDM, LX/LH, ZX wavelengths, but transmit on one specified wavelength. This capability can be exploited in some of the G-Series transponding modes by receiving wavelengths that do not match the specific transmission wavelength.
Note
G1000-4 cards support CWDM and DWDM GBICs. G1K-4 cards with the Common Language
Equipment Identification (CLEI) code of WM5IRWPCAA (manufactured after August 2003) support
CWDM and DWDM GBICs. G1K-4 cards manufactured prior to August 2003 do not support CWDM or
DWDM GBICs.
The ONS 15454-supported CWDM GBICs reach up to 100 to 120 km over single-mode fiber and support eight wavelengths as shown in
.
Table 5-26 Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs
CWDM GBIC Wavelengths
1470 nm 1490 nm 1510 nm 1530 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm 1590 nm
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-33
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.13 5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs
Table 5-26 Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs
Corresponding GBIC Colors
Band
Gray
47
Violet
49
Blue
51
Green
53
Yellow
55
Orange
57
Red
59
Table 5-27
Blue Band
Red Band
The ONS 15454-supported DWDM GBICs reach up to 100 to 120 km over single-mode fiber and support 32 different wavelengths in the red and blue bands. Paired with optical amplifiers, such as the
Cisco ONS 15216, the DWDM GBICs allow maximum unregenerated spans of approximately 300 km
(
Supported Wavelengths for DWDM GBICs
1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm
1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm
1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm
1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm
CWDM or DWDM GBICs for the G-Series card come in set wavelengths and are not provisionable. The wavelengths are printed on each GBIC, for example, CWDM-GBIC-1490. The user must insert the specific GBIC transmitting the wavelength required to match the input of the CWDM/DWDM device for successful operation (
). Follow your site plan or network diagram for the required wavelengths.
Figure 5-13 CWDM GBIC with Wavelength Appropriate for Fiber-Connected Device
G1K
FAIL
ACT
CWDM-GBIC-1470
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
3
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
4
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
1
TX
ACT/LINK
RX
2
1470-nm Input
Fiber Optic Connection
CWDM Mux
Br
61
A G-Series card equipped with CWDM or DWDM GBICs supports the delivery of unprotected Gigabit
Ethernet service over Metro DWDM (
Figure 5-14 ). It can be used in short-haul and long-haul
applications.
5-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5.13 5.13.4 SFP Description
Figure 5-14 G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network
Conventional GigE signals
GigE /
GigE /
GigE over 's
VoD
ONS Node with G-Series Cards
CWDM/DWDM
Mux only with CWDM/DWDM GBICs
CWDM/DWDM
Demux only
QAM
HFC
= Lambdas
5.13.4 SFP Description
SFPs are integrated fiber-optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the SFP modules. There is no correlation between the type of latch and the model type (such as SX or LX/LH) or technology type (such as Gigabit
Ethernet). See the label on the SFP for technology type and model. One type of latch available is a mylar tab (
), a second type of latch available is an actuator/button (
Figure 5-16 ), and a third type
of latch is a bail clasp (
SFP dimensions are:
•
Height 0.03 in. (8.5 mm)
•
•
Width 0.53 in. (13.4 mm)
Depth 2.22 in. (56.5 mm)
SFP temperature ranges for are:
•
COM—commercial operating temperature range -5•C to 70•C
•
•
EXT—extended operating temperature range -5•C to 85•C
IND—industrial operating temperature range -40•C to 85•C
Figure 5-15 Mylar Tab SFP
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
5-35
5.13 5.13.4 SFP Description
Figure 5-16 Actuator/Button SFP
Figure 5-17 Bail Clasp SFP
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards
5-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
6
Storage Access Networking Cards
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
The Fibre Channel Multirate 4-Port (FC_MR-4) card is a 1.0625- or 2.125-Gbps Fibre Channel/fiber connectivity (FICON) card that integrates non-SONET framed protocols into a SONET time-division multiplexing (TDM) platform through virtually concatenated payloads. For installation and step-by-step circuit configuration procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview, page 6-1
•
•
•
6.2 FC_MR-4 Card Modes, page 6-4
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application, page 6-7
6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs, page 6-8
6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview
Note
For hardware specifications, see the
“A.8.1 FC_MR-4 Card Specifications” section on page A-47 .
The FC_MR-4 card uses pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters (GBICs) to transport non-SONET/SDH-framed, block-coded protocols over SONET/SDH. The FC_MR-4 enables four client
Fibre Channel (FC) ports to be transported over SONET/SDH, encapsulating the frames using the ITU-T generic framing procedure (GFP) format and mapping them into either T1X1 G.707-based virtual concatenated (VCAT) payloads or standard contiguously concatenated SONET payloads. The FC_MR-4 card has the following features:
•
Four FICON ports operating at 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps
–
All four ports can be operational at any time due to subrate support
•
–
Advanced distance extension capability (buffer-to-buffer credit spoofing)
Pluggable GBIC optics
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-1
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.1 6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview
•
–
Dual rate (1G/2G): MM (550 m) and SM (10 km)
–
Single rate (1G): SX (550 m) and LX (10 km)
SONET/SDH support
–
Four 1.0625-Gbps FC channels can be mapped into one of the following:
SONET containers as small as STS1-1v (subrate)
SDH containers as small as VC4-1v (subrate)
SONET/SDH containers as small as STS-18c/VC4-6v (full rate)
–
Four 2.125-Gbps FC channels can be mapped into one of the following:
SONET containers as small as STS1-1v (subrate)
SDH containers as small as VC4-1v (subrate)
SONET/SDH containers as small as STS-36c/VC4-12v (full rate)
•
•
Frame encapsulation: ITU-T G.7041 transparent generic framing procedure (GFP-T)
High-order SONET/SDH VCAT support (STS1-Xv and STS-3c-Xv/VC4-Xv)
•
Differential delay support for VCAT circuits
shows the FC_MR-4 faceplate and block diagram.
6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.1 6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators
Figure 6-1
FC_MR-4
FC_MR-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
FAIL
ACT
Rx
1
Tx
ACT/LNK
Rx
2
Tx
ACT/LNK
Rx
3
Tx
ACT/LNK
Rx
4
Tx
ACT/LNK
FLASH SDRAM
GBIC
OPTICS
GBIC
OPTICS
GBIC
OPTICS
GBIC
OPTICS
SERDES
MPC8250
Decode and
Control
PLD
TADM
RUDRA
FPGA
QDR MEMORY
CDR +
SONET
FRAMER
QUICKSILVER
VCAT
PROCESSOR
BTC
192
DDR
MEMORY
IBPIA
IBPIA
K
P
L
A
B
A
C
N
E
6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators
describes the two card-level LEDs on the FC_MR-4 card.
Table 6-1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators Description
FAIL LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
ACT LED (Green)
ACT LED (Amber)
If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is rebooting.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-3
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.2 6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators
6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators
Each FC_MR-4 port has a corresponding ACT/LNK LED. The ACT/LNK LED is solid green if the port is available to carry traffic, is provisioned as in-service, and is in the active mode. The ACT/LNK LED is flashing green if the port is carrying traffic. The ACT/LNK LED is steady amber if the port is not enabled and the link is connected, or if the port is enabled and the link is connected but there is a
SONET/SDH transport error. The ACT/LNK LED is not lit if there is no link.
You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 SDH fan-tray assembly.
Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages.
6.1.3 FC_MR-4 Compatibility
The FC_MR-4 cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 when used with the XC10G and
XC-VXC-10G cards. When the shelf uses the XCVT card, the FC_MR-4 can be used in only the high-speed (slots 5/6 and 12/13).
The FC_MR-4 card can be provisioned as part of any valid ONS 15454 SONET/SDH network topology, such as a path protection, bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR), or linear network topologies. The
FC_MR-4 card is compatible with Software Release 4.6 and greater.
6.2 FC_MR-4 Card Modes
The FC_MR-4 card can operate in two different modes:
•
•
Line rate mode—This mode is backward compatible with the Software R4.6 Line Rate mode.
Enhanced mode—This mode supports subrate, distance extension, differential delay, and other enhancements.
The FC_MR-4 card reboots when a card mode changes (a traffic hit results). The Field Programmable
Gate Array (FPGA) running on the card upgrades to the required image. However, the FPGA image in the card’s flash memory is not modified.
6.2.1 Line-Rate Card Mode
The mapping for the line rate card mode is summarized here.
•
1 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:
–
STS-24c, STS-48c
–
–
VC4-8c, VC4-16c
STS1-Xv where X is 19 to 24
•
–
–
STS3c-Xv where X is 6 to 8
VC4-Xv where X is 6 to 8
2 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:
–
STS-48c
–
VC4-16c
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-4 78-17191-01
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.2 6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode
–
STS-1-Xv where X is 37 to 48
–
–
STS-3c-Xv where X is 12 to 16
VC4-Xv where X is 12 to 16
6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode
The features available in enhanced card mode are given in this section.
6.2.2.1 Mapping
1 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:
–
–
STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c, STS-48c
VC4-1c, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c
–
–
STS-1-Xv where X is 1 to 24
STS-3c-Xv where X is 1 to 8
–
VC4-Xv where X is 1 to 8
2 Gbps Fibre Channel/FICON is mapped into:
–
–
STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c, STS-36c, STS-48c
VC4-1c, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c, VC4-16c
–
–
STS-1-Xv where X is 1 to 48
STS-3c-Xv where X is 1 to 16
–
VC4-Xv where X is 1 to 16
6.2.2.2 SW -LCAS
VCAT group (VCG) is reconfigurable when the software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS) is enabled, as follows:
•
Out-of-service (OOS) and out-of-group (OOG) members can be removed from VCG
•
•
•
Members with deleted cross-connects can be removed from VCGs
Errored members can be autonomously removed from VCGs
•
Degraded bandwidth VCGs are supported
VCG is flexible with SW-LCAS enabled (VCG can run traffic as soon as the first cross-connect is provisioned on both sides of the transport)
6.2.2.3 Distance Extension
This following list describes the FC_MR-4 card distance extension capabilities:
•
Enabling of a storage access networking (SAN) extension over long distances through buffer-to-buffer (B2B) credit spoofing.
–
–
2300 km for 1G ports (longer distances supported with lesser throughput)
1150 km for 2G ports (longer distances supported with lesser throughput)
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-5
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.2 6.2.3 Link Integrity
•
•
•
•
•
•
Negotiation mechanism to identify whether a far-end FC-over-SONET card supports the Cisco proprietary B2B mechanism
Auto detection of FC switch B2B credits from FC-SW standards-based exchange link parameters
(ELP) frames
Support for manual provisioning of credits based on FC switch credits
Automatic GFP buffers adjustment based on roundtrip latency between two SL ports
Automatic credits recovery during SONET switchovers/failures
Insulation for FC switches from any SONET switchovers; no FC fabric reconvergences for SONET failures of less than or equal to 60 ms
6.2.2.4 Differential Delay Features
The combination of VCAT, SW-LCAS, and GFP specifies how to process information for data and storage clients. The resulting operations introduce delays. Their impact depends on the type of service being delivered. For example, storage requirements call for very low latency, as opposed to traffic such as e-mail where latency variations are not critical.
With VCAT, SONET paths are grouped to aggregate bandwidth to form VCGs. Because each VCG member can follow a unique physical route through a network, there are differences in propagation delay, and possibly processing delays between members. The overall VCG propagation delay corresponds to that of the slowest member. The VCAT differential delay is the relative arrival time measurement between members of a VCG. The FC_MR-4 card is able to handle VCAT differential delay and provides these associated features:
•
Supports a maximum of 122 ms of delay difference between the shortest and longest paths.
•
•
•
•
Supports diverse fiber routing for VCAT circuit.
All protection schemes are supported (path protection, automatic protection switching [APS],
2-fiber BLSR, 4-fiber BLSR).
Supports routing of VCAT group members through different nodes in the SONET network.
Differential delay compensation is automatically enabled on VCAT circuits that are diverse (split fiber) routed, and disabled on VCAT circuits that are common fiber routed.
Note
Differential delay support for VCAT circuits is supported by means of a TL1 provisioning parameter
(EXTBUFFERS) in the ENT-VCG command.
6.2.2.5 Interoperability Features
The interoperability features are as follows:
•
•
Maximum frame size setting to prevent accumulation of oversized performance monitoring parameters for virtual SAN (VSAN) frames
Ingress filtering disable for attachment to third-party GFP-over-SONET/SDH equipment
6.2.3 Link Integrity
The link integrity features are as follows:
•
Data port disabled if upstream data port is not able to send over SONET/SDH transport
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-6 78-17191-01
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.3 6.2.4 Link Recovery
•
Data port disabled if SONET/SDH transport is errored
6.2.4 Link Recovery
Link recovery has the following features:
•
Reduces the impact of SONET/SDH disruptions on attached Fibre Channel equipment
•
•
Speeds up the recovery of Inter-Switch Links (ISLs)
Allows monitoring of B2B credit depletion due to SONET outage and full recovery of the credits, thus preventing the slow decay of bandwidth/throughput
Note
Distance extension and link recovery cannot be enabled at the same time.
6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application
The FC_MR-4 card reliably transports carrier-class, private-line Fibre Channel/FICON transport service. Each FC_MR-4 card can support up to four 1-Gbps circuits or four 2-Gbps circuits. Four
1.0625-Gbps FC channels can be mapped into containers as small as STS-1 (subrate), with a minimum of STS-18c/VC4-6v for full rate. Four 2.125-Gbps FC channels can be mapped into containers as small as STS-1 (sub-rate), with a minimum of STS-36c/VC4-12v for full rate.
The FC_MR-4 card incorporates features optimized for carrier-class applications such as:
•
Carrier-class Fibre Channel/FICON
•
50 ms of switch time through SONET/SDH protection as specified in Telcordia GR-253-CORE
Note
Protection switch traffic hit times of less than 60 ms are not guaranteed with differential delay in effect.
•
Hitless software upgrades
Note
Hitless software upgrades are not possible with an activation from Software R5.0 to Software R6.0 or higher in enhanced card mode. This is because the FPGA must be upgraded to support differential delay in enhanced mode. Upgrades are still hitless with the line rate mode.
•
Remote Fibre Channel/FICON circuit bandwidth upgrades through integrated Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC)
•
Multiple management options through CTC, Cisco Transport Manager (CTM), TL1, and Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Differential delay compensation of up to 122 ms for diversely routed VCAT circuits
•
The FC_MR-4 payloads can be transported over the following protection types:
•
Path Protection
•
•
•
BLSR
Unprotected
Protection channel access (PCA)
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
6-7
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards
6.4 6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs
The FC_MR-4 payloads can be transported over the following circuit types:
•
•
•
STS
STSn
STS-V
Note
Virtual Tributary (VT) and VT-V circuits are not supported.
The FC_MR-4 card supports VCAT. See the
“11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits” section on page 11-33
for more information about VCAT circuits.
6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs
The FC_MR-4 uses pluggable GBICs for client interfaces.
Table 6-2 lists GBICs that are compatible
with the FC_MR-4 card. See the
“5.13.2 GBIC Description” section on page 5-32
for more information.
Table 6-2 GBIC Compatibility
Card
FC_MR-4
(ONS 15454 SONET/SDH)
Compatible GBIC or SFP
(Cisco Product ID)
15454-GBIC-SX
15454E-GBIC-SX
15454-GBIC-LX/LH
15454E-GBIC-LX/LH
ONS-GX-2FC-MMI
ONS-GX-2FC-SML
Cisco Top Assembly
Number (TAN)
30-0759-01
800-06780-01
10-1743-01
30-0703-01
10-2015-01
10-2016-01
6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
7
Card Protection
This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 card protection configurations. To provision card protection, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
7.1 Electrical Card Protection, page 7-1
7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane, page 7-5
7.3 OC-N Card Protection, page 7-13
7.4 Unprotected Cards, page 7-14
7.5 External Switching Commands, page 7-14
7.1 Electrical Card Protection
The ONS 15454 provides a variety of electrical card protection methods. This section describes the protection options.
shows a 1:1 protection configuration and
Figure 7-2 on page 7-3 shows a
1:N protection configuration.
This section covers the general concept of electrical card protection. Specific electrical card protection schemes depend on the type of electrical card as well as the electrical interface assembly (EIA) type used
on the ONS 15454 backplane. Table 7-3 on page 7-5 details the specific electrical card protection
schemes.
Note
See
Table 1-2 on page 1-16 for the EIA types supported by the
15454-SA-ANSI and 15454-SA-HD (high-density) shelf assemblies.
Caution
When a protection switch moves traffic from the working/active electrical card to the protect/standby electrical card, ports on the new active/standby card cannot be placed out of service as long as traffic is switched. Lost traffic can result when a port is taken out of service, even if the standby card no longer carries traffic.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-1 78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.1 7.1.1 1:1 Protection
7.1.1 1:1 Protection
In 1:1 protection, a working card is paired with a protect card of the same type. If the working card fails, the traffic from the working card switches to the protect card. You can provision 1:1 to be revertive or nonrevertive. If revertive, traffic automatically reverts to the working card after the failure on the working card is resolved.
Each working card in an even-numbered slot is paired with a protect card in an odd-numbered slot: Slot
1 protects Slot 2; Slot 3 protects Slot 4; Slot 5 protects Slot 6; Slot 17 protects Slot 16; Slot 15 protects
Slot 14; and Slot 13 protects Slot 12.
shows an example of the ONS 15454 in a 1:1 protection configuration.
Figure 7-1 Example: ONS 15454 Cards in a 1:1 Protection Configuration (SMB EIA)
1:1 Protection
7.1.2 1:N Protection
1:N protection allows a single electrical card to protect up to five working cards of the same speed. 1:N cards have added circuitry to act as the protect card in a 1:N protection group. Otherwise, the card is identical to the standard card and can serve as a normal working card.
The physical DS-1 or DS-3 interfaces on the ONS 15454 backplane use the working card until the working card fails. When the node detects this failure, the protect card takes over the physical DS-1 or
DS-3 electrical interfaces through the relays and signal bridging on the backplane. Figure 7-2
shows the
ONS 15454 in a 1:N protection configuration. Each side of the shelf assembly has only one card protecting all of the cards on that side.
7-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.1 7.1.2 1:N Protection
Figure 7-2 Example: ONS 15454 Cards in a 1:N Protection Configuration (SMB EIA)
1:N Protection
78-17191-01
provides the supported 1:N configurations by electrical card, as well as the card types that can be used for working and protection cards. Additional engineering rules for 1:N card deployments will be covered in the following sections.
Table 7-1 Supported 1:N Protection by Electrical Card
Working Card
DS1-14 or DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
DS3-12/DS3-12E or
DS3N-12/DS3N-12E
Protect Card
DS1N-14
DS1/E1-56
Protect Group
(Maximum)
N
< 5
Working Slot
1, 2, 4, 5, 6
N
< 2
Protection Slot
3
12, 13, 14, 16, 17 15
1
1
, 2
2
16
3
, 17
4
3
15
DS3N-12/DS3N-12E N
< 5
1, 2, 4, 5, 6
12, 13, 14, 16, 17
3
15
DS3i-N-12 DS3i-N-12 N
< 5
DS3/EC1-48 DS3/EC1-48 N
< 2
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 3
12, 13, 14, 16, 17 15
1
5
, 2
6
16
7
, 17
8
3
15
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
N
< 5
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 3
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
DS3XM-12
(Transmux)
N
< 7
(portless
9
)
12, 13, 14, 16, 17 15
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, 17
3
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12,
13, 14, 16, 17
15
1.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 1 restricts the use of Slots 5 and 6 to optical, data, or storage cards.
2.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 2 restricts the use of Slots 4 and 6 to optical, data, or storage cards.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-3
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.1 7.1.2 1:N Protection
3.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 16 restricts the use of Slot 14 to optical, data, or storage cards.
4.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 17 restricts the use of Slots 12 and 13 to optical, data, or storage cards.
5.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 1 restricts the use of Slots 5 and 6 to optical, data, or storage cards.
6.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 2 restricts the use of Slots 4 and 6 to optical, data, or storage cards.
7.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 16 restricts the use of Slot 14 to optical, data, or storage cards.
8.
A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 17 restricts the use of Slots 12 and 13 to optical, data, or storage cards.
9.
Portless DS-3 Transmux operation does not terminate the DS-3 signal on the EIA panel.
7.1.2.1 Revertive Switching
1:N protection supports revertive switching. Revertive switching sends the electrical interfaces (traffic) back to the original working card after the card comes back online. Detecting an active working card triggers the reversion process. There is a variable time period for the lag between detection and reversion, called the revertive delay, which you can set using the ONS 15454 software, Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC). To set the revertive delay, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS
15454 Procedure Guide. All cards in a protection group share the same reversion settings. 1:N protection groups default to automatic reversion.
Caution
A user-initiated switch (external switching command) overrides the revertive delay, that is, clearing the switch clears the timer.
7.1.2.2 1:N Protection Guidelines
There are two types of 1:N protection groups for the ONS 15454: ported and portless. Ported 1:N interfaces are the traditional protection groups for signals electrically terminated on the shelf assembly.
Portless 1:N interfaces are signals received through an electrical synchronous transport signal (STS) through the cross-connect card. The DS3XM-12 card supports portless as well as traditional ported deployments.
Table 7-1 on page 7-3 outlines the 1:N configurations supported by each electrical card
type.
The following rules apply to ported 1:N protection groups in the ONS 15454:
•
•
•
Working cards can sit on either or both sides of the protect card.
The following rules apply to portless 1:N protection groups in the ONS 15454:
•
Working and protect card groups must reside in the same card bank (Side A or Side B).
The 1:N protect card must reside in Slot 3 for Side A and Slot 15 for Side B.
•
Working and protect card groups can reside in the same card bank or different card banks (Side A or Side B).
The 1:N protect card can be installed in either Slot 3 or Slot 15 and protect working cards in both card banks.
•
Working cards can sit on either or both sides of the protect card.
The ONS 15454 supports 1:N equipment protection for all add-drop multiplexer (ADM) configurations
(ring, linear, and terminal), as specified by Telcordia GR-253-CORE. For detailed procedures for setting up DS-1 and DS-3 protection groups, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
7-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
Protection schemes for electrical cards depend on the EIA type used on the ONS 15454 backplane. The difference is due to the varying connector size. For example, because BNC connectors are larger, fewer
DS3-12 cards can be supported when using a BNC connector.
shows the number of connectors per side for each EIA type according to low-density and high-density interfaces.
In the tables, high-density (HD) cards include the DS3/EC1-48 and DS1/E1-56 cards. Low-density (LD cards) include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
DS1-14, DS1N-14
DS3-12/DS3-12E, DS3N-12/DS3N-12E
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
EC1-12
Note
For EIA installation, refer to the “Install the Shelf and Backplane Cable” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide.
Caution When a protection switch moves traffic from the working/active electrical card to the protect/standby electrical card, ports on the new active/standby card cannot be taken out of service as long as traffic is switched. Lost traffic can result when a port is taken out of service even if the standby electrical card no longer carries traffic.
Table 7-2 EIA Connectors Per Side
Interfaces per Side
Total physical connectors
Maximum LD DS-1 Interfaces (transmit [Tx] and receive [Rx])
Maximum LD DS-3 interfaces (Tx and Rx)
Standard
BNC
48
—
24
Maximum HD DS-1 interfaces (Tx and Rx) —
Maximum HD DS-3 interfaces (Tx and Rx) —
48
—
—
High-Density
BNC MiniBNC Champ
96
—
192
—
168
84
6
84
UBIC-V and
UBIC-H (SCSI)
16
84
72
—
96
72
—
—
—
—
—
72
112
96
shows the electrical card protection for each EIA type according to shelf side and slots.
Electrical Card Protection By EIA Type Table 7-3
Protection
Type Card Type Side Standard BNC High-Density BNC MiniBNC SMB
Unprotected LD, Working A 2, 4 1, 2, 4, 5 1–6 1–6
B
HD, Working A
B
14, 16
—
—
13, 14, 16, 17
—
—
12–17
1, 2
16, 17
12–17
—
—
AMP
Champ
1–6
12–17
—
—
UBIC-V and
UBIC-H (SCSI)
1–6
12–17
1, 2
16, 17
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-5
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
Table 7-3
Protection
Type
1:1
1:N
Electrical Card Protection By EIA Type (continued)
Card Type Side Standard BNC High-Density BNC MiniBNC SMB
LD, Working A
B
2, 4
14, 16
2, 4
14, 16
2, 4, 6 2, 4, 6
AMP
Champ
2, 4, 6
UBIC-V and
UBIC-H (SCSI)
2, 4, 6
12, 14, 16 12, 14, 16 12, 14, 16 12, 14, 16
LD, Protect A
B
LD, Working A
1, 3
15, 17
—
1, 3
15, 17
1, 2, 4, 5
1, 3, 5 1, 3, 5 1, 3, 5 1, 3, 5
13, 15, 17 13, 15, 17 13, 15, 17 13, 15, 17
1–6 1–6 1–6 1–6
B
LD, Protect A
B
HD, Working A
B
HD, Protect A
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
13, 14, 16, 17
3
15
—
—
—
—
12–17
3
15
1, 2
16, 17
3
15
12–17
3
15
—
—
—
—
12–17
3
15
—
—
—
—
12–17
3
15
1, 2
16, 17
3
15
7-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-3 shows unprotected low-density electrical card schemes by EIA type.
Unprotected Low-Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types
Standard BNC High-Density BNC
78-17191-01
SMB/UBIC/AMP Champ
MiniBNC
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-7
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
shows unprotected high-density electrical card schemes by EIA type.
Figure 7-4 Unprotected High-Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types
UBIC/MiniBNC
7-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-5 shows 1:1 low-density card protection by EIA type.
1:1 Protection Schemes for Low-Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types
Standard BNC High-Density BNC
78-17191-01
SMB/UBIC/AMP Champ/MiniBNC
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-9
7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane
Figure 7-6
shows 1:N protection for low-density electrical cards.
1:N Protection Schemes for Low-Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types
Chapter 7 Card Protection
Standard BNC High-Density BNC
SMB/UBIC/AMP Champ/MiniBNC
Note
EC-1 cards do not support 1:N protection.
7-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2.1 Standard BNC Protection
Figure 7-7 shows 1:1 high-density card protection by EIA type.
Figure 7-7 1:1 Protection Schemes for High-Density Electrical Cards with UBIC or MiniBNC EIA
Types
UBIC/MiniBNC
7.2.1 Standard BNC Protection
When used with the standard BNC EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 2) electrical card protection for DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in
and
and 24 receive signals per EIA panel, enabling 96 BNC connectors for terminating up to 48 transmit and receive signals per shelf with two standard-BNC panels installed. With an A-Side standard BNC EIA,
Slots 2 and 4 can be used for working slots and with a B-Side EIA, Slots 14 and 16 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to 24 BNC connectors on the EIA to support up to 12 transmit/receive signals. These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS-3 and
EC-1 services.
7.2.2 High-Density BNC Protection
When used with the high-density BNC EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 4) electrical card protection for DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in
and
. The high-density BNC EIA panel provides 96 BNC connectors for terminating up to
48 transmit and 24 receive signals per EIA panel, enabling 192 BNC connectors for terminating up to
96 transmit and receive signals per shelf with two high-density BNC panels installed. With an A-Side high-density BNC EIA, Slots 1, 2, 4, and 5 can be used for working slots and with a B-Side EIA,
Slots 13, 14, 16, and 17 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to 24 BNC connectors on the EIA to support up to 12 transmit/receive signals. These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS-3 and EC-1 services.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-11
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.2 7.2.3 MiniBNC Protection
7.2.3 MiniBNC Protection
When used with the MiniBNC EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 5) electrical card protection for DS-1, DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in
and
96 receive signals per EIA, enabling 384 MiniBNC connectors for terminating up to 192 transmit and receive signals per shelf with two MiniBNC panels installed. With an A-Side MiniBNC EIA, Slots 1, 2,
4, 5, and 6 can be used for working slots and on a B-Side panel, Slots 12, 13, 14, 16, and 17 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to 24 MiniBNC connectors on the EIA panel to support up to 12 transmit/receive signals. In addition, working Slots 1, 2, 16 and 17 can be mapped to 96
MiniBNC connectors to support the high-density electrical card. These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS-3 and EC-1 services.
7.2.4 SMB Protection
When used with the SMB EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 5) electrical card protection for DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in
and
The SMB EIA provides 168 SMB connectors for terminating up to 84 transmit and 84 receive signals per EIA, enabling 336 SMB connectors for terminating up to 168 transmit and receive signals per shelf with two SMB EIAs installed. With an A-Side SMB EIA, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 can be used for working slots and with a B-Side EIA, Slots 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to 28 SMB connectors on the EIA to support up to 14 transmit/receive signals.
These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS-1, DS-3 and EC-1 services. For
DS-1 services, an SMB-to-wire-wrap balun is installed on the SMB ports for termination of the 100 ohm signal.
7.2.5 AMP Champ Protection
When used with the AMP Champ EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 5)
and 84 receive signals per EIA, enabling 12 AMP Champ connectors for terminating up to 168 transmit and receive signals per shelf with two AMP Champ EIAs installed. With an A-Side SMB EIA, Slots 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 can be used for working slots and with a B-Side EIA, Slots 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to 1 AMP Champ connector on the EIA to support 14 transmit/receive signals. These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for
DS-1 services.
7.2.6 UBIC Protection
When used with the UBIC EIA, the ONS 15454 high-density shelf assembly (15454-HD-SA) supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N
< 5) electrical card protection for DS-1, DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in
and
. The UBIC EIA provides 16 SCSI connectors for terminating up to 112 transmit and receive DS-1 signals per EIA, or up to 96 transmit and receive DS-3 connections. With an A-side UBIC EIA, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 can be used for working slots and with a B-Side EIA, Slots 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 can be used for working slots. Each of these slots is mapped to two SCSI connectors on the EIA to support up to 14 transmit/receive signals. In addition, working Slots 1, 2, 16, and 17 can be mapped to 8 SCSI connectors to support the high-density electrical card. These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS-1, DS-3, and EC-1 services.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-12 78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.3 7.3 OC-N Card Protection
7.3 OC-N Card Protection
The ONS 15454 provides two optical card protection methods, 1+1 protection and optimized 1+1 protection. This section covers the general concept of optical card protection. Specific optical card protection schemes depend on the optical cards in use.
7.3.1 1+1 Protection
Any OC-N card can use 1+1 protection. With 1+1 port-to-port protection, ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card. The working and protect cards do not have to be placed side by side in the node. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of ports. For example, a single-port OC-12 must be paired with another single-port OC-12, and a four-port OC-12 must be paired with another four-port OC-12. You cannot create a 1+1 protection group if one card is single-port and the other is multiport, even if the OC-N rates are the same. The protection takes place on the port level, and any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card.
For example, on a four-port card, you can assign one port as a protection port on the protect card
(protecting the corresponding port on the working card) and leave three ports unprotected. Conversely, you can assign three ports as protection ports and leave one port unprotected. In other words, all the ports on the protect card are used in the protection scheme.
1+1 span protection can be either revertive or nonrevertive. With nonrevertive 1+1 protection, when a failure occurs and the signal switches from the working card to the protect card, the signal stays switched to the protect card until it is manually switched back. Revertive 1+1 protection automatically switches the signal back to the working card when the working card comes back online. 1+1 protection is unidirectional and nonrevertive by default; revertive switching is easily provisioned using CTC.
Note
When provisioning a line timing reference for the node, you cannot select the protect port of a 1+1 protection group. If a traffic switch occurs on the working port of the 1+1 protection group, the timing reference of the node automatically switches to the protect port of the 1+1 protection group.
7.3.2 Optimized 1+1 Protection
Optimized 1+1 protection is used in networks that mainly use the linear 1+1 bidirectional protection scheme. Optimized 1+1 is a line-level protection scheme using two lines, working and protect. One of the two lines assumes the role of the primary channel, where traffic is selected, and the other line assumes the role of secondary channel, which protects the primary channel. Traffic switches from the primary channel to the secondary channel based on either line conditions or an external switching command performed by the user. After the line condition clears, the traffic remains on the secondary channel. The secondary channel is automatically renamed as the primary channel and the former primary channel is automatically renamed as the secondary channel.
Unlike 1+1 span protection, 1+1 optimized span protection does not use the revertive or nonrevertive feature. Also, 1+1 optimized span protection does not use the Manual switch command. The 1+1 optimized span protection scheme is supported only on the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET using either
OC3-4 cards or OC3-8 cards with ports that are provisioned for SDH payloads.
Optimized 1+1 is fully compliant with Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation (NTT) specifications. With optimized 1+1 port-to-port protection, ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card. The working and protect cards do not have to be
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 7-13
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.4 7.4 Unprotected Cards
installed side by side in the node. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of ports. For example, a four-port OC-3 must be paired with another four-port OC-3, and an eight-port OC-3 must be paired with another eight-port OC-3. You cannot create an optimized 1+1 protection group if the number of ports do not match, even if the OC-N rates are the same.
The protection takes place on the port level, and any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card. For example, on a four-port card, you can assign one port as a protection port on the protect card (protecting the corresponding port on the working card) and leave three ports unprotected. Conversely, you can assign three ports as protection ports and leave one port unprotected. With 1:1 or 1:N protection (electrical cards), the protect card must protect an entire slot. In other words, all the ports on the protect card are used in the protection scheme.
7.4 Unprotected Cards
Unprotected cards are not included in a protection scheme; therefore, a card failure or a signal error results in lost data. Because no bandwidth lies in reserve for protection, unprotected schemes maximize
the available ONS 15454 bandwidth. Figure 7-8
shows the ONS 15454 in an unprotected configuration.
All cards are in a working state.
Figure 7-8 ONS 15454 in an Unprotected Configuration
Unprotected
7.5 External Switching Commands
The external switching commands on the ONS 15454 are Manual, Force, and Lockout. If you choose a
Manual switch, the command will switch traffic only if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade (SD) bit error rate threshold. A Force switch will switch traffic even if the path has SD or signal fail (SF) conditions; however, a Force switch will not override an SF on a 1+1 protection channel.
7-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7.5 7.5 External Switching Commands
A Force switch has a higher priority than a Manual switch. Lockouts, which prevent traffic from switching to the protect port under any circumstance, can only be applied to protect cards (in 1+1 configurations). Lockouts have the highest priority. In a 1+1 configuration you can also apply a lock on to the working port. A working port with a lock on applied cannot switch traffic to the protect port in the protection group (pair). In 1:1 protection groups, working or protect ports can have a lock on.
Note
Force and Manual switches do not apply to 1:1 protection groups; these ports have a single switch command.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
7-15
7.5 7.5 External Switching Commands
Chapter 7 Card Protection
7-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
8
Cisco Transport Controller Operation
This chapter describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), the software interface for the
Cisco ONS 15454. For CTC set up and login information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure
Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods, page 8-1
8.2 CTC Installation Overview, page 8-3
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements, page 8-4
8.4 ONS 15454 Connection, page 8-6
•
•
•
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset, page 8-17
8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database, page 8-17
8.8 Software Revert, page 8-18
8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods
ONS 15454 provisioning and administration is performed using the CTC software. CTC is a Java application that is installed in two locations; CTC is stored on the Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) card or the Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card, and it is downloaded to your workstation the first time you log into the ONS 15454 with a new software release.
8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card
CTC software is preloaded on the ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P cards; therefore, you do not need to install software on the TCC2/TCC2P cards. When a new CTC software version is released, use the release-specific software upgrade document to upgrade the ONS 15454 software on the TCC2/TCC2P cards.
When you upgrade CTC software, the TCC2/TCC2P cards store the new CTC version as the protect CTC version. When you activate the new CTC software, the TCC2/TCC2P cards store the older CTC version as the protect CTC version, and the newer CTC release becomes the working version. You can view the software versions that are installed on an ONS 15454 by selecting the Maintenance > Software tabs in node view (
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 8-1
8.1 8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card
Figure 8-1
Software tab
CTC Software Versions, Node View
Maintenance tab
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
Select the Maintenance > Software tabs in network view to display the software versions installed on all the network nodes (
).
Figure 8-2 CTC Software Versions, Network View
Maintenance tab
8-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.2 8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation
8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation
CTC software is downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P cards and installed on your computer automatically after you connect to the ONS 15454 with a new software release for the first time. Downloading the CTC software files automatically ensures that your computer is running the same CTC software version as the
TCC2/TCC2P cards you are accessing. The CTC files are stored in the temporary directory designated by your computer operating system. You can use the Delete CTC Cache button to remove files stored in the temporary directory. If the files are deleted, they download the next time you connect to an ONS
15454. Downloading the Java archive (JAR) files for CTC takes several minutes depending on the bandwidth of the connection between your workstation and the ONS 15454. For example, JAR files downloaded from a modem or a data communications channel (DCC) network link require more time than JAR files downloaded over a LAN connection.
During network topology discovery, CTC polls each node in the network to determine which one contains the most recent version of the CTC software. If CTC discovers a node in the network that has a more recent version of the CTC software than the version you are currently running, CTC generates a message stating that a later version of the CTC has been found in the network and offers to install the
CTC software upgrade JAR files. If you have network discovery disabled, CTC will not seek more recent versions of the software. Unreachable nodes are not included in the upgrade discovery.
Note
Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software. You must restart CTC after the upgrade is complete.
8.2 CTC Installation Overview
To connect to an ONS 15454 using CTC, you enter the ONS 15454 IP address in the URL field of
Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer. After connecting to an ONS 15454, the following occurs automatically:
1.
A CTC launcher applet is downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P card to your computer.
2.
The launcher determines whether your computer has a CTC release matching the release on the
ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P card.
3.
4.
If the computer does not have CTC installed, or if the installed release is older than the
TCC2/TCC2P card’s version, the launcher downloads the CTC program files from the TCC2/TCC2P card.
The launcher starts CTC. The CTC session is separate from the web browser session, so the web browser is no longer needed. Always log into nodes having the latest software release. If you log into an ONS 15454 that is connected to ONS 15454s with older versions of CTC, or to
Cisco ONS 15327s or Cisco ONS 15600s, CTC files are downloaded automatically to enable you to interact with those nodes. The CTC file download occurs only when necessary, such as during your first login. You cannot interact with nodes on the network that have a software version later than the node that you used to launch CTC.
Each ONS 15454 can handle up to five concurrent CTC sessions. CTC performance can vary, depending on the volume of activity in each session, network bandwidth, and TCC2/TCC2P card load.
Note
You can also use TL1 commands to communicate with the Cisco ONS 15454 through VT100 terminals and VT100 emulation software, or you can telnet to an ONS 15454 using TL1 port 3083. Refer to the
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide for a comprehensive list of TL1 commands.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-3
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.3 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements
8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements
To use CTC for the ONS 15454, your computer must have a web browser with the correct Java Runtime
Environment (JRE) installed. The correct JRE for each CTC software release is included on the
Cisco ONS 15454 software CD. If you are running multiple CTC software releases on a network, the
JRE installed on the computer must be compatible with the different software releases.
You can change the JRE version on the Preferences dialog box JRE tab. When you change the JRE version on the JRE tab, you must exit and restart CTC for the new JRE version to take effect.
shows JRE compatibility with ONS 15454 software releases.
Table 8-1 JRE Compatibility
ONS Software Release
JRE 1.2.2
Compatible
ONS 15454 Release 2.2.1 and earlier Yes
ONS 15454 Release 2.2.2
ONS 15454 Release 3.0
Yes
Yes
ONS 15454 Release 3.1
ONS 15454 Release 3.2
ONS 15454 Release 3.3
ONS 15454 Release 3.4
ONS 15454 Release 4.0
ONS 15454 Release 4.1
ONS 15454 Release 4.5
ONS 15454 Release 4.6
ONS 15454 Release 5.0
ONS 15454 Release 6.0
ONS 15454 Release 7.0
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
JRE 1.3
Compatible
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
JRE 1.4
Compatible
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1.
Software Releases 4.0 and later notify you if an older version of the JRE is running on your PC or UNIX workstation.
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
JRE 5.0
Compatible
No
No
No
No
No
Note
To avoid network performance issues, Cisco recommends managing a maximum of 50 nodes concurrently with CTC. The 50 nodes can be on a single DCC or split across multiple DCCs. Cisco does not recommend running multiple CTC sessions when managing two or more large networks.
To manage more than 50 nodes, Cisco recommends using Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). If you do use CTC to manage more than 50 nodes, you can improve performance by adjusting the heap size; see the “General Troubleshooting” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide. You can also create login node groups; see the “Connect the PC and Log Into the GUI” chapter of the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
is included on the ONS 15454 software CD.
8-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.3 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements
Table 8-2
Area
Processor
(PC only)
RAM
Hard drive
Computer Requirements for CTC
Requirements
Pentium 4 processor or equivalent
512 MB or more
20 GB hard drive with 50 MB of space available
Operating system
•
PC: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Java Runtime
Environment
•
Workstation: Ultra 10 Sun running
SunOS 6, 7, or 8
JRE 1.4.2 or JRE 5.0
Notes
A faster CPU is recommended if your workstation runs multiple applications or if CTC manages a network with a large number of nodes and circuits.
A minimum of 1 GB is recommended if your workstation runs multiple applications or if CTC manages a network with a large number of nodes and circuits.
CTC application files are downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P to your computer’s Temp directory. These files occupy 5 to 10 MB of hard drive space.
—
JRE 1.4.2 is installed by the CTC
Installation Wizard included on the
Cisco ONS 15454 software CD.
JRE 1.4.2 and JRE 5.0 provide enhancements to CTC performance, especially for large networks with numerous circuits.
Cisco recommends that you use
JRE 1.4.2 or JRE 5.0 for networks with
Software R7.0 nodes. If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software R5.0 or R6.0, Cisco recommends JRE 1.4.2.If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software earlier than R5.0, Cisco recommends JRE 1.3.1_02.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-5
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.4 8.4 ONS 15454 Connection
Table 8-2 Computer Requirements for CTC (continued)
Area
Cable
Requirements
Web browser
•
PC: Internet Explorer 6.x, Netscape 7.x
•
UNIX Workstation: Mozilla 1.7 on
Solaris 8 and 9, Netscape 4.76,
Netscape 7.x
Notes
For the PC, use JRE 1.4.2 or JRE 5.0 with any supported web browser. Cisco recommends Internet Explorer 6.x. For
UNIX, use JRE 5.0 with Netscape 7.x or JRE 1.3.1_02 with Netscape 4.76.
User-supplied CAT-5 straight-through cable with RJ-45 connectors on each end to connect the computer to the ONS 15454 directly or through a LAN
—
Netscape 4.76 or 7.x is available at the following site: http://channels.netscape.com/ns/brows ers/default.jsp
Internet Explorer 6.x is available at the following site: http://www.microsoft.com
8.4 ONS 15454 Connection
You can connect to the ONS 15454 in multiple ways. You can connect your PC directly the ONS 15454
(local craft connection) using the RJ-45 port on the TCC2/TCC2P card or the LAN pins on the backplane, connect your PC to a hub or switch that is connected to the ONS 15454, connect to the ONS
15454 through a LAN or modem, or establish TL1 connections from a PC or TL1 terminal.
lists the ONS 15454 connection methods and requirements.
8-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5 CTC Window
Table 8-3 ONS 15454 Connection Methods
Method Description
Local craft Refers to onsite network connections between the CTC computer and the
ONS 15454 using one of the following:
•
The RJ-45 (LAN) port on the
TCC2/TCC2P card
Corporate
LAN
•
•
The LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane
A hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is connected
Refers to a connection to the ONS 15454 through a corporate or network operations center (NOC) LAN.
•
Requirements
If you do not use Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), you must change the computer IP address, subnet mask, and default router, or use automatic host detection.
The ONS 15454 must be provisioned for LAN connectivity, including IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
TL1
Remote
•
•
The ONS 15454 must be physically connected to the corporate LAN.
The CTC computer must be connected to the corporate LAN that has connectivity to the ONS 15454.
Refers to a connection to the ONS 15454 using TL1 rather than CTC. TL1 sessions can be started from CTC, or you can use a TL1 terminal. The physical connection can be a craft connection, corporate LAN, or a TL1 terminal.
Refer to the Cisco ONS SONET TL1
Reference Guide.
Refers to a connection made to the
ONS 15454 using a modem.
•
•
A modem must be connected to the
ONS 15454.
The modem must be provisioned for the ONS 15454. To run CTC, the modem must be provisioned for
Ethernet access.
8.5 CTC Window
The CTC window appears after you log into an ONS 15454 (
). The window includes a menu bar, a toolbar, and a top and bottom pane. The top pane provides status information about the selected objects and a graphic of the current view. The bottom pane provides tabs and subtab to view ONS 15454 information and perform ONS 15454 provisioning and maintenance. From this window you can display three ONS 15454 views: network, node, and card.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-7
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.1 Node View
Figure 8-3
Menu bar
Tool bar
Status area
Node View (Default Login View)
Graphic area
Tabs
Subtabs
Top pane
Bottom pane
Status bar
8.5.1 Node View
Node view, shown in Figure 8-3
, is the first view that appears after you log into an ONS 15454. The login node is the first node shown, and it is the “home view” for the session. Node view allows you to manage one ONS 15454 node. The status area shows the node name; IP address; session boot date and time; number of Critical (CR), Major (MJ), and Minor (MN) alarms; the name of the current logged-in user; and the security level of the user; software version; and the network element default setup.
8.5.1.1 CTC Card Colors
The graphic area of the CTC window depicts the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The colors of the cards in the graphic reflect the real-time status of the physical card and slot (
).
Table 8-4
Card Color
Gray
Violet
White
Yellow
Orange
Red
Node View Card Colors
Status
Slot is not provisioned; no card is installed.
Slot is provisioned; no card is installed.
Slot is provisioned; a functioning card is installed.
Slot is provisioned; a Minor alarm condition exists.
Slot is provisioned; a Major alarm condition exists.
Slot is provisioned; a Critical alarm exists.
The wording on a card in node view shows the status of a card (Active, Standby, Loading, or
Not Provisioned).
lists the card statuses.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-8 78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.1 Node View
Table 8-5
Card Status
Sby
Act
NP
Ldg
Mis
Node View Card Statuses
Description
Card is in standby mode.
Card is active.
Card is not present.
Card is resetting.
Card is mismatched.
The port color in both card and node view indicates the port service state.
Table 8-6 lists the port colors
and their service states. For more information about port service states, see
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States.”
Table 8-6 Node View Card Port Colors and Service States
Port Color
Blue
Blue
Gray
Service State
OOS-MA,LPBK
OOS-MA,MT
OOS-MA,DSBLD
Description
(Out-of-Service and Management, Loopback) Port is in a loopback state. On the card in node view, a line between ports indicates that the port is in terminal or facility loopback (see
and
Figure 8-5 on page 8-10 ). Traffic is carried and alarm reporting is
suppressed. Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are reported, can be retrieved on the CTC
Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND command.
(Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance) Port is out-of-service for maintenance. Traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. Alarm reporting is suppressed.
Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are reported, can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND command. Use OOS-MA,MT for testing or to suppress alarms temporarily. Change the state to IS-NR, OOS-MA,DSBLD, or OOS-AU,AINS when testing is complete.
(Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled) The port is out-of-service and unable to carry traffic. Loopbacks are not allowed in this service state.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-9
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.1 Node View
Table 8-6
Port Color
Green
Violet
Figure 8-4
Node View Card Port Colors and Service States (continued)
Service State
IS-NR
OOS-AU,AINS
Description
(In-Service and Normal) The port is fully operational and performing as provisioned. The port transmits a signal and displays alarms; loopbacks are not allowed.
(Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service)
The port is out-of-service, but traffic is carried. Alarm reporting is suppressed. The node monitors the ports for an error-free signal. After an error-free signal is detected, the port stays in OOS-AU,AINS state for the duration of the soak period. After the soak period ends, the port service state changes to IS-NR.
Raised fault conditions, whether or not their alarms are reported, can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND command. The AINS port will automatically transition to IS-NR when a signal is received for the length of time provisioned in the soak field.
Terminal Loopback Indicator
Figure 8-5 Facility Loopback Indicator
8.5.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts
If you move your mouse over cards in the graphic, popups display additional information about the card including the card type; the card status (active or standby); the type of alarm, such as Critical, Major, or
Minor (if any); and the alarm profile used by the card. Right-click a card to reveal a shortcut menu, which you can use to open, reset, delete, or change a card. Right-click a slot to preprovision a card (that is, provision a slot before installing the card).
8.5.1.3 Node View Tabs
Table 8-7 lists the tabs and subtabs available in the node view.
Table 8-7 Node View Tabs and Subtabs
Tab
Alarms
Conditions
Description
Displays a list of standing conditions on the node.
Subtabs
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the node and updates them in real time.
—
—
8-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.2 Network View
Table 8-7 Node View Tabs and Subtabs (continued)
Tab
History
Description
Provides a history of node alarms including date, type, and severity of each alarm. The Session subtab displays alarms and events for the current session. The Node subtab displays alarms and events retrieved from a fixed-size log on the node.
Subtabs
Session, Node
Circuits Creates, deletes, edits, and maps circuits and rolls.
Provisioning Provisions the ONS 15454 node.
Circuits, Rolls
Inventory Provides inventory information (part number, serial number, Common Language Equipment
Identification [CLEI] codes) for cards installed in the node. Allows you to delete and reset cards, and change card service state. For more information on card service states, see
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for the node.
General, Ether Bridge, Network,
OSI, BLSR, Protection, Security,
SNMP, Comm Channels, Timing,
Alarm Profiles, Cross-Connect,
Defaults, WDM-ANS
—
Database, Ether Bridge, OSI, BLSR,
Software, Cross-Connect, Overhead
XConnect, Protection, Diagnostic,
Timing, Audit, RIP Routing Table,
Routing Table, Test Access, DWDM
8.5.2 Network View
Network view allows you to view and manage ONS 15454s that have DCC connections to the node that you logged into and any login node groups you have selected (
).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-11
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.2 Network View
Figure 8-6 Network in CTC Network View
Bold letters indicate login node, asterisk indicates topology host
Icon color indicates node status
Dots indicate selected node
Note
Nodes with DCC connections to the login node do not appear if you checked the Disable Network
Discovery check box in the Login dialog box.
The graphic area displays a background image with colored ONS 15454 icons. A Superuser can set up the logical network view feature, which enables each user to see the same network view. Selecting a node or span in the graphic area displays information about the node and span in the status area.
8.5.2.1 Network View Tabs
Table 8-8 lists the tabs and subtabs available in network view.
Table 8-8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs
Tab
Alarms
Conditions
History
Circuits
Description
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the network and updates them in real time.
Subtabs
—
Displays a list of standing conditions on the network.
Provides a history of network alarms including date, type, and severity of each alarm.
Creates, deletes, edits, filters, and searches for network circuits and rolls.
—
—
Circuits, Rolls
8-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.2 Network View
Table 8-8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs (continued)
Tab Description Subtabs
Provisioning Provisions security, alarm profiles, bidirectional line switched rings (BLSRs), and overhead circuits.
Security, Alarm Profiles, BLSR,
Overhead Circuits, Provisionable
Patchcords (PPC)
Maintenance Displays the type of equipment and the status of each node in the network; displays working and protect software versions; and allows software to be downloaded.
Software
8.5.2.2 CTC Node Colors
The color of a node in network view, shown in
Table 8-9 , indicates the node alarm status.
Table 8-9 Node Status Shown in Network View
Color
Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
Gray with
Unknown#
Alarm Status
No alarms
Minor alarms
Major alarms
Critical alarms
Node initializing for the first time (CTC displays Unknown# because CTC has not discovered the name of the node yet)
8.5.2.3 DCC Links
The lines show DCC connections between the nodes (
Table 8-10 ). DCC connections can be green
(active) or gray (fail). The lines can also be solid (circuits can be routed through this link) or dashed
(circuits cannot be routed through this link). Circuit provisioning uses active/routable links.
Table 8-10 DCC Colors Indicating State in Network View
Color and Line Style
Green and solid
Green and dashed
Gray and solid
Gray and dashed
State
Active/Routable
Active/Nonroutable
Failed/Routable
Failed/Nonroutable
8.5.2.4 Link Consolidation
CTC provides the ability to consolidate the DCC, general communications channel (GCC), optical transport section (OTS), provisionable patchcord (PPC), and server trail links shown in the network view. Link consolidation allows you to condense multiple inter-nodal links into a single link. The link consolidation sorts links by class; for example, all DCC links are consolidated together.You can access individual links within consolidated links using the right-click shortcut menu.
Each link has an associated icon (
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 8-13
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.3 Card View
Table 8-11
Icon
Link Icons
Description
DCC icon
GCC icon
OTS icon
PPC icon
Server Trail icon
Note
Link consolidation is only available on non-detailed maps. Non-detailed maps display nodes in icon form instead of detailed form, meaning the nodes appear as rectangles with ports on the sides. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information about consolidated links.
8.5.3 Card View
The card view provides information about individual ONS 15454 cards. Use this window to perform card-specific maintenance and provisioning (
Figure 8-7 ). A graphic showing the ports on the card is
shown in the graphic area. The status area displays the node name, slot, number of alarms, card type, equipment type, and the card status (active or standby), card service state if the card is present, and port service state (described in
). The information that appears and the actions you can perform depend on the card. For more information about card service states, see
“Administrative and Service States.”
8-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
Figure 8-7 CTC Card View Showing a DS1 Card
Card identification and status
8.5 8.5.3 Card View
78-17191-01
Note
CTC provides a card view for all ONS 15454 cards except the TCC2, TCC2P, XCVT, XC10G, and
XC-VXC-10G cards. Provisioning for these common control cards occurs at the node view; therefore, no card view is necessary.
Use the card view tabs and subtabs shown in
Table 8-12 to provision and manage the ONS 15454. The
subtabs, fields, and information shown under each tab depend on the card type selected. The
Performance tab is not available for the Alarm Interface Controller-International (AIC-I) cards.
Table 8-12 Card View Tabs and Subtabs
Tab
Alarms
Conditions
History
Circuits
Description
Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the card and updates them in real time.
Displays a list of standing conditions on the card.
Provides a history of card alarms including date, object, port, and severity of each alarm.
Subtabs
—
—
Session (displays alarms and events for the current session), Card
(displays alarms and events retrieved from a fixed-size log on the card)
Creates, deletes, edits, and search circuits and rolls.
Circuits, Rolls
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-15
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.5 8.5.4 Print or Export CTC Data
Table 8-12 Card View Tabs and Subtabs (continued)
Tab Description
Provisioning Provisions an ONS 15454 card.
Inventory
Subtabs
DS-N and OC-N cards: Line, Line
Thresholds (different threshold options are available for DS-N and
OC-N cards), Elect Path Thresholds,
SONET Thresholds, or SONET STS, and Alarm Profiles
Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for the card.
TXP and MXP cards: Card, Line,
Line Thresholds (different threshold options are available for electrical and optical cards), Optics
Thresholds, OTN, Pluggable Port
Modules, and Alarm Profiles
DWDM cards (subtabs depend on card type): Optical Line, Optical
Chn, Optical Band, Optical
Amplifier, Parameters, Optics
Thresholds
Loopback, Info, Protection, J1 Path
Trace, AINS Soak (options depend on the card type), Automatic Laser
Shutdown (TXP and MXP cards only)
Performance Performs performance monitoring for the card. DS-N and OC-N cards: no subtabs
TXP and MXP cards: Optics PM,
Payload PM, OTN PM
DWDM cards (subtabs depend on card type): Optical Line, Optical
Chn, Optical Amplifier, Parameters,
Optics Thresholds
Displays an Inventory screen of the ports (TXP and MXP cards only).
—
Note
For TXP, MXP, and DWDM card information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
8.5.4 Print or Export CTC Data
You can use the File > Print or File > Export options to print or export CTC provisioning information for record keeping or troubleshooting. The functions can be performed in card, node, or network views.
The File > Print function sends the data to a local or network printer. File > Export exports the data to a file where it can be imported into other computer applications, such as spreadsheets and database management programs.
8-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.6 8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset
Whether you choose to print or export data, you can choose from the following options:
•
•
Entire frame—Prints or exports the entire CTC window including the graphical view of the card, node, or network. This option is available for all windows.
Tabbed view—Prints or exports the lower half of the CTC window containing tabs and data. The printout includes the selected tab (on top) and the data shown in the tab window. For example, if you print the History window Tabbed view, you print only history items appearing in the window. This option is available for all windows.
•
Table Contents—Prints or exports CTC data in table format without graphical representations of shelves, cards, or tabs. The Table Contents option prints all the data contained in a table with the same column headings. For example, if you print the History window Table Contents view, you print all data included in the table whether or not items appear in the window.
The Table Contents option does not apply to all windows; for a list of windows that do not support print or export, see the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset
You can reset the ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P card by using CTC (a soft reset) or by physically reseating a TCC2/TCC2P card (a hard reset). A soft reset reboots the TCC2/TCC2P card and reloads the operating system and the application software. Additionally, a hard reset temporarily removes power from the
TCC2/TCC2P card and clears all buffer memory.
You can apply a soft reset from CTC to either an active or standby TCC2/TCC2P card without affecting traffic. If you need to perform a hard reset on an active TCC2/TCC2P card, put the TCC2/TCC2P card into standby mode first by performing a soft reset.
Note
When a CTC reset is performed on an active TCC2/TCC2P card, the AIC-I cards go through an initialization process and also reset because AIC-I cards are controlled by the active TCC2/TCC2P.
8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database
When dual TCC2/TCC2P cards are installed in the ONS 15454, each TCC2/TCC2P card hosts a separate database; therefore, the protect card database is available if the database on the working TCC2/TCC2P fails. You can also store a backup version of the database on the workstation running CTC. This operation should be part of a regular ONS 15454 maintenance program at approximately weekly intervals, and should also be completed when preparing an ONS 15454 for a pending natural disaster, such as a flood or fire.
Note
The following parameters are not backed up and restored: node name, IP address, mask and gateway, and
Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) port. If you change the node name and then restore a backed up database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new node name. Cisco recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
8-17
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation
8.8 8.8 Software Revert
Note
To avoid a node IP and secure IP ending up in the same domain after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP stored in the database differs in domain from that of the node in repeater mode. Also, after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP and secure IP differ in domain.
8.8 Software Revert
When you click the Activate button after a software upgrade, the TCC2/TCC2P copies the current working database and saves it in a reserved location in the TCC2/TCC2P flash memory. If you later need to revert to the original working software load from the protect software load, the saved database installs automatically. You do not need to restore the database manually or recreate circuits.
Note
The TCC2/TCC2P card does not carry any software earlier than Software R4.0. You will not be able to revert to a software release earlier than Software R4.0 with TCC2/TCC2P cards installed.
The revert feature is useful if a maintenance window closes while you are upgrading CTC software. You can revert to the protect software load without losing traffic. When the next maintenance window opens, complete the upgrade and activate the new software load.
Circuits created and provisioning done after a software load is activated (upgraded to a higher software release) will be lost with a revert. The database configuration at the time of activation is reinstated after a revert. This does not apply to maintenance reverts (for example, 4.6.2 to 4.6.1), because maintenance releases use the same database.
To perform a supported (non-service-affecting) revert from Software R7.0, the release you want to revert to must have been working at the time you first activated Software R7.0 on that node. Because a supported revert automatically restores the node configuration at the time of the previous activation, any configuration changes made after activation will be lost when you revert the software. Downloading
Release 7.0 a second time after you have activated the new load ensures that no actual revert to a previous load can take place (the TCC2/TCC2P card will reset, but will not be traffic affecting and will not change your database).
8-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
9
Security
This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security. To provision security, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
9.1 User IDs and Security Levels, page 9-1
9.2 User Privileges and Policies, page 9-1
9.1 User IDs and Security Levels
The CISCO15 user ID is provided with the ONS 15454 for initial login to the node, but this user ID is not supplied in the prompt when you sign into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). This ID can be used to set up other ONS 15454 user IDs.
You can have up to 500 user IDs on one ONS 15454. Each CTC or Transaction Language One (TL1) user can be assigned one of the following security levels:
•
Retrieve—Users can retrieve and view CTC information but cannot set or modify parameters.
•
•
Maintenance—Users can access only the ONS 15454 maintenance options.
Provisioning—Users can access provisioning and maintenance options.
•
Superuser—Users can perform all of the functions of the other security levels as well as set names, passwords, and security levels for other users.
See
for idle user timeout information for each security level.
By default, multiple concurrent user ID sessions are permitted on the node; that is, multiple users can log into a node using the same user ID. However, you can provision the node to allow only a single login per user ID and prevent concurrent logins for all users.
9.2 User Privileges and Policies
This section lists user privileges for each CTC action and describes the security policies available to
Superusers for provisioning.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-1 78-17191-01
Chapter 9 Security
9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
Table 9-1
Table 9-1 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in node view.
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View
CTC Tab
Alarms
Subtab
—
Conditions —
History Session
Circuits
Shelf
Circuits
Rolls
Provisioning General
EtherBridge
Network
OSI
BLSR
Protection
[Subtab]:Actions
Synchronize/Filter/Delete
Cleared Alarms
Retrieve/Filter
Filter
Retrieve/Filter
Create/Edit/Delete
Filter/Search
Complete/ Force Valid Signal/
Finish
General: Edit
Multishelf Config: Edit
Power Monitor: Edit
Spanning trees: Edit
General: Edit
General: View
Static Routing:
Create/Edit/Delete
OSPF: Create/Edit/Delete
RIP: Create/Edit/Delete
Proxy: Create/Edit/Delete
Firewall: Create/Edit/Delete
Main Setup: Edit
TARP: Config: Edit
TARP: Static TDC:
Add/Edit/Delete
TARP: MAT:
Add/Edit/Remove
Routers: Setup: Edit
Routers: Subnets:
Edit/Enable/Disable
Tunnels: Create/Edit/Delete
Create/Edit/Delete/Upgrade
Ring Map/Squelch Table/RIP
Table
Create/Edit/Delete
Retrieve
X
1
X
X
X
—
2
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser
X X X
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Partial
3
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-2 78-17191-01
Chapter 9 Security
9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
Table 9-1
CTC Tab
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View (continued)
Subtab
Security
SNMP
Comm Channels
Timing
Alarm Profiles
Cross-Connect
Defaults
WDM-ANS
[Subtab]:Actions
Users: Create/Delete/Clear
Security Intrusion Alarm
Users: Edit
Active Logins: View/Logout/
Retrieve Last Activity Time
Policy: Edit/View
Access: Edit/View
RADIUS Server:
Create/Edit/Delete/Move Up/
Move Down/View
Legal Disclaimer: Edit
Create/Edit/Delete
Browse trap destinations
SDCC: Create/Edit/Delete
LDCC: Create/Edit/Delete
GCC: Create/Edit/Delete
OSC: OSC Terminations:
Create/Edit/Delete
OSC: DWDM Ring ID:
Create/Edit/Delete
PPC: Create/Edit/Delete
General: Edit
BITS Facilities: Edit
Alarm Behavior: Edit
Alarm Profile Editor:
Store/Delete
4
Alarm Profile Editor:
New/Load/Compare/Available/
Usage
Edit
Edit/Import
Reset/Export
Provisioning: Edit
Provisioning: Reset
Internal Patchcords:
Create/Edit/Delete/Commit/
Default Patchcords
Port Status: Launch ANS
Node Setup
Retrieve
—
Maintenance
—
Same user Same user
— —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
—
—
X
Provisioning
—
Same user
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
—
X
X
—
X
Superuser
X
All users
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-3
Chapter 9 Security
9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
Table 9-1
CTC Tab
Inventory
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View (continued)
Subtab
—
Maintenance Database
EtherBridge
Network
OSI
BLSR
Protection
Software
Cross-Connect
Overhead
XConnect
Diagnostic
[Subtab]:Actions
Delete
Reset
Backup
Restore
Spanning Trees
MAC Table: Retrieve
MAC Table: Clear/Clear All
Trunk Utilization: Refresh
Circuits: Refresh
Routing Table: Retrieve
RIP Routing Table: Retrieve
IS-IS RIB: Refresh
ES-IS RIB: Refresh
TDC: TID to NSAP/Flush
Dynamic Entries
TDC: Refresh
Edit/Reset
Switch/Lock out/Lockon/Clear/ Unlock
Download
Activate/Revert
Cards: Switch/Lock/Unlock
Resource Usage: Delete
View
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
Retrieve
—
—
Timing
Audit
Test Access
DWDM
Retrieve Tech Support Log
Lamp Test
Source: Edit
Report: View/Refresh
Retrieve
Archive
View
APC: Run/Disable/Refresh
WDM Span Check:
Edit/Retrieve Span Loss values/Reset
ROADM Power Monitoring:
Refresh
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
Maintenance Provisioning Superuser
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-4 78-17191-01
Chapter 9 Security
9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action
1.
The X symbol indicates that the user can perform the actions.
2.
The — symbol indicates that the privilege to perform an action is not available to the user.
3.
Provisioner user cannot change node name, contact, or AIS-V insertion on STS-1 signal degrade (SD) parameters.
4.
The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users, but the actions can be completely performed only by the users with the required security levels.
shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in network view.
ONS 15454 Security Levels—Network View Table 9-2
CTC Tab
Alarms
Conditions
History
Circuits
Subtab
—
—
—
Circuits
Rolls
[Subtab]: Actions
Synchronize/Filter/Delete cleared alarms
Retrieve/Filter
Filter
Create/Edit/Delete
Retrieve
X
Filter/Search
Complete, Force Valid Signal,
Finish
X
—
X
X
—
1
Maintenance
X
X
X
—
2
X
—
Provisioning Security
Alarm Profiles
Users: Create/Delete
Users: Edit
— —
Same user Same user
— Active logins:
Logout/Retrieve Last Activity
Time
—
Policy: Change
Store/Delete
3
New/Load/Compare/
Available/Usage
BLSR Create/Delete/Edit/Upgrade
Overhead Circuits Create/Delete/Edit/Merge
Provisionable
Patchcords (PPC)
Search
Create/Edit/Delete
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
Server Trails
Maintenance Software
Diagnostic
Create/Edit/Delete
Download/Cancel
OSPF Node Information:
Retrieve/Clear
—
—
X
—
X
X
Provisioning
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
Same user
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
Superuser
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
All users
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1.
The “X” indicates that the user can perform the actions.
2.
The
“—” indicates that the privilege to perform an action is not available to the user.
3.
The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users, but the actions can be completely performed only by the users with the required security levels.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-5
Chapter 9 Security
9.2 9.2.2 Security Policies
9.2.2 Security Policies
Users with Superuser security privileges can provision security policies on the ONS 15454. These security policies include idle user timeouts, password changes, password aging, and user lockout parameters. In addition, a Superuser can access the ONS 15454 through the TCC2/TCC2P RJ-45 port, the backplane LAN connection, or both.
9.2.2.1 Superuser Privileges for Provisioning Users
Superusers can grant permission to Provisioning users to retrieve audit logs, restore databases, clear performance monitoring (PM) parameters, activate software loads, and revert software loads. These privileges can only be set using CTC network element (NE) defaults, except the PM clearing privilege, which can be granted to a Provisioning user using the CTC Provisioning> Security > Access tabs. For more information about setting up Superuser privileges, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
9.2.2.2 Idle User Timeout
Each ONS 15454 CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes.
Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods, as shown in
. The user idle period can be modified by a Superuser; refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for instructions.
Table 9-3
Security Level
Superuser
Provisioning
Maintenance
Retrieve
ONS 15454 Default User Idle Times
Idle Time
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Unlimited
9.2.2.3 User Password, Login, and Access Policies
Superusers can view real-time lists of users who are logged into CTC or TL1 by node. Superusers can also provision the following password, login, and node access policies:
•
•
Password expirations and reuse—Superusers can specify when users must change and when they can reuse their passwords.
Locking out and disabling users—Superusers can provision the number of invalid logins that are allowed before locking out users and the length of time before inactive users are disabled.
•
Node access and user sessions—Superusers can limit the number of CTC sessions a user login can have to just one session. Superusers can also prohibit access to the ONS 15454 using the LAN or
TCC2/TCC2P RJ-45 connections.
In addition, a Superuser can select secure shell (SSH) instead of Telnet at the CTC Provisioning >
Security > Access tabs. SSH is a terminal-remote host Internet protocol that uses encrypted links. It provides authentication and secure communication over unsecure channels. Port 22 is the default port and cannot be changed. Superuser can also configure EMS and TL1 access states to secure and non-secure modes.
9-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 9 Security
9.3 9.3 Audit Trail
Note
The superuser cannot modify the privilege level of an active user. The CTC displays a warning message when the superuser attempts to modify the privilege level of an active user.
9.3 Audit Trail
The Cisco ONS 15454 maintains a Telcordia GR-839-CORE-compliant audit trail log that resides on the
TCC2/TCC2P card. Audit trails are useful for maintaining security, recovering lost transactions, and enforcing accountability. Accountability refers to tracing user activities; that is, associating a process or action with a specific user. The audit trail log shows who has accessed the system and what operations were performed during a given period of time. The log includes authorized Cisco support logins and logouts using the operating system command line interface (CLI), CTC, and TL1; the log also includes FTP actions, circuit creation/deletion, and user/system generated actions.
Event monitoring is also recorded in the audit log. An event is defined as the change in status of an network element. External events, internal events, attribute changes, and software upload/download activities are recorded in the audit trail.
To view the audit trail log, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. You can access the audit trail logs from any management interface (CTC, CTM, TL1).
The audit trail is stored in persistent memory and is not corrupted by processor switches, resets, or upgrades. However, if you remove both TCC2/TCC2P cards, the audit trail log is lost.
9.3.1 Audit Trail Log Entries
contains the columns listed in Audit Trail window.
Table 9-4 Audit Trail Window Columns
Heading
Date
Num
User
P/F
Operation
Explanation
Date when the action occurred
Incrementing count of actions
User ID that initiated the action
Pass/Fail (whether or not the action was executed)
Action that was taken
Audit trail records capture the following activities:
•
User—Name of the user performing the action
•
•
•
•
•
•
Host—Host from where the activity is logged
Device ID—IP address of the device involved in the activity
Application—Name of the application involved in the activity
Task—Name of the task involved in the activity (view a dialog box, apply configuration, etc.)
Connection Mode—Telnet, Console, SNMP
Category—Type of change (Hardware, Software, Configuration)
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-7
Chapter 9 Security
9.4 9.3.2 Audit Trail Capacities
•
•
•
•
Status—Status of the user action (Read, Initial, Successful, Timeout, Failed)
Time—Time of change
Message Type—Whether the event is Success/Failure type
Message Details—Description of the change
9.3.2 Audit Trail Capacities
The ONS 15454 is able to store 640 log entries. When this limit is reached, the oldest entries are overwritten with new events. When the log server is 80 percent full, an AUD-LOG-LOW condition is raised and logged (by way of CORBA/CTC).
When the log server reaches the maximum capacity of 640 entries and begins overwriting records that were not archived, an AUD-LOG-LOSS condition is raised and logged. This event indicates that audit trail records have been lost. Until you off-load the file, this event will not occur a second time regardless of the amount of entries that are overwritten by incoming data. To export the audit trail log, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
9.4 RADIUS Security
Users with Superuser security privileges can configure nodes to use Remote Authentication Dial In User
Service (RADIUS) authentication. Cisco Systems uses a strategy known as authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) for verifying the identity of, granting access to, and tracking the actions of remote users.
9.4.1 RADIUS Authentication
RADIUS is a system of distributed security that secures remote access to networks and network services against unauthorized access. RADIUS comprises three components:
•
•
A protocol with a frame format that utilizes User Datagram Protocol (UDP)/IP
A server
•
A client
The server runs on a central computer, typically at a customer site, while the clients reside in the dial-up access servers and can be distributed throughout the network.
An ONS 15454 node operates as a client of RADIUS. The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS servers, and then acting on the response that is returned. RADIUS servers are responsible for receiving user connection requests, authenticating the user, and returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service to the user. The RADIUS servers can act as proxy clients to other kinds of authentication servers. Transactions between the RADIUS client and server are authenticated through the use of a shared secret, which is never sent over the network. In addition, any user passwords are sent encrypted between the client and RADIUS server. This eliminates the possibility that someone monitoring an unsecured network could determine a user's password. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for detailed instructions for implementing
RADIUS authentication.
9-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 9 Security
9.4 9.4.2 Shared Secrets
9.4.2 Shared Secrets
A shared secret is a text string that serves as a password between:
•
A RADIUS client and RADIUS server
•
•
A RADIUS client and a RADIUS proxy
A RADIUS proxy and a RADIUS server
For a configuration that uses a RADIUS client, a RADIUS proxy, and a RADIUS server, the shared secret that is used between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS proxy can be different from the shared secret used between the RADIUS proxy and the RADIUS server.
Shared secrets are used to verify that RADIUS messages, with the exception of the Access-Request message, are sent by a RADIUS-enabled device that is configured with the same shared secret. Shared secrets also verify that the RADIUS message has not been modified in transit (message integrity). The shared secret is also used to encrypt some RADIUS attributes, such as User-Password and
Tunnel-Password.
When creating and using a shared secret:
•
Use the same case-sensitive shared secret on both RADIUS devices.
•
•
•
Use a different shared secret for each RADIUS server-RADIUS client pair.
To ensure a random shared secret, generate a random sequence at least 22 characters long.
•
You can use any standard alphanumeric and special characters.
You can use a shared secret of up to 128 characters in length. To protect your server and your
RADIUS clients from brute force attacks, use long shared secrets (more than 22 characters).
•
Make the shared secret a random sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation and change it often to protect your server and your RADIUS clients from dictionary attacks. Shared secrets should
contain characters from each of the three groups listed in Table 9-5 .
Table 9-5 Shared Secret Character Groups
Group
Letters (uppercase and lowercase)
Numerals
Symbols (all characters not defined as letters or numerals)
Examples
A, B, C, D and a, b, c, d
0, 1, 2, 3
Exclamation point (!), asterisk (*), colon (:)
The stronger your shared secret, the more secure are the attributes (for example, those used for passwords and encryption keys) that are encrypted with it. An example of a strong shared secret is
8d#>9fq4bV)H7%a3-zE13sW$hIa32M#m<PqAa72(.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
9-9
9.4 9.4.2 Shared Secrets
Chapter 9 Security
9-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
10
Timing
This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 SONET timing. To provision timing, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
10.1 Timing Parameters, page 10-1
10.2 Network Timing, page 10-2
10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging, page 10-3
10.1 Timing Parameters
SONET timing parameters must be set for each ONS 15454. Each ONS 15454 independently accepts its timing reference from one of three sources:
•
The building integrated timing supply (BITS) pins on the ONS 15454 backplane.
•
•
An OC-N card installed in the ONS 15454. The card is connected to a node that receives timing through a BITS source.
The internal ST3 clock on the TCC2/TCC2P card.
You can set ONS 15454 timing to one of three modes: external, line, or mixed. If timing is coming from the BITS pins, set ONS 15454 timing to external. If the timing comes from an OC-N card, set the timing to line. In typical ONS 15454 networks:
•
One node is set to external. The external node derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the
BITS backplane pins. The BITS source, in turn, derives its timing from a primary reference source
(PRS) such as a Stratum 1 clock or global positioning satellite (GPS) signal.
•
The other nodes are set to line. The line nodes derive timing from the externally timed node through the OC-N trunk (span) cards.
You can set three timing references for each ONS 15454. The first two references are typically two
BITS-level sources, or two line-level sources optically connected to a node with a BITS source. The third reference is usually assigned to the internal clock provided on every ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P card.
However, if you assign all three references to other timing sources, the internal clock is always available as a backup timing reference. The internal clock is a Stratum 3 (ST3), so if an ONS 15454 node becomes isolated, timing is maintained at the ST3 level.
The CTC Maintenance > Timing > Report tabs show current timing information for an ONS 15454, including the timing mode, clock state and status, switch type, and reference data.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
10-1 78-17191-01
Chapter 10 Timing
10.2 10.2 Network Timing
Caution
Mixed timing allows you to select both external and line timing sources. However, Cisco does not recommend its use because it can create timing loops. Use this mode with caution.
Note
Only one port can be used for timing related provisioning per line card on the Cisco ONS 15454 platform.
10.2 Network Timing
shows an ONS 15454 network timing setup example. Node 1 is set to external timing. Two timing references are set to BITS. These are Stratum 1 timing sources wired to the BITS input pins on the Node 1 backplane. The third reference is set to internal clock. The BITS output pins on the backplane of Node 3 are used to provide timing to outside equipment, such as a digital access line multiplexer.
In the example, Slots 5 and 6 contain the trunk (span) cards. Timing at Nodes 2, 3, and 4 is set to line, and the timing references are set to the trunk cards based on distance from the BITS source. Reference 1 is set to the trunk card closest to the BITS source. At Node 2, Reference 1 is Slot 5 because it is connected to Node 1. At Node 4, Reference 1 is set to Slot 6 because it is connected to Node 1. At
Node 3, Reference 1 could be either trunk card because they are an equal distance from Node 1.
10-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 10 Timing
10.3 10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging
Figure 10-1 ONS 15454 Timing Example
BITS1 source
BITS2 source
Node 1
Timing External
Ref 1: BITS1
Ref 2: BITS2
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)
Slot 5 Slot 6
Node 4
Timing Line
Ref 1: Slot 6
Ref 2: Slot 5
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)
Slot 6
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Node 2
Timing Line
Ref 1: Slot 5
Ref 2: Slot 6
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)
Slot 6
Slot 5
BITS1 out
BITS2 out
Node 3
Timing Line
Ref 1: Slot 5
Ref 2: Slot 6
Ref 3: Internal (ST3)
Third party equipment
10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging
Synchronization status messaging (SSM) is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops.
SSM messages are either Generation 1 or Generation 2. Generation 1 is the first and most widely deployed SSM message set. Generation 2 is a newer version. If you enable SSM for the ONS 15454, consult your timing reference documentation to determine which message set to use.
show the Generation 1 and Generation 2 message sets.
Table 10-1 SSM Generation 1 Message Set
Message Quality Description
PRS 1 Primary reference source—Stratum 1
STU 2 Synchronization traceability unknown
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
10-3
10.3 10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging
Table 10-1 SSM Generation 1 Message Set (continued)
Message Quality Description
ST2
ST3
3
4
Stratum 2
Stratum 3
SMC
ST4
DUS
RES
5
6
7
—
SONET minimum clock
Stratum 4
Do not use for timing synchronization
Reserved; quality level set by user
Table 10-2 SSM Generation 2 Message Set
Message Quality Description
PRS
STU
ST2
TNC
ST3E
ST3
SMC
ST4
DUS
RES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
Primary reference source—Stratum 1
Synchronization traceability unknown
Stratum 2
Transit node clock
Stratum 3E
Stratum 3
SONET minimum clock
Stratum 4
Do not use for timing synchronization
Reserved; quality level set by user
Chapter 10 Timing
10-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Circuits and Tunnels
C H A P T E R
11
78-17191-01
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15454 synchronous transport signal (STS), virtual tributary (VT), and virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuits and VT, data communications channel (DCC), and IP-encapsulated tunnels. To provision circuits and tunnels, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11.2 Circuit Properties, page 11-2
11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth, page 11-12
11.4 Portless Transmux, page 11-15
11.6 SDH Tunneling, page 11-18
11.7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits, page 11-18
11.8 Monitor Circuits, page 11-19
11.9 Path Protection Circuits, page 11-19
11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits, page 11-21
11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables, page 11-22
11.12 Section and Path Trace, page 11-23
11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte, page 11-24
11.14 Automatic Circuit Routing, page 11-26
11.15 Manual Circuit Routing, page 11-28
11.16 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing, page 11-32
11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits, page 11-33
11.18 Bridge and Roll, page 11-37
11.19 Merged Circuits, page 11-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-1
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.1 11.1 Overview
•
•
•
11.20 Reconfigured Circuits, page 11-43
11.21 VLAN Management, page 11-44
11.22 Server Trails, page 11-44
11.1 Overview
You can create circuits across and within ONS 15454 nodes and assign different attributes to circuits.
For example, you can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create one-way, two-way (bidirectional), or broadcast circuits.
Assign user-defined names to circuits.
Assign different circuit sizes.
Automatically or manually route circuits.
Automatically create multiple circuits with autoranging. VT tunnels do not use autoranging.
Provide full protection to the circuit path.
•
Provide only protected sources and destinations for circuits.
Define a secondary circuit source or destination that allows you to interoperate an ONS 15454 path protection with third-party equipment path protection configurations.
•
Set path protection circuits as revertive or nonrevertive.
You can provision circuits at either of the following points:
•
•
Before cards are installed. The ONS 15454 allows you to provision slots and circuits before installing the traffic cards.
After you preprovision the Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs) (also called provisionable port modules [PPMs]).
•
After cards and SFPs are installed and ports are in service. Circuits do not actually carry traffic until the cards and SFPs are installed and the ports are In-Service and Normal (IS-NR); Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OO-AU,AINS); or Out-of-Service and
Management, Maintenance (OOS-MA,MT). Circuits carry traffic as soon as the signal is received.
11.2 Circuit Properties
The ONS 15454 Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) Circuits window, which appears in network, node, and card view, is where you can view information about circuits. The Circuits window (
provides the following information:
•
Name—The name of the circuit. The circuit name can be manually assigned or automatically generated.
•
•
Type—The circuit types are STS (STS circuit), VT (VT circuit), VTT (VT tunnel), VAP (VT aggregation point), OCHNC (dense wavelength division multiplexing [DWDM] optical channel network connection; refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide),
STS-V (STS VCAT circuit), or VT-V (VT VCAT circuit).
Size—The circuit size. VT circuits are 1.5. STS circuit sizes are 1, 3c, 6c, 9c, 12c, 24c, 36c, 48c, and 192c. OCHNC sizes are Equipped non specific, Multi-rate, 2.5 Gbps No FEC (forward error correction), 2.5 Gbps FEC, 10 Gbps No FEC, and 10 Gbps FEC (OCHNC is DWDM only; refer to
11-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2 Circuit Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide). VCAT circuits are VT1.5-nv,
STS-1-nv, STS-3c-nv, and STS-12c-nv, where n is the number of members. For time slot availability on concatenated STSs, see the
“11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments” section on page 11-4
.
OCHNC Wlen—For OCHNCs, the wavelength provisioned for the optical channel network connection. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide.
Direction—The circuit direction, either two-way or one-way.
OCHNC Dir—For OCHNCs, the direction of the optical channel network connection, either east to west or west to east. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide.
Protection—The type of circuit protection. See the
“11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types” section on page 11-9
for a list of protection types.
Status—The circuit status. See the “11.2.2 Circuit Status” section on page 11-6
.
Source—The circuit source in the format: node/slot/port “port name”/STS/VT. (The port name appears in quotes.) Node and slot always appear; port “port name”/STS/VT might appear, depending on the source card, circuit type, and whether a name is assigned to the port. For the OC192-XFP and
MRC-12 cards, the port appears as port pluggable module (PPM)-port. If the circuit size is a concatenated size (3c, 6c, 12c, etc.), STSs used in the circuit are indicated by an ellipsis, for example, S7..9, (STSs 7, 8, and 9) or S10..12 (STS 10, 11, and 12).
•
•
•
Destination—The circuit destination in the same format as the circuit source.
# of VLANS—The number of VLANs used by an Ethernet circuit.
# of Spans—The number of internode links that constitute the circuit. Right-clicking the column shows a shortcut menu from which you can choose Span Details to show or hide circuit span detail.
For each node in the span, the span detail shows the node/slot (card type)/port/STS/VT.
State—The circuit state. See the “11.2.3 Circuit States” section on page 11-7 .
•
The Filter button allows you to filter the circuits in network, node, or card view based on circuit name, size, type, direction, and other attributes. In addition, you can export the Circuit window data in HTML, comma-separated values (CSV), or tab-separated values (TSV) format using the Export command from the File menu.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-3
11.2 11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments
Figure 11-1 ONS 15454 Circuit Window in Network View
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments
Table 11-1 shows the available time slot assignments for concatenated STSs when using CTC to
provision circuits.
Table 11-1 STS Mapping Using CTC
25
28
31
34
37
13
16
19
22
1
4
Starting
STS
7
10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STS-3c STS-6c STS-9c STS-12c STS-18c STS-24c STS-36c STS-48c STS-192c
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
11-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments
Table 11-1 STS Mapping Using CTC (continued)
73
76
79
82
85
61
64
67
70
43
46
49
52
55
58
Starting
STS
40
124
127
130
133
112
115
118
121
100
103
106
109
88
91
94
97
136
139
142
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STS-3c STS-6c STS-9c STS-12c STS-18c STS-24c STS-36c STS-48c STS-192c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-5
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.2 Circuit Status
Table 11-1 STS Mapping Using CTC (continued)
178
181
184
187
190
166
169
172
175
Starting
STS
145
148
151
154
157
160
163
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STS-3c STS-6c STS-9c STS-12c STS-18c STS-24c STS-36c STS-48c STS-192c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
11.2.2 Circuit Status
The circuit statuses that appear in the Circuit window Status column are generated by CTC based on conditions along the circuit path.
Table 11-2 shows the statuses that can appear in the Status column.
Table 11-2
Status
CREATING
DISCOVERED
DELETING
ONS 15454 Circuit Status
Definition/Activity
CTC is creating a circuit.
CTC created a circuit. All components are in place and a complete path exists from circuit source to destination.
CTC is deleting a circuit.
11-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.3 Circuit States
Table 11-2 ONS 15454 Circuit Status (continued)
Status
PARTIAL
Definition/Activity
A CTC-created circuit is missing a cross-connect or network span, a complete path from source to destinations does not exist, or an alarm interface panel (AIP) change occurred on one of the circuit nodes and the circuit is in need of repair. (AIPs store the node MAC address.)
In CTC, circuits are represented using cross-connects and network spans. If a network span is missing from a circuit, the circuit status is
PARTIAL. However, a PARTIAL status does not necessarily mean a circuit traffic failure has occurred, because traffic might flow on a protect path.
Network spans are in one of two states: up or down. On CTC circuit and network maps, up spans appear as green lines, and down spans appear as gray lines. If a failure occurs on a network span during a CTC session, the span remains on the network map but its color changes to gray to indicate that the span is down. If you restart your CTC session while the failure is active, the new CTC session cannot discover the span and its span line does not appear on the network map.
DISCOVERED_TL1
PARTIAL_TL1
Subsequently, circuits routed on a network span that goes down appear as DISCOVERED during the current CTC session, but appear as
PARTIAL to users who log in after the span failure.
A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like, CTC-created circuit is complete. A complete path from source to destinations exists.
A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like, CTC-created circuit is missing a cross-connect or circuit span (network link), and a complete path from source to destinations does not exist.
CONVERSION_PENDING An existing circuit in a topology upgrade is set to this state. The circuit returns to the DISCOVERED state once the topology upgrade is complete. For more information about topology upgrades, see
Chapter 12, “SONET Topologies and Upgrades.”
PENDING_MERGE Any new circuits created to represent an alternate path in a topology upgrade are set to this status to indicate that it is a temporary circuit.
These circuits can be deleted if a topology upgrade fails. For more information about topology upgrades, see
DROP_PENDING
ROLL_PENDING
A circuit is set to this status when a new circuit drop is being added.
A circuit roll is awaiting completion or cancellation.
11.2.3 Circuit States
The circuit service state is an aggregate of the cross-connect states within the circuit.
•
If all cross-connects in a circuit are in the In-Service and Normal (IS-NR) service state, the circuit service state is In-Service (IS).
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-7
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.3 Circuit States
•
•
PARTIAL is appended to the OOS circuit service state when circuit cross-connects state are mixed and not all in IS-NR. The OOS-PARTIAL state can occur during automatic or manual transitions between states. For example, OOS-PARTIAL appears if you assign the IS,AINS administrative state to a circuit with DS-1 or DS3XM cards as the source or destination. Some cross-connects transition to the IS-NR service state, while others transition to OOS-AU,AINS. OOS-PARTIAL can appear during a manual transition caused by an abnormal event such as a CTC crash or communication error, or if one of the cross-connects could not be changed. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Troubleshooting Guide for troubleshooting procedures. The OOS-PARTIAL circuit state does not apply to OCHNC circuit types.
You can assign a state to circuit cross-connects at two points:
•
•
If all cross-connects in a circuit are in an Out-of-Service (OOS) service state, such as Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance (OOS-MA,MT); Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled
(OOS-MA,DSBLD); or Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OOS-AU,AINS) service state, the circuit service state is Out-of-Service (OOS).
During circuit creation, you can set the state in the Create Circuit wizard.
After circuit creation, you can change a circuit state in the Edit Circuit window or from the
Tools > Circuits > Set Circuit State menu.
Note
After you have created an initial circuit in a CTC session, the subsequent circuit states default to the circuit state of the initial circuit, regardless of which nodes in the network the circuits traverse or the node.ckt.state default setting.
During circuit creation, you can apply a service state to the drop ports in a circuit; however, CTC does not apply a requested state other than IS-NR to drop ports if:
•
The port is a timing source.
•
•
The port is provisioned for orderwire or tunnel orderwire.
The port is provisioned as a DCC or DCC tunnel.
The port supports 1+1 or bidirectional line switched rings (BLSRs).
•
Circuits do not use the soak timer, but ports do. The soak period is the amount of time that the port remains in the OOS-AU,AINS service state after a signal is continuously received. When the cross-connects in a circuit are in the OOS-AU,AINS service state, the ONS 15454 monitors the cross-connects for an error-free signal. It changes the state of the circuit from OOS to IS or to
OOS-PARTIAL as each cross-connect assigned to the circuit path is completed. This allows you to provision a circuit using TL1, verify its path continuity, and prepare the port to go into service when it receives an error-free signal for the time specified in the port soak timer. Two common examples of state changes you see when provisioning circuits using CTC are:
•
When assigning the IS,AINS administrative state to cross-connects in VT circuits and VT tunnels, the source and destination ports on the VT circuits remain in the OOS-AU,AINS service state until an alarm-free signal is received for the duration of the soak timer. When the soak timer expires and an alarm-free signal is found, the VT source port and destination port service states change to IS-NR and the circuit service state becomes IS.
•
When assigning the IS,AINS administrative state to cross-connects in STS circuits, the circuit source and destination ports transition to the OOS-AU,AINS service state. When an alarm-free signal is received, the source and destination ports remain OOS-AU,AINS for the duration of the soak timer. After the port soak timer expires, STS source and destination ports change to IS-NR and the circuit service state changes to IS.
11-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types
To find the remaining port soak time, choose the Maintenance > AINS Soak tabs in card view and click the Retrieve button. If the port is in the OOS-AU,AINS state and has a good signal, the Time Until IS column shows the soak count down status. If the port is OOS-AU,AINS and has a bad signal, the
Time Until IS column indicates that the signal is bad. You must click the Retrieve button to obtain the latest time value.
For more information about port and cross-connect states, see
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types
The Protection column in the Circuit window shows the card (line) and SONET topology (path)
this column.
Table 11-3 Circuit Protection Types
Protection Type Description
1+1 The circuit is protected by a 1+1 protection group.
2F BLSR
4F BLSR
2F-PCA
4F-PCA
The circuit is protected by a two-fiber BLSR.
The circuit is protected by a four-fiber BLSR.
The circuit is routed on a protection channel access (PCA) path on a two-fiber
BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a four-fiber BLSR. PCA circuits are unprotected.
BLSR
DRI
N/A
PCA
The circuit is protected by a both a two-fiber and a four-fiber BLSR.
The circuit is protected by a dual-ring interconnection (DRI).
A circuit with connections on the same node is not protected.
The circuit is routed on a PCA path on both two-fiber and four-fiber BLSRs. PCA circuits are unprotected.
Protected
Unknown
The circuit is protected by diverse SONET topologies, for example, a BLSR and a path protection, or a path protection and 1+1 protection.
A circuit has a source and destination on different nodes and communication is down between the nodes. This protection type appears if not all circuit components are known.
Unprot (black) A circuit with a source and destination on different nodes is not protected.
Unprot (red) A circuit created as a fully protected circuit is no longer protected due to a system change, such as removal of a BLSR or 1+1 protection group.
UPSR
SPLITTER
The circuit is protected by a path protection.
The circuit is protected by the protect transponder (TXPP_MR_2.5G) splitter protection. For splitter information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Installation and Operations Guide.
Y-Cable The circuit is protected by a transponder or muxponder card Y-cable protection group. For more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and
Operations Guide.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-9
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window
11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window
You can edit a selected circuit using the Edit button on the Circuits window. The tabs that appear depend on the circuit chosen:
•
General—Displays general circuit information and allows you to edit the circuit name.
•
•
Drops—Allows you to add a drop to a unidirectional circuit. For more information, see the
“11.7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits” section on page 11-18
.
Monitors—Displays possible monitor sources and allows you to create a monitor circuit. For more information, see the
“11.8 Monitor Circuits” section on page 11-19 .
•
•
•
•
UPSR Selectors—Allows you to change path protection selectors. For more information, see the
“11.9 Path Protection Circuits” section on page 11-19
.
UPSR Switch Counts—Allows you to change path protection switch protection paths. For more information, see the
“11.9 Path Protection Circuits” section on page 11-19
.
State—Allows you to edit cross-connect service states.
Merge—Allows you to merge aligned circuits. For more information, see the “11.19 Merged
Circuits” section on page 11-42 .
Using the Export command from the File menu, you can export data from the UPSR Selectors,
UPSR Switch Counts, State, and Merge tabs in HTML, comma-separated values (CSV), or tab-separated values (TSV) format.
The Show Detailed Map checkbox in the Edit Circuit window updates the graphical view of the circuit to show more detailed routing information, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit direction (unidirectional/bidirectional)
The nodes, STSs, and VTs through which a circuit passes, including slots and port numbers
The circuit source and destination points
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area IDs
Link protection (path protection, unprotected, BLSR, 1+1) and bandwidth (OC-N)
Provisionable patchcords between two cards on the same node or different nodes
For BLSRs, the detailed map shows the number of BLSR fibers and the BLSR ring ID. For path protection configurations, the map shows the active and standby paths from circuit source to destination, and it also shows the working and protect paths. Selectors appear as pentagons on the detailed circuit map. The map indicates nodes set up as DRI nodes. For VCAT circuits, the detailed map is not available for an entire VCAT circuit. However, you can view the detailed map to see the circuit route for each individual member.
You can also view alarms and states on the circuit map, including:
•
•
•
•
•
Alarm states of nodes on the circuit route
Number of alarms on each node organized by severity
Port service states on the circuit route
Alarm state/color of most severe alarm on port
•
•
Loopbacks
Path trace states
Path selector states
11-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.2 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window
By default, the working path is indicated by a green, bidirectional arrow, and the protect path is indicated by a purple, bidirectional arrow. Source and destination ports are shown as circles with an S and D. Port states are indicated by colors, shown in
Table 11-4 Port State Color Indicators
Port Color
Green
Gray
Violet
Blue (Cyan)
Service State
IS-NR
OOS-MA,DSBLD
OOS-AU,AINS
OOS-MA,MT
In detailed view, a notation within or by the squares or selector pentagons indicates switches and loopbacks, including:
•
•
F = Force switch
M = Manual switch
•
•
Move the mouse cursor over nodes, ports, and spans to see tooltips with information including the number of alarms on a node (organized by severity), the port service state, and the protection topology.
Right-click a node, port, or span on the detailed circuit map to initiate certain circuit actions:
•
•
L = Lockout switch
Arrow = Facility (outward) or terminal (inward) loopback
Right-click a unidirectional circuit destination node to add a drop to the circuit.
Right-click a port containing a path-trace-capable card to initiate the path trace.
•
Right-click a path protection span to change the state of the path selectors in the path protection circuit.
Figure 11-2 shows a circuit routed on a two-fiber BLSR. A port is shown in terminal loopback.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-11
11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth
Figure 11-2 BLSR Circuit Displayed on the Detailed Circuit Map
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth
The ONS 15454 XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards perform port-to-port, time-division multiplexing (TDM). XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cards perform STS, VT2
(XC-VXC-10G only), and VT1.5 multiplexing.
The STS matrix on the XCVT cross-connect card has a capacity for 288 STS terminations, and the
XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards each have a capacity for 1152 STS terminations. Because each STS circuit requires a minimum of two terminations, one for ingress and one for egress, the XCVT card has a capacity for 144 STS circuits, while the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards have a capacity for 576 STS circuits. However, this capacity is reduced at path protection and 1+1 nodes because three STS terminations are required at circuit source and destination nodes and four terminations are required at
1+1 circuit pass-through nodes. path protection pass-through nodes only require two STS terminations.
The XCVT and XC10G cards perform VT1.5 multiplexing through 24 logical STS ports on the XCVT or XC10G VT matrix, and the XC-VXC-10G card performs VT1.5 and VT2 multiplexing through 96 logical STS ports on the XC-VXC-10G VT matrix. Each logical STS port can carry 28 VT1.5s or 21
VT2s. Subsequently, the VT matrix on the XCVT or XC10G has capacity for 672 VT1.5 terminations, or 336 VT1.5 circuits. The VT matrix on the XC-VXC-10G has capacity for 2688 VT1.5 terminations
(1344 VT1.5 bidirectional circuits) or 2016 VT2 terminations (1008 VT2 bidirectional circuits). Every circuit requires two terminations, one for ingress and one for egress. However, this capacity is only achievable if:
•
Every STS port on the VT matrix carries 28 VT1.5s or 21 VT2s.
•
The node is in a BLSR or 1+1 protection scheme.
11-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth
For example, if you create a VT1.5 circuit from an STS-1 on a drop card, two VT matrix STS ports are used, as shown in
. If you create a second VT1.5 circuit from the same STS port on the drop card, no additional logical STS ports are used on the VT matrix. In fact, you can create up to 28 VT1.5 circuits using the same STS-1 port. However, if the next VT1.5 circuit originates on a different STS, an
additional pair of STS ports on the VT matrix is used, as shown in Figure 11-4
. If you continued to create
VT1.5 circuits on different EC-1 STSs and mapped each to an unused outbound STS, the VT matrix capacity would be reached after you created 12 VT1.5 circuits in the case of the XCVT or XC10G cards, or 48 VT1.5 circuits in the case of the XC-VXC-10G card.
Figure 11-3 One VT1.5 Circuit on One STS
VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1
1 VT1.5 used on STS-1
27 VT1.5s available on STS-1
XCVT/XC10G Matrices
Source
STS Matrix
Drop
EC-1 OC-12
2 STSs total used
22 STSs available
VT1.5 Matrix
Source
VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1
1 VT1.5 used on STS-1
27 VT1.5s available on STS-1
XC-VXC-10G Matrices
STS Matrix
EC-1
2 STSs total used
94 STSs available
VT1.5 Matrix
OC-192
Drop
STS
VT1.5
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-13
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth
Figure 11-4
Source
Two VT1.5 Circuits in a BLSR
VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1
1 VT1.5 used on STS-1
27 VT1.5s available on STS-1
XCVT/XC10G Matrices
STS Matrix
Drop
EC-1 4 STSs total used
20 STSs available
VT1.5 Matrix
VT1.5 circuit #2 on STS-2
1 VT1.5 used on STS-2
27 VT1.5s available on STS-2
OC-12
Source
VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1
1 VT1.5 used on STS-1
27 VT1.5s available on STS-1
XC-VXC-10G Matrices
STS Matrix
Drop
EC-1 4 STSs total used
92 STSs available
VT1.5 Matrix
VT1.5 circuit #2 on STS-2
1 VT1.5 used on STS-2
27 VT1.5s available on STS-2
OC-192
STS
VT1.5
Note
Circuits with DS1-14 and DS1N-14 circuit sources or destinations use one STS port on the VT matrix.
Because you can only create 14 VT1.5 circuits from the DS-1 cards, 14 VT1.5s are unused on the VT matrix.
VT matrix capacity is also affected by SONET protection topology and node position within the circuit path. Matrix usage is slightly higher for path protection nodes than BLSR and 1+1 nodes. Circuits use two VT matrix ports at pass-through nodes if VT tunnels and aggregation points are not used. If the circuit is routed on a VT tunnel or an aggregation point, no VT matrix resources are used.
shows basic STS port usage rates for VT 1.5 circuits.
11-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.4 11.4 Portless Transmux
Table 11-5 VT Matrix Port Usage for One VT1.5 Circuit
Node Type
Circuit source or destination node
Circuit pass-through node without VT tunnel
Circuit pass-through node with VT tunnel
No Protection BLSR
2
2
0
2
2
0
Path Protection
3
2
0
1+1
2
2
0
Cross-connect card resources can be viewed on the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Resource Usage tab.
This tab shows:
•
•
STS-1 Matrix—The percent of STS matrix resources that are used. 288 STSs are available on XCVT cards; 1152 are available on XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards.
VT Matrix Ports—The percent of the VT matrix ports (logical STS ports) that are used. 24 ports are available on XCVT and XC10G cards. 96 ports are available on the XC-VXC-10G card. The
VT Port Matrix Detail shows the percent of each VT matrix port that is used.
•
VT Matrix—The percent of the total VT matrix terminations that are used. There are
672 terminations for the XCVT and XC10G cards. 672 is the number of logical STS VT matrix ports (24) multiplied by the number of VT1.5s per port (28). There are 2688 terminations for the
XC-VXC-10G card. 2688 is the number of logical STS VT matrix ports (96) multiplied by the number of VT1.5s per port (28).
To maximize resources on the cross-connect card VT matrix, keep the following points in mind as you provision circuits:
•
•
Use all 28 VT1.5s on a given port or STS before moving to the next port or STS.
Try to use EC-1, DS3XM, or OC-N cards as the VT1.5 circuit source and destination. VT1.5 circuits with DS-1-14 or DS1N-14 sources or destinations use a full port on the VT matrix even though only
14 VT1.5 circuits can be created.
•
Use VT tunnels and VT aggregation points to reduce VT matrix utilization. VT tunnels allow VT1.5 circuits to bypass the VT matrix on pass-through nodes. They are cross-connected as STSs and only go through the STS matrix. VT aggregation points allow multiple VT1.5 circuits to be aggregated onto a single STS to bypass the VT matrix at the aggregation node.
11.4 Portless Transmux
The DS3XM-12 card provides a portless transmux interface to change DS-3s into VT1.5s. For XCVT drop slots, the DS3XM-12 card provides a maximum of 6 portless transmux interfaces; for XCVT trunk slots and XC10G or XC-VXC-10G slots, the DS3XM-12 card provides a maximum of 12 portless transmux interfaces. If two ports are configured as portless transmux, CTC allows you to create a
DS3/STS1 circuit using one of these ports as the circuit end point. You can create separate DS1/VT1.5 circuits (up to 28) using the other port in this portless transmux pair.
When creating a circuit through the DS3XM-12 card, the portless pair blocks the mapped physical port(s); CTC does not display a blocked physical port in the source or destination drop-down list during circuit creation.
lists the portless transmux mapping for XCVT drop ports.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-15
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.5 11.5 DCC Tunnels
Table 11-6
Physical Port
1, 2
3, 4
5, 6
7, 8
9, 10
11, 12
Portless Transmux Mapping for XCVT Drop Ports
Portless Port Pair
13, 14
15, 16
17, 18
19, 20
21, 22
23, 24
Table 11-7 lists the portless transmux for XCVT trunk ports and for XC10G or XC-VXC-10G any-slot
ports.
Table 11-7 Portless Transmux Mapping for XCVT Trunk and XC10G or XC-VXC-10G Any-Slot
Ports
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
Physical Port
1
Portless Port Pair
13, 14
25, 26
15, 16
27, 28
17, 18
29, 30
19, 20
31, 32
21, 22
33, 34
23, 24
35, 36
11.5 DCC Tunnels
SONET provides four DCCs for network element (NE) operation, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P): one on the SONET Section layer (DCC1) and three on the SONET Line layer
(DCC2, DCC3, and DCC4). The ONS 15454 uses the Section DCC (SDCC) for ONS 15454 management and provisioning. An SDCC and Line DCC (LDCC) each provide 192 Kbps of bandwidth per channel.
The aggregate bandwidth of the three LDCCs is 576 Kbps. When multiple DCC channels exist between two neighboring nodes, the ONS 15454 balances traffic over the existing DCC channels using a load balancing algorithm. This algorithm chooses a DCC for packet transport by considering packet size and
DCC utilization. You can tunnel third-party SONET equipment across ONS 15454 networks using one of two tunneling methods: a traditional DCC tunnel or an IP-encapsulated tunnel.
11-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.5 11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels
11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels
In traditional DCC tunnels, you can use the three LDCCs and the SDCC (when not used for ONS 15454
DCC terminations). A traditional DCC tunnel endpoint is defined by slot, port, and DCC, where DCC can be either the SDCC or one of the LDCCs. You can link LDCCs to LDCCs and link SDCCs to SDCCs.
You can also link an SDCC to an LDCC, and an LDCC to an SDCC. To create a DCC tunnel, you connect the tunnel endpoints from one ONS 15454 optical port to another. Cisco recommends a maximum of
84 DCC tunnel connections for an ONS 15454.
shows the DCC tunnels that you can create using different OC-N cards.
Table 11-8 DCC Tunnels
Card
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310
OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8; all
OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards
DCC
DCC1
DCC1
DCC2
DCC3
DCC4
SONET Layer SONET Bytes
Section D1 - D3
Section
Line
D1 - D3
D4 - D6
Line
Line
D7 - D9
D10 - D12
Figure 11-5 shows a DCC tunnel example. Third-party equipment is connected to OC-3 cards at
Node 1/Slot 3/Port 1 and Node 3/Slot 3/Port 1. Each ONS 15454 node is connected by OC-48 trunk
(span) cards. In the example, three tunnel connections are created, one at Node 1 (OC-3 to OC-48), one at Node 2 (OC-48 to OC-48), and one at Node 3 (OC-48 to OC-3).
Figure 11-5 Traditional DCC Tunnel
Link 1
From (A)
Slot 3 (OC3)
Port 1, SDCC
To (B)
Slot 13 (OC48)
Port 1, Tunnel 1
Link 2
From (A)
Slot 12 (OC48)
Port 1, Tunnel 1
To (B)
Slot 13 (OC48)
Port 1, Tunnel 1
Link 3
From (A)
Slot 12 (OC48)
Port 1, Tunnel 1
To (B)
Slot 3 (OC3)
Port 1, SDCC
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3
78-17191-01
Third party equipment
When you create DCC tunnels, keep the following guidelines in mind:
•
•
Each ONS 15454 can have up to 84 DCC tunnel connections.
Each ONS 15454 can have up to 84 Section DCC terminations.
Third party equipment
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-17
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.6 11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels
•
•
•
A SDCC that is terminated cannot be used as a DCC tunnel endpoint.
A SDCC that is used as an DCC tunnel endpoint cannot be terminated.
All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional.
11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels
An IP-encapsulated tunnel puts an SDCC in an IP packet at a source node and dynamically routes the packet to a destination node. To compare traditional DCC tunnels with IP-encapsulated tunnels, a traditional DCC tunnel is configured as one dedicated path across a network and does not provide a failure recovery mechanism if the path is down. An IP-encapsulated tunnel is a virtual path, which adds protection when traffic travels between different networks.
IP-encapsulated tunneling has the potential of flooding the DCC network with traffic resulting in a degradation of performance for CTC. The data originating from an IP tunnel can be throttled to a user-specified rate, which is a percentage of the total SDCC bandwidth.
Each ONS 15454 supports up to ten IP-encapsulated tunnels. You can convert a traditional DCC tunnel to an IP-encapsulated tunnel or an IP-encapsulated tunnel to a traditional DCC tunnel. Only tunnels in the DISCOVERED status can be converted.
Caution
Converting from one tunnel type to the other is service-affecting.
11.6 SDH Tunneling
The Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP provides a SDH traffic transport solution with scalable SONET, data or DWDM multiservice capabilities. The SDH traffic is aggregated and transported across an ONS
15454 network, similar to the SONET TDM and data services. STM-1 to STM-64 payloads are transported over SONET from any port on a Cisco ONS 15454 OC-N card provisioned to support SDH signals. For more information on SDH tunneling, refer to the SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454
SONET MSPP Systems Application Note.
11.7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits
Unidirectional circuits can have multiple destinations for use in broadcast circuit schemes. In broadcast scenarios, one source transmits traffic to multiple destinations, but traffic is not returned to the source.
When you create a unidirectional circuit, the card that does not have its backplane receive (Rx) input terminated with a valid input signal generates a loss of signal (LOS) alarm. To mask the alarm, create an alarm profile suppressing the LOS alarm and apply the profile to the port that does not have its Rx input terminated.
11-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.8 11.8 Monitor Circuits
11.8 Monitor Circuits
Monitor circuits are secondary circuits that monitor traffic on primary bidirectional circuits.
shows an example of a monitor circuit. At Node 1, a VT1.5 is dropped from Port 1 of an EC1-12 card.
To monitor the VT1.5 traffic, plug test equipment into Port 2 of the EC1-12 card and provision a monitor
circuit to Port 2. Circuit monitors are one-way. The monitor circuit in Figure 11-6
monitors VT1.5 traffic received by Port 1 of the EC1-12 card.
Figure 11-6 VT1.5 Monitor Circuit Received at an EC1-12 Port
ONS 15454
Node 1
XC
ONS 15454
Node 2
XC
VT1.5 Drop
Class 5
Switch
Test Set
VT1.5 Monitor
Port 1
EC1-12
Port 2
OC-N OC-N DS1-14
Note
Monitor circuits cannot be used with Ethernet circuits.
11.9 Path Protection Circuits
Use the Edit Circuits window to change path protection selectors and switch protection paths
(
Figure 11-7 ). In the UPSR Selectors subtab in the Edit Circuits window, you can:
•
•
View the path protection circuit’s working and protection paths.
•
•
Edit the reversion time.
Set the hold-off timer.
Edit the Signal Fail/Signal Degrade (SF/SD) thresholds.
•
Change payload defect indication path (PDI-P) settings.
Note
The XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card supports VT switching based on SF and SD bit error rate (BER) thresholds. The XC10G and XCVT cross-connect cards do not support VT switching based on SF and
SD BER thresholds, and hence, in the path protection Selectors tab, the SF BER Level and SD BER
Level columns display "N/A" for these cards.
In the UPSR Switch Counts subtab, you can:
•
Perform maintenance switches on the circuit selector.
•
View switch counts for the selectors.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-19
11.9 11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits
Figure 11-7 Editing Path Protection Selectors
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits
If ONS 15454s are connected to a third-party network, you can create an open-ended path protection circuit to route a circuit through it. To do this, you create four circuits. One circuit is created on the source ONS 15454 network. This circuit has one source and two destinations, each destination provisioned to the ONS 15454 interface that is connected to the third-party network. The second and third circuits are created on the third-party network so that the circuit travels across the network on two diverse paths to the far end ONS 15454. At the destination node, the fourth circuit is created with two sources, one at each node interface connected to the third-party network. A selector at the destination node chooses between the two signals that arrive at the node, similar to a regular path protection circuit.
11.9.2 Go-and-Return Path Protection Routing
The go-and-return UPSR routing option allows you to route the path protection working path on one fiber pair and the protect path on a separate fiber pair (
Figure 11-8 ). The working path will always be
the shortest path. If a fault occurs, both the working and protection fibers are not affected. This feature only applies to bidirectional path protection circuits. The go-and-return option appears in the Circuit
Attributes panel of the Circuit Creation wizard.
11-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.10 11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits
Figure 11-8 Path Protection Go-and-Return Routing
Node A
Any network Any network
Node B
Go and Return working connection
Go and Return protecting connection
11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits
You can provision circuits to carry traffic on BLSR protection channels when conditions are fault-free.
Traffic routed on BLSR PCA circuits, called extra traffic, has lower priority than the traffic on the working channels and has no means for protection. During ring or span switches, PCA circuits are preempted and squelched. For example, in a two-fiber OC-48 BLSR, STSs 25 to 48 can carry extra traffic when no ring switches are active, but PCA circuits on these STSs are preempted when a ring switch occurs. When the conditions that caused the ring switch are remedied and the ring switch is removed,
PCA circuits are restored. If the BLSR is provisioned as revertive, this occurs automatically after the fault conditions are cleared and the reversion timer has expired.
Traffic provisioning on BLSR protection channels is performed during circuit provisioning. The
Protection Channel Access check box appears whenever Fully Protected Path is unchecked in the circuit creation wizard. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information. When provisioning PCA circuits, two considerations are important to keep in mind:
•
If BLSRs are provisioned as nonrevertive, PCA circuits are not restored automatically after a ring or span switch. You must switch the BLSR manually.
•
PCA circuits are routed on working channels when you upgrade a BLSR from a two-fiber to a four-fiber or from one optical speed to a higher optical speed. For example, if you upgrade a two-fiber OC-48 BLSR to an OC-192, STSs 25 to 48 on the OC-48 BLSR become working channels on the OC-192 BLSR.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-21
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.11 11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables
11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables
ONS 15454 nodes display STS and VT squelch tables depending on the type of circuits created. For example, if a fiber cut occurs, the BLSR squelch tables show STSs or VTs that will be squelched for every isolated node. Squelching replaces traffic by inserting the appropriate alarm indication signal path
(AIS-P) and prevents traffic misconnections. For an STS with a VT-access check mark, the AIS-P will be removed after 100 ms. To view the squelch tables, refer to the “Manage Circuits” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for detailed instructions. For more information about BLSR squelching, refer to Telcordia GR-1230.
11.11.1 BLSR STS Squelch Table
BLSR STS squelch tables show STSs that will be squelched for every isolated node.
The BLSR Squelch Table window displays the following information:
•
STS Number—Shows the BLSR STS numbers. For two-fiber BLSRs, the number of STSs is half the BLSR OC-N, for example, an OC-48 BLSR squelch table will show 24 STSs. For four-fiber
BLSRs, the number of STSs in the table is the same as the BLSR OC-N.
•
•
•
•
•
West Source—If traffic is received by the node on its west span, the BLSR node ID of the source appears. (To view the BLSR node IDs for all nodes in the ring, click the Ring Map button.)
West VT (from the West Source) — A check mark indicates that the STS carries incoming VT traffic. The traffic source is coming from the west side.
West VT (from the West Destination) — A check mark indicates that the STS carries outgoing VT traffic. The traffic is dropped on the west side.
West Dest—If traffic is sent on the node’s west span, the BLSR node ID of the destination appears.
•
•
•
East Source—If traffic is received by the node on its east span, the BLSR node ID of the source appears.
East VT — (from the East Source) - A check mark indicates that the STS carries incoming VT traffic. The traffic source is coming from the east side.
East VT — (from the East Destination) - A check mark indicate that the STS carries outgoing VT traffic. The traffic is dropped on the east side.
East Dest—If traffic is sent on the node’s east span, the BLSR node ID of the destination appears.
Note
BLSR squelching is performed on STSs that carry STS circuits only. Squelch table entries will not appear for STSs carrying VT circuits or Ethernet circuits to or from E-Series Ethernet cards provisioned in a multicard Ethergroup.
11.11.2 BLSR VT Squelch Table
BLSR VT squelch tables only appear on the node dropping VTs from a BLSR and are used to perform
VT-level squelching when a node is isolated. VT squelching is supported on the ONS 15454 and the
ONS 15327 platforms. The ONS 15600 platform does not support VT squelching; however, when an
ONS 15454 and an ONS 15600 are in the same network, the ONS 15600 node allows the ONS 15454 node to carry VT circuits in a VT tunnel. The ONS 15600 performs 100-ms STS-level squelching for each VT-access STS at the switching node in case of a node failure.
11-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.12 11.12 Section and Path Trace
When using a VT circuit on a VT tunnel (VTT), the VTT allows multiple VT circuits to be passed through on a single STS without consuming VT matrix resources on the cross-connect card. Both endpoints of the VTT are the source and destination nodes for the VTT. The node carrying VT circuits through a VTT is called a VT-access node. In case of a source and destination node failure of the VTT, the switching node performs 100-ms STS-level squelching for the VTT STS. The node dropping VT traffic performs VT-level squelching. VT traffic on the VTT that is not coming from the failed node is protected.
When using a VT circuit on a VT aggregation point (VAP), the VAP allows multiple VT circuits to be aggregated into a single STS without consuming VT matrix resources on the cross-connect card. The source for each VAP STS timeslot is the STS-grooming end where VT1.5 circuits are aggregated into a single STS. The destination for each VAP STS is the VT-grooming end where VT1.5 circuits originated.
The source node for each VT circuit on a VAP is the STS-grooming end where the VT1.5 circuits are aggregated into a single STS. The STS grooming node is not a VT-access node. The non VT-access node performs STS-level squelching for each STS timeslot at the switching node in case the VT-grooming node fails. The node dropping VT traffic performs VT-level squelching for each VT timeslot in case the
STS-grooming end node fails. No VT traffic on the VAP is protected during a failure of the
STS-grooming node or the VT-grooming node.
To view the VT squelch table, double-click the VT with a check mark in the BLSR STS squelch table window. The check mark appears on every VT-access STS; however, the VT-squelch table appears only by double-clicking the check mark on the node dropping the VT. The intermediate node of the VT does not maintain the VT-squelch table.
The VT squelch table provides the following information:
•
VT Number—Shows the BLSR VT numbers. The VT number includes VT group number and VT number in group (VT group 2 and channel 1 are displayed as 2-1.)
•
•
West Source—If traffic is received by the node on its west span, the BLSR node ID of the source appears. (To view the BLSR node IDs for all nodes in the ring, click the Ring Map button.)
East Source—If traffic is received by the node on its east span, the BLSR node ID of the source appears.
11.12 Section and Path Trace
SONET J0 section and J1 and J2 path trace are repeated, fixed-length strings composed of 16 or 64 consecutive bytes. You can use the strings to monitor interruptions or changes to circuit traffic.
The OC192-XFP and MRC-12 cards support J0 section trace.
shows the ONS 15454 cards that support J1 path trace. DS-1 and DS-3 cards can transmit and receive the J1 field, while the EC-1,
OC-3, OC-48 AS, and OC-192 can only receive the J1 bytes. Cards that are not listed in the table do not support the J1 byte. The DS3XM-12 card supports J2 path trace for VT circuits.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-23
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.13 11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte
Table 11-9 ONS 15454 Cards Capable of J1 Path Trace
J1 Function Cards
Transmit and Receive CE-Series
DS1-14
1
DS1N-14
DS1/EC1-56
DS3-12E
DS3i-N-12
Receive Only
DS3/EC1-48
DS3N-12E
DS3XM-6
DS3XM-12
FC_MR-4
G-Series
ML-Series
EC1-12
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310
OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310-8
OC12/STM4-4
OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310
OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550
OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310
OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550
OC192 IR/STM SH 1550
OC192-XFP
1.
J1 path trace is not supported for DS-1s used in VT circuits.
If the string received at a circuit drop port does not match the string the port expects to receive, an alarm is raised. Two path trace modes are available:
•
Automatic—The receiving port assumes that the first string it receives is the baseline string.
•
Manual—The receiving port uses a string that you manually enter as the baseline string.
11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte
One of the overhead bytes in the SONET frame is the C2 byte. The SONET standard defines the C2 byte as the path signal label. The purpose of this byte is to communicate the payload type being encapsulated by the STS path overhead (POH). The C2 byte functions similarly to EtherType and Logical Link Control
11-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
78-17191-01
11.13 11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte
(LLC)/Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) header fields on an Ethernet network; it allows a single interface to transport multiple payload types simultaneously. C2 byte hex values are provided in
Table 11-10 STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals
Hex Code
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x1B
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
Content of the STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE)
Unequipped
Equipped - nonspecific payload
VT structured STS-1 (DS-1)
Locked VT mode
Asynchronous mapping for DS-3
Asynchronous mapping for DS4NA
Mapping for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
Mapping for distributed queue dual bus (DQDB)
Asynchronous mapping for fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
High-level data link control (HDLC) over SONET mapping
Generic Frame Procedure (GFP) used by the FC_MR-4 and ML
Series cards
Reserved
0.181 test signal (TSS1 to TSS3) mapping SDH network
Alarm indication signal, path (AIS-P)
If a circuit is provisioned using a terminating card, the terminating card provides the C2 byte. A VT circuit is terminated at the XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G card, which generates the C2 byte (0x02) downstream to the STS terminating cards. The XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G card generates the C2 value (0x02) to the DS1 or DS3XM terminating card. If an optical circuit is created with no terminating cards, the test equipment must supply the path overhead in terminating mode. If the test equipment is in pass-through mode, the C2 values usually change rapidly between 0x00 and 0xFF. Adding a terminating card to an optical circuit usually fixes a circuit having C2 byte problems.
lists label assignments for signals with payload defects.
Table 11-11 STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals with Payload Defects
Hex Code
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
Content of the STS SPE
VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 1 VTx payload defect (STS-1 with 1 VTx PD)
STS-1 with 2 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 3 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 4 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 5 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 6 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 7 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 8 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 9 VTx PDs
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-25
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.14 11.14 Automatic Circuit Routing
Table 11-11
0xF7
0xF8
0xF9
0xFA
0xFB
0xFC
0xEF
0xF0
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF6
Hex Code
0xEA
0xEB
0xEC
0xED
0xEE
0xFF
STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals with Payload Defects (continued)
Content of the STS SPE
STS-1 with 10 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 11 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 12 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 13 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 14 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 15 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 16 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 17 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 18 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 19 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 20 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 21 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 22 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 23 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 24 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 25 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 26 VTx PDs
STS-1 with 27 VTx PDs
VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 28 VT1.5
(Payload defects or a non-VT-structured STS-1 or STS-Nc SPE with a payload defect.)
Reserved
11.14 Automatic Circuit Routing
If you select automatic routing during circuit creation, CTC routes the circuit by dividing the entire circuit route into segments based on protection domains. For unprotected segments of circuits provisioned as fully protected, CTC finds an alternate route to protect the segment, creating a virtual path protection. Each segment of a circuit path is a separate protection domain. Each protection domain is protected in a specific protection scheme including card protection (1+1, 1:1, etc.) or SONET topology
(path protection, BLSR, etc.).
The following list provides principles and characteristics of automatic circuit routing:
•
•
Circuit routing tries to use the shortest path within the user-specified or network-specified constraints. VT tunnels are preferable for VT circuits because VT tunnels are considered shortcuts when CTC calculates a circuit path in path-protected mesh networks.
If you do not choose Fully Path Protected during circuit creation, circuits can still contain protected segments. Because circuit routing always selects the shortest path, one or more links and/or segments can have some protection. CTC does not look at link protection while computing a path for unprotected circuits.
11-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.14 11.14.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit routing does not use links that are down. If you want all links to be considered for routing, do not create circuits when a link is down.
Circuit routing computes the shortest path when you add a new drop to an existing circuit. It tries to find the shortest path from the new drop to any nodes on the existing circuit.
If the network has a mixture of VT-capable nodes and VT-incapable nodes, CTC can automatically create a VT tunnel. Otherwise, CTC asks you whether a VT tunnel is needed.
To create protected circuits between topologies, install an XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card on the shared node.
For STS circuits, you can use portless transmux interfaces if a DS3XM-12 card is installed in the network. CTC automatically routes the circuit over the portless transmux interfaces on the specified node creating an end-to-end STS circuit.
11.14.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing
Within a given network, CTC routes circuits on the shortest possible path between source and destination based on the circuit attributes, such as protection and type. CTC considers using a link for the circuit only if the link meets the following requirements:
•
The link has sufficient bandwidth to support the circuit.
•
•
The link does not change the protection characteristics of the path.
The link has the required time slots to enforce the same time slot restrictions for BLSRs.
If CTC cannot find a link that meets these requirements, an error appears.
The same logic applies to VT circuits on VT tunnels. Circuit routing typically favors VT tunnels because
VT tunnels are shortcuts between a given source and destination. If the VT tunnel in the route is full (no more bandwidth), CTC asks whether you want to create an additional VT tunnel.
11.14.2 Secondary Sources and Destinations
CTC supports secondary circuit sources and destinations (drops). Secondary sources and destinations typically interconnect two third-party networks, as shown in
. Traffic is protected while it goes through a network of ONS 15454s.
Figure 11-9 Secondary Sources and Destinations
Primary source
Vendor A network
Secondary source
Primary destination
Vendor B network
Secondary destination
ONS 15454 network
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-27
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing
Several rules apply to secondary sources and destinations:
•
•
•
CTC does not allow a secondary destination for unidirectional circuits because you can always specify additional destinations after you create the circuit.
The sources and destinations cannot be DS-3, DS3XM, or DS-1-based STS-1s or VT1.5s.
•
Secondary sources and destinations are permitted only for regular STS/VT1.5 connections (not for
VT tunnels and multicard EtherSwitch circuits).
For point-to-point (straight) Ethernet circuits, only SONET STS endpoints can be specified as multiple sources or destinations.
For bidirectional circuits, CTC creates a path protection connection at the source node that allows traffic to be selected from one of the two sources on the ONS 15454 network. If you check the Fully Path
Protected option during circuit creation, traffic is protected within the ONS 15454 network. At the destination, another path protection connection is created to bridge traffic from the ONS 15454 network to the two destinations. A similar but opposite path exists for the reverse traffic flowing from the destinations to the sources.
For unidirectional circuits, a path protection drop-and-continue connection is created at the source node.
11.15 Manual Circuit Routing
Routing circuits manually allows you to:
•
•
•
Choose a specific path, not necessarily the shortest path.
Choose a specific STS/VT1.5 on each link along the route.
•
Create a shared packet ring for multicard EtherSwitch circuits.
Choose a protected path for multicard EtherSwitch circuits, allowing virtual path protection segments.
CTC imposes the following rules on manual routes:
•
All circuits, except multicard EtherSwitch circuits in a shared packet ring, should have links with a direction that flows from source to destination. This is true for multicard EtherSwitch circuits that are not in a shared packet ring.
•
If you enabled Fully Path Protected, choose a diverse protect (alternate) path for every unprotected segment (
).
11-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing
Figure 11-10
Unidirectional
Source
Alternate Paths for Virtual Path Protection Segments
Unidirectional
1+1
Twoway Twoway
Node 1 Node 2
Node 3 Node 4
Node 5 Node 6
BLSR ring
Node 7 Node 8
Node 9 Node 10
1+1
Node 11 Node 12
1+1
Twoway Twoway Twoway Twoway
Path Segment 1
Path/MESH protected
Needs alternate path
Path Segment 2
1+1 protected from N1 to N2
Path Segment 3
BLSR protected
Path Segment 4
1+1 protected
No need for alternate path
Twoway
Drop
Figure 11-11
Unidirectional
•
•
For multicard EtherSwitch circuits, the Fully Path Protected option is ignored.
For a node that has a path protection selector based on the links chosen, the input links to the path protection selectors cannot be 1+1 or BLSR protected (
). The same rule applies at the path protection bridge.
Mixing 1+1 or BLSR Protected Links With a Path Protection
Unidirectional Unidirectional
Unprotected
Unidirectional
Node 1
(source)
Node 2
(destination)
Node 3
BLSR ring
Node 4
Illegal
Node 1
(source)
Node 2
Unprotected
Node 3
Node 4
(destination)
Unprotected
Unidirectional Unidirectional
Unprotected
Node 1
(source)
Node 2
Unprotected
Legal
Unprotected
Node 3
Node 4
(destination)
1+1 protected
Unprotected
Illegal
•
In a shared packet ring, choose the links of multicard EtherSwitch circuits to route from source to destination back to source (
Figure 11-12 ). Otherwise, a route (set of links) chosen with loops is
invalid.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-29
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing
Figure 11-12
Ethernet source
Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing
Node 1 Node 2
Node 3 Node 4
Ethernet destination
•
Multicard EtherSwitch circuits can have virtual path protection segments if the source or destination is not in the path protection domain. This restriction also applies after circuit creation; therefore, if you create a circuit with path protection segments, Ethernet destinations cannot exist anywhere on the path protection segment (
).
Ethernet and Path Protection Figure 11-13
Source
Source
Node 2 Node 5 Node 6
Path Protection
Segment
Node 7 Node 8
Drop
Node 5 Node 6
Path Protection
Segment
Node 7 Node 8
Drop
Node 11 Node 11
Legal Illegal
•
A VT tunnel cannot be the endpoint of a path protection segment. A path protection segment endpoint is where the path protection selector resides.
If you provision full path protection, CTC verifies that the route selection is protected at all segments.
A route can have multiple protection domains with each domain protected by a different scheme.
through
Table 11-15 on page 11-31 summarize the available node connections. Any other
combination is invalid and generates an error.
Table 11-12 Bidirectional STS/VT/Regular Multicard EtherSwitch/Point-to-Point (Straight)
Ethernet Circuits
Connection Type
UPSR
UPSR
UPSR
UPSR
UPSR
UPSR
Double UPSR
2
1
1
—
2
Number of
Inbound Links
—
2
1
2
1
2
—
Number of
Outbound Links
2
—
—
—
—
2
—
Number of
Sources
1
—
—
—
2
—
—
Number of
Destinations
—
1
11-30
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing
Table 11-12
Connection Type
Double UPSR
Double UPSR
Two way
Ethernet
Ethernet
Bidirectional STS/VT/Regular Multicard EtherSwitch/Point-to-Point (Straight)
Ethernet Circuits (continued)
Number of
Inbound Links
2
—
1
0 or 1
Number of
Outbound Links
—
2
1
0 or 1
0 or 1 0 or 1
Number of
Sources
—
2
—
Ethernet node source
—
Number of
Destinations
2
—
—
—
Ethernet node drop
Table 11-13
Connection Type
One way
UPSR headend
UPSR headend
UPSR drop and continue
Unidirectional STS/VT Circuit
1
1
Number of
Inbound Links
—
2
1
2
Number of
Outbound Links
2
—
Number of
Sources
—
—
1
—
Number of
Destinations
—
—
—
1+
Table 11-14
Connection Type
Multicard Group Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Circuit
Number of
Inbound Links
At Intermediate Nodes Only
Double UPSR 2
Two way 1
At Source or Destination Nodes Only
Ethernet 1
2
1
Number of
Outbound Links
1
Number of
Sources
—
—
—
Table 11-15 Bidirectional VT Tunnels
Connection Type
Number of
Inbound Links
At Intermediate Nodes Only
UPSR 2
UPSR
Double UPSR
Two way
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
Number of
Outbound Links
Number of
Sources
—
—
—
—
Number of
Destinations
—
—
—
Number of
Destinations
—
—
—
—
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-31
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.16 11.16 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing
Table 11-15 Bidirectional VT Tunnels (continued)
Connection Type
At Source Nodes Only
Number of
Inbound Links
VT tunnel endpoint —
At Destination Nodes Only
VT tunnel endpoint 1
Number of
Outbound Links
1
—
Number of
Sources
—
—
Number of
Destinations
—
—
Although virtual path protection segments are possible in VT tunnels, VT tunnels are still considered unprotected. If you need to protect VT circuits, use two independent VT tunnels that are diversely routed or use a VT tunnel that is routed over 1+1, BLSR, or a mixture of 1+1 and BLSR links.
11.16 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing
When you create circuits, you can choose Fully Protected Path to protect the circuit from source to destination. The protection mechanism used depends on the path that CTC calculates for the circuit. If the network is composed entirely of BLSR or 1+1 links, or the path between source and destination can be entirely protected using 1+1 or BLSR links, no path-protected mesh network (PPMN), or virtual path protection is used.
If PPMN protection is needed to protect the path, set the level of node diversity for the PPMN portions of the complete path in the Circuit Routing Preferences area of the Circuit Creation dialog box:
•
Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths of each PPMN domain in the complete path have a diverse set of nodes.
•
•
Nodal Diversity Desired—CTC looks for a node diverse path; if a node-diverse path is not available,
CTC finds a link-diverse path for each PPMN domain in the complete path.
Link Diversity Only—Creates only a link-diverse path for each PPMN domain.
When you choose automatic circuit routing during circuit creation, you have the option to require or exclude nodes and links in the calculated route. You can use this option to achieve the following results:
•
Simplify manual routing, especially if the network is large and selecting every span is tedious. You can select a general route from source to destination and allow CTC to fill in the route details.
•
Balance network traffic. By default, CTC chooses the shortest path, which can load traffic on certain links while other links have most of their bandwidth available. By selecting a required node and/or a link, you force the CTC to use (or not use) an element, resulting in more efficient use of network resources.
CTC considers required nodes and links to be an ordered set of elements. CTC treats the source nodes of every required link as required nodes. When CTC calculates the path, it makes sure that the computed path traverses the required set of nodes and links and does not traverse excluded nodes and links.
The required nodes and links constraint is only used during the primary path computation and only for
PPMN domains/segments. The alternate path is computed normally; CTC uses excluded nodes/links when finding all primary and alternate paths on PPMNs.
11-32
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.17 11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits
11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits
Virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuits, also called VCAT groups (VCGs), transport traffic using noncontiguous TDM time slots, avoiding the bandwidth fragmentation problem that exists with contiguous concatenated (CCAT) circuits. The cards that support VCAT circuits are the CE-Series,
FC_MR-4 (both line rate and enhanced mode), and ML-Series cards.
In a VCAT circuit, circuit bandwidth is divided into smaller circuits called VCAT members. The individual members act as independent TDM circuits. All VCAT members should be the same size and must originate and terminate at the same end points. For two-fiber BLSR configurations, some members can be routed on protected time slots and others on PCA time slots.
To enable end-to-end connectivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, you must create a server trail between the ports. For more details, refer to the "Create Circuits and VT
Tunnels" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
11.17.1 VCAT Circuit States
The state of a VCAT circuit is an aggregate of its member circuits. You can view whether a VCAT member is In Group or Out of Group in the VCAT State column in the Edit Circuits window.
•
•
•
If all member circuits are in the IS state, the VCAT circuit state is IS.
If all In Group member circuits are in the OOS state, the VCAT circuit state is OOS.
•
If no member circuits exist or if all member circuits are Out of Group, the VCAT circuit state is
OOS.
A VCAT circuit is in OOS-PARTIAL state when In Group member states are mixed and not all are in the IS state.
11.17.2 VCAT Member Routing
The automatic and manual routing selection applies to the entire VCAT circuit, that is, all members are manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different members.
Two types of automatic and manual routing are available for VCAT members: common fiber routing and split routing. CE-Series, FC_MR-4 (both line rate and enhanced mode), and ML-Series cards support common fiber routing. In common fiber routing, all VCAT members travel on the same fibers, which eliminates delay between members. Three protection options are available for common fiber routing:
Fully Protected, PCA, and Unprotected.
shows an example of common fiber routing.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-33
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.17 11.17.2 VCAT Member Routing
Figure 11-14 VCAT Common Fiber Routing
VCAT
Function
Member 1
VCG-1
Member 2
STS-1
STS-2
CE-100T-8
VCAT
Function
Member 1
VCG-2
Member 2
STS-3
STS-4
Intermediate
NE
STS-1
STS-2
Member 1
VCG-1
Member 2
VCAT
Function
STS-3
STS-4
Member 1
VCG-2
Member 2
VCAT
Function
CE-100T-8
Figure 11-15
CE-Series cards also support split fiber routing, which allows the individual members to be routed on different fibers or each member to have different routing constraints. This mode offers the greatest bandwidth efficiency and also the possibility of differential delay, which is handled by the buffers on the terminating cards. Four protection options are available for split fiber routing: Fully Protected, PCA,
Unprotected, and DRI.
Figure 11-15 shows an example of split fiber routing.
VCAT Split Fiber Routing
Virtually
Concatenated
Group
Intermediate
NE
Member #1
Traffic
VCAT
Function
Source VCAT at NE
Intermediate
NE
Member #2
VCAT
Function with
Differential
Delay Buffer
Intermediate
NE
Member #3
Destination VCAT at NE
Traffic
In both common fiber and split fiber routing, each member can use a different protection scheme; however, for common fiber routing, CTC checks the combination to make sure that a valid route exists.
If it does not, the user must modify the protection type. In both common fiber and split fiber routing, intermediate nodes treat the VCAT members as normal circuits that are independently routed and protected by the SONET network. At the terminating nodes, these member circuits are multiplexed into a contiguous stream of data.
The switch time for split fiber routing depends on the type of circuits traversing the path.
•
CCAT circuits will carry traffic after the SONET defects are cleared.
•
VCAT circuits will carry traffic after the SONET defects are cleared and VCAT framers are in frame for ALL the time slots that are part of the group. Hence the switchover takes extra time.
•
LCAS circuits will carry traffic after the SONET defects are cleared, the VCAT framers are in frame, for ALL the time slots that are part of the group, and the LCAS protocol has fed back MST=OK
(MST=Member Status) to the far end so the far end can enable the time slot to carry traffic. The MST frame takes 64ms for high-order and 128ms for low-order VCAT. Hence VCAT LCAS circuit switchover takes longer time.
11-34
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.17 11.17.3 Link Capacity Adjustment
11.17.3 Link Capacity Adjustment
The CE-100T-8 card supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), which is a signaling protocol that allows dynamic bandwidth adjustment of VCAT circuits. When a member fails, a brief traffic hit occurs. LCAS temporarily removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit for the duration of the failure, leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic. When the failure clears, the member circuit is automatically added back into the VCAT circuit without affecting traffic. You can select LCAS during VCAT circuit creation.
Note
Although LCAS operations are errorless, a SONET error can affect one or more VCAT members. If this occurs, the VCAT Group Degraded (VCG-DEG) alarm is raised. For information on clearing this alarm, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide.
Instead of LCAS, the FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode), CE-1000-4 card, and ML-Series cards support software LCAS (SW-LCAS). SW-LCAS is a limited form of LCAS that allows the VCAT circuit to adapt to member failures and keep traffic flowing at a reduced bandwidth. SW-LCAS uses legacy SONET failure indicators like AIS-P and remote defect indication, path (RDI-P) to detect member failure.
SW-LCAS removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit, leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic. When the failure clears, the member circuit is automatically added back into the VCAT circuit. For ML-Series cards, SW-LCAS allows circuit pairing over two-fiber BLSRs. With circuit pairing, a VCAT circuit is set up between two ML-Series cards: one is a protected circuit (line protection) and the other is a PCA circuit. For four-fiber BLSRs, member protection cannot be mixed.
You select SW-LCAS during VCAT circuit creation. The FC_MR-4 (line rate mode) does not support
SW-LCAS.
In addition, you can create non-LCAS VCAT circuits, which do not use LCAS or SW-LCAS. While
LCAS and SW-LCAS member cross-connects can be in different service states, all In Group non-LCAS members must have cross-connects in the same service state. A non-LCAS circuit can mix Out of Group and In Group members, as long as the In Group members are in the same service state. Non-LCAS members do not support the OOS-MA,OOG service state; to put a non-LCAS member in the Out of Group VCAT state, use the OOS-MA,DSBLD administrative state.
Note
Protection switching for LCAS, SW-LCAS, and non-LCAS VCAT circuits might exceed 60ms. Traffic loss for VT VCAT circuits is approximately two times more than an STS VCAT circuit. You can minimize traffic loss by reducing path differential delay.
11.17.4 VCAT Circuit Size
Table 11-16 lists supported VCAT circuit rates and number of members for each card.
Table 11-16 ONS 15454 Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members
Card Circuit Rate
CE-100T-8 VT1.5
CE-1000-4
STS-1
STS-1
STS-3
Number of Members
1–64
1–3
1
1–21
1–7
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-35
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.17 11.17.4 VCAT Circuit Size
Table 11-16 ONS 15454 Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members (continued)
Card
FC_MR-4 (line rate mode)
FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode)
Circuit Rate
STS-1
STS-3c
STS-1
STS-3c
Number of Members
24 (1 Gbps port)
48 (2 Gbps port)
8 (1 Gbps port)
16 (2 Gbps port)
1–24 (1 Gbps port)
1–48 (2 Gbps port)
1–8 (1 Gbps port)
1–16 (2 Gbps port)
2 ML-Series STS-1, STS-3c,
STS-12c
1.
A VCAT circuit with a CE-Series card as a source or destination and an ML-Series card as a source or destination can have only two members.
Use the Members tab in the Edit Circuit window to add or delete members from a VCAT circuit. The capability to add or delete members depends on the card and whether the VCAT circuit is LCAS,
SW-LCAS, or non-LCAS.
•
•
CE-100T-8 cards—You can add or delete members to an LCAS VCAT circuit without affecting service. Before deleting a member of an LCAS VCAT circuit, Cisco recommends that you put the member in the OOS-MA,OOG service state. If you create non-LCAS VCAT circuits, adding and deleting members to the circuit is possible, but service-affecting.
CE-1000-4 cards—You can add or delete SW-LCAS VCAT members, although it might affect service. Before deleting a member, Cisco recommends that you put the member in the
OOS-MA,OOG service state. If you create non-LCAS VCAT circuits, adding and deleting members to the circuit is possible, but service-affecting.
•
•
FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode) card—You can add or delete SW-LCAS VCAT members, although it might affect service. Before deleting a member, Cisco recommends that you put the member in the
OOS-MA,OOG service state. You cannot add or delete members from non-LCAS VCAT circuits on
FC_MR-4 cards.
FC_MR-4 (line mode) card—All VCAT circuits using FC_MR-4 (line mode) cards have a fixed number of members; you cannot add or delete members.
•
ML-Series cards—All VCAT circuits using ML-Series cards have a fixed number of members; you cannot add or delete members.
summarizes the VCAT capabilities for each card.
Table 11-17
Card
CE-100T-8
ONS 15454 VCAT Card Capabilities
Mode
LCAS
SW-LCAS
Non-LCAS
Add a
Member
Yes
1
No
Yes
2
Delete a
Member
Yes
No
Yes
Support
OOS-MA,OOG
Yes
No
No
11-36
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.18 11.18 Bridge and Roll
Table 11-17 ONS 15454 VCAT Card Capabilities (continued)
Card
CE-1000-4
Mode
LCAS
SW-LCAS
Non-LCAS
FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode) SW-LCAS
Non-LCAS
FC_MR-4 (line mode) Non-LCAS
ML-Series SW-LCAS
Non-LCAS
No
No
No
Add a
Member
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Delete a
Member
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Support
OOS-MA,OOG
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
1.
When adding or deleting a member from an LCAS VCAT circuit, Cisco recommends that you first put the member in the OOS-MA,OOG service state to avoid service disruptions.
2.
For CE-Series cards, you can add or delete members after creating a VCAT circuit with no protection. During the time it takes to add or delete members (from seconds to minutes), the entire VCAT circuit will be unable to carry traffic.
11.18 Bridge and Roll
The CTC Bridge and Roll wizard reroutes live traffic without interrupting service. The bridge process takes traffic from a designated “roll from” facility and establishes a cross-connect to the designated “roll to” facility. When the bridged signal at the receiving end point is verified, the roll process creates a new cross-connect to receive the new signal. When the roll completes, the original cross-connects are released. You can use the bridge and roll feature for maintenance functions such as card or facility replacement, or for load balancing. You can perform a bridge and roll on the following ONS platforms:
ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15600, ONS 15327, and ONS 15310-CL.
11.18.1 Rolls Window
The Rolls window lists information about a rolled circuit before the roll process is complete. You can access the Rolls window by clicking the Circuits > Rolls tabs in either network or node view.
shows the Rolls window.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-37
11.18 11.18.1 Rolls Window
Figure 11-16 Rolls Window
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
The Rolls window information includes:
•
•
Roll From Circuit—The circuit that has connections that will no longer be used when the roll process is complete.
Roll To Circuit—The circuit that will carry the traffic after the roll process is complete. The
Roll To Circuit is the same as the Roll From Circuit if a single circuit is involved in a roll.
•
•
•
Roll State—The roll status; see the “11.18.2 Roll Status” section on page 11-39
.
Roll Valid Signal—If the Roll Valid Signal status is true, a valid signal was found on the new port.
If the Roll Valid Signal status is false, a valid signal was not found. It is not possible to get a
Roll Valid Signal status of true for a one-way destination roll.
Roll Mode—The mode indicates whether the roll is automatic or manual.
Note
CTC implements a roll mode at the circuit level. TL1 implements a roll mode at the cross-connect level. If a single roll is performed, CTC and TL1 behave the same. If a dual roll is performed, the roll mode specified in CTC might be different than the roll mode retrieved in TL1. For example, if you select Automatic, CTC coordinates the two rolls to minimize possible traffic hits by using the Manual mode behind the scenes. When both rolls have a good signal, CTC signals the nodes to complete the roll.
•
–
–
Automatic—When a valid signal is received on the new path, CTC completes the roll on the node automatically. One-way source rolls are always automatic.
Manual—You must complete a manual roll after a valid signal is received. One-way destination rolls are always manual.
Roll Path—The fixed point of the roll object.
11-38
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.18 11.18.2 Roll Status
•
•
•
•
•
Roll From Circuit—The circuit that has connections that will no longer be used when the process is complete.
Roll From Path— The old path that is being rerouted.
Roll To Path—The new path where the Roll From Path is rerouted.
Complete—Completes a manual roll after a valid signal is received. You can do this when a manual roll is in a ROLL_PENDING status and you have not yet completed the roll or have not cancelled its sibling roll.
Force Valid Signal—Forces a roll onto the Roll To Circuit destination without a valid signal.
Note
If you choose Force Valid Signal, traffic on the circuit that is involved in the roll will be dropped when the roll is completed.
•
•
Finish—Completes the circuit processing of both manual and automatic rolls and changes the circuit status from ROLL_PENDING to DISCOVERED. After a roll, the Finish button also removes any cross-connects that are no longer used from the Roll From Circuit field.
Cancel—Cancels the roll process.
Note
When the roll mode is Manual, cancelling a roll is only allowed before you click the
Complete button. When the roll mode is Auto, cancelling a roll is only allowed before a good signal is detected by the node or before clicking the Force Valid Signal button.
11.18.2 Roll Status
Table 11-18 lists the roll statuses.
Table 11-18 Roll Statuses
State
ROLL_PENDING
ROLL_COMPLETED
ROLL_CANCELLED
TL1_ROLL
INCOMPLETE
Description
Roll is awaiting completion or cancellation.
Roll is complete. Click the Finish button.
Roll has been canceled.
A TL1 roll was initiated.
Note
If a roll is created using TL1, a CTC user cannot complete or cancel the roll. Also, if a roll is created using CTC, a TL1 user cannot complete or cancel the roll. You must use the same interface to complete or change a roll.
This state appears when the underlying circuit becomes incomplete. To correct this state, you must fix the underlying circuit problem before the roll state will change.
For example, a circuit traveling on Nodes A, B, and C can become
INCOMPLETE if Node B is rebooted. The cross-connect information is lost on Node B during a reboot. The Roll State on Nodes A and C will change to INCOMPLETE.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-39
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.18 11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls
Note
You can only reroute circuits in the DISCOVERED status. You cannot reroute circuits that are in the
ROLL_PENDING status.
11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls
Circuits have an additional layer of roll types: single and dual. A single roll on a circuit is a roll on one of its cross-connects. Use a single roll to:
•
•
Change either the source or destination of a selected circuit (
Figure 11-17 and Figure 11-18 ,
respectively).
new destination or a new source.
In
Figure 11-17 , you can select any available STS on Node 1 for a new source.
Figure 11-17 Single Source Roll
S1
Node 1 Node 2 D
S2
Original leg
New leg
In
Figure 11-18 , you can select any available STS on Node 2 for a new destination.
Figure 11-18 Single Destination Roll
S
Node 1 Node 2
D1
Original leg
New leg
D2
Figure 11-19 shows one circuit rolling onto another circuit at the destination. The new circuit has
cross-connects on Node 1, Node 3, and Node 4. CTC deletes the cross-connect on Node 2 after the roll.
11-40
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.18 11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls
78-17191-01
Figure 11-19 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit (Destination Changes)
S
Node 1 Node 2
D
Node 3 Node 4
D2
Original leg
New leg
shows one circuit rolling onto another circuit at the source.
Figure 11-20 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit (Source Changes)
S
Node 1 Node 2
D
S2 Node 3 Node 4
Original leg
New leg
Note
Create a Roll To Circuit before rolling a circuit with the source on Node 3 and the destination on Node 4.
A dual roll involves two cross-connects. It allows you to reroute intermediate segments of a circuit, but keep the original source and destination. If the new segments require new cross-connects, use the Bridge and Roll wizard or create a new circuit and then perform a roll.
Dual rolls have several constraints:
•
•
You must complete or cancel both cross-connects rolled in a dual roll. You cannot complete one roll and cancel the other roll.
When a Roll To circuit is involved in the dual roll, the first roll must roll onto the source of the
Roll To circuit and the second roll must roll onto the destination of the Roll To circuit.
illustrates a dual roll on the same circuit.
Figure 11-21 Dual Roll to Reroute a Link
S
Node 1 Node 2
D
Original leg
New leg
illustrates a dual roll involving two circuits.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-41
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.19 11.18.4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll
Figure 11-22 Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node
S
Node 1 Node 2
Node 3 Node 4
D
Original leg
New leg
Note
If a new segment is created on Nodes 3 and 4 using the Bridge and Roll wizard, the created circuit has the same name as the original circuit with the suffix _ROLL**. The circuit source is on Node 3 and the circuit destination is on Node 4.
11.18.4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll
When using the bridge and roll feature to reroute traffic using two circuits, the following constraints apply:
•
•
•
DCC must be enabled on the circuits involved in a roll before roll creation.
A maximum of two rolls can exist between any two circuits.
•
If two rolls are involved between two circuits, both rolls must be on the original circuit. The second circuit should not carry live traffic. The two rolls loop from the second circuit back to the original circuit. The roll mode of the two rolls must be identical (either automatic or manual).
If a single roll exists on a circuit, you must roll the connection onto the source or the destination of the second circuit and not an intermediate node in the circuit.
11.18.5 Protected Circuits
CTC allows you to roll the working or protect path regardless of which path is active. You can upgrade an unprotected circuit to a fully protected circuit or downgrade a fully protected circuit to an unprotected circuit with the exception of a path protection circuit. When using bridge and roll on path protection circuits, you can roll the source or destination or both path selectors in a dual roll. However, you cannot roll a single path selector.
11.19 Merged Circuits
A circuit merge combines a single selected circuit with one or more circuits. You can merge VT tunnels,
VAP circuits, CTC-created circuits, VCAT members, and TL1-created circuits. To merge circuits, you choose a circuit in the CTC Circuits window and the circuits that you want to merge with the chosen
(master) circuit on the Merge tab in the Edit Circuits window. The Merge tab shows only the circuits that are available for merging with the master circuit:
•
Circuit cross-connects must create a single, contiguous path.
11-42
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.20 11.20 Reconfigured Circuits
•
•
•
•
Circuits types must be a compatible. For example, you can combine an STS circuit with a VAP circuit to create a longer VAP circuit, but you cannot combine a VT circuit with an STS circuit.
Circuit directions must be compatible. You can merge a one-way and a two-way circuit, but not two one-way circuits in opposing directions.
Circuit sizes must be identical.
VLAN assignments must be identical.
Circuit end points must send or receive the same framing format.
•
•
The merged circuits must become a DISCOVERED circuit.
If all connections from the master circuit and all connections from the merged circuits align to form one complete circuit, the merge is successful. If all connections from the master circuit and some, but not all, connections from the other circuits align to form a single complete circuit, CTC notifies you and gives you the chance to cancel the merge process. If you choose to continue, the aligned connections merge successfully into the master circuit, and the unaligned connections remain in the original circuits.
All connections in the completed master circuit use the original master circuit name.
All connections from the master circuit and at least one connection from the other selected circuits must be used in the resulting circuit for the merge to succeed. If a merge fails, the master circuit and all other circuits remain unchanged. When the circuit merge completes successfully, the resulting circuit retains the name of the master circuit.
You can also merge orderwire and user data channel (UDC) overhead circuits, which use the overhead bytes instead of frame payload to transfer data. To merge overhead circuits, you choose the overhead circuits on the network view Provisioning > Overhead Circuits window. You can only merge orderwire and UDC circuits.
11.20 Reconfigured Circuits
You can reconfigure multiple circuits, which is typically necessary when a large number of circuits are in the PARTIAL status. When reconfiguring multiple circuits, the selected circuits can be any combination of DISCOVERED, PARTIAL, DISCOVERED_TL1, or PARTIAL_TL1 circuits. You can reconfigure tunnels, VAP circuits, VLAN-assigned circuits, VCAT circuits, CTC-created circuits, and
TL1-created circuits. The Reconfigure command maintains the names of the original cross-connects.
Use the CTC Tools > Circuits > Reconfigure Circuits menu item to reconfigure selected circuits. During reconfiguration, CTC reassembles all connections of the selected circuits and VCAT members into circuits based on path size, direction, and alignment. Some circuits might merge and others might split into multiple circuits. If the resulting circuit is a valid circuit, it appears as a DISCOVERED circuit.
Otherwise, the circuit appears as a PARTIAL or PARTIAL_TL1 circuit.
Note
If CTC cannot reconfigure all members in a VCAT circuit, the reconfigure operation fails for the entire
VCAT circuit and it remains in the PARTIAL or PARTIAL_TL1 status. If CTC does reconfigure all members in a VCAT circuit, the VCAT circuit may still remain in the PARTIAL or PARTIAL_TL1 status. This occurs if the ports defined in the VCAT termination do not match the source/drop ports of the member circuits or if one or two VCAT terminations are missing.
Note
PARTIAL tunnel and PARTIAL VLAN-capable circuits do not split into multiple circuits during reconfiguration.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
11-43
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels
11.21 11.21 VLAN Management
11.21 VLAN Management
In Software Release 4.6 and later, VLANs are populated within topologies to limit broadcasts to each topology rather than to the entire network. Using the Manage VLANs command in the Tools menu, you can view a list of topology hosts and provisioned VLANs. You create VLANs during circuit creation or with the Manage VLANs command. When creating a VLAN, you must identify the topology host (node) where the VLAN will be provisioned. The Manage VLANs command also allows you to delete existing
VLANs.
11.22 Server Trails
A server trail is a non-DCC link across a third-party network that connects two CTC network domains.
A server trail allows circuit provisioning when no DCC is available. You can create server trails between any two optical or DS-3 ports. The end ports on a server trail can be different types (for example, an
OC-3 port can connect to an OC-12 port). Server trails are not allowed on DCC-enabled ports.
Note
A physical link must exist, end to end, and be in tact to route circuits across a server trail.
The server trail link is bidirectional and can be VT1.5, VT2, STS1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, STS-48c, or STS-192c; you cannot upgrade an existing server trail to another size. A server trail link can be one of the following protection types: Preemptible, Unprotected, and Fully Protected. The server trail protection type determines the protection type for any circuits that traverse it. PCA circuits will use server trails with the Preemptible attribute.
When creating circuits or VCATs, you can choose a server trail link during manual circuit routing. CTC may also route circuits over server trail links during automatic routing. VCAT common-fiber automatic routing is not supported.
11-44
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
12
SONET Topologies and Upgrades
Note
The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15454 SONET topologies and upgrades. To provision topologies, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter topics include:
•
12.1 SONET Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards, page 12-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings, page 12-2
12.3 Dual-Ring Interconnect, page 12-13
12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes, page 12-18
12.5 Linear ADM Configurations, page 12-19
12.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks, page 12-19
12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations, page 12-21
12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades, page 12-22
12.9 In-Service Topology Upgrades, page 12-25
12.1 SONET Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards
shows the SONET rings that can be created on each ONS 15454 node using redundant
TCC2/TCC2P cards.
Table 12-1
Ring Type
BLSRs
2-Fiber BLSR
4-Fiber BLSR
ONS 15454 Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards
Maximum Rings per Node
5
5
1
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-1
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings
Table 12-1 ONS 15454 Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards (continued)
Ring Type
UPSR with SDCC
UPSR with LDCC
UPSR with LDCC and SDCC
Maximum Rings per Node
34
1
14
2
26
3
1.
Total SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84 SDCCs.
2.
Total LDCC usage must be equal to or less than 28 LDCCs.
3.
Total LDCC and SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84. When LDCC is provisioned, an
SDCC termination is allowed on the same port, but is not recommended. Using SDCC and LDCC on the same port is only needed during a software upgrade if the other end of the link does not support
LDCC. You can provision SDCCs and LDCCs on different ports in the same node.
12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings
The ONS 15454 can support five concurrent bidirectional line switch rings (BLSRs) in one of the following configurations:
•
•
Five two-fiber BLSRs
Four two-fiber and one four-fiber BLSR
Each BLSR can have up to 32 ONS 15454s. Because the working and protect bandwidths must be equal, you can create only OC-12 (two-fiber only), OC-48, or OC-192 BLSRs.
Note
For best performance, BLSRs should have one LAN connection for every ten nodes in the BLSR.
12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs
In two-fiber BLSRs, each fiber is divided into working and protect bandwidths. For example, in an
OC-48 BLSR (
), STSs 1 to 24 carry the working traffic, and STSs 25 to 48 are reserved for protection. Working traffic (STSs 1 to 24) travels in one direction on one fiber and in the opposite direction on the second fiber. The Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) circuit routing routines calculate the shortest path for circuits based on many factors, including user requirements, traffic patterns, and distance. For example, in
Figure 12-1 , circuits going from Node 0 to Node 1 typically travel on Fiber 1,
unless that fiber is full, in which case circuits are routed on Fiber 2 through Node 3 and Node 2. Traffic from Node 0 to Node 2 (or Node 1 to Node 3) can be routed on either fiber, depending on circuit provisioning requirements and traffic loads.
12-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs
Figure 12-1 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR
Node 0
STSs 1-24 (working)
STSs 25-48 (protect)
STSs 1-24 (working)
STSs 25-48 (protect)
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Node 2
= Fiber 1
= Fiber 2
The SONET K1, K2, and K3 bytes carry the information that governs BLSR protection switches. Each
BLSR node monitors the K bytes to determine when to switch the SONET signal to an alternate physical path. The K bytes communicate failure conditions and actions taken between nodes in the ring.
If a break occurs on one fiber, working traffic targeted for a node beyond the break switches to the protect bandwidth on the second fiber. The traffic travels in a reverse direction on the protect bandwidth until it reaches its destination node. At that point, traffic is switched back to the working bandwidth.
Figure 12-2 shows a traffic pattern sample on a four-node, two-fiber BLSR.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-3
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs
Figure 12-2 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Sample
Node 0
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Node 2
Traffic flow
Fiber 1
Fiber 2
shows how traffic is rerouted following a line break between Node 0 and Node 3.
•
All circuits originating on Node 0 that carried traffic to Node 2 on Fiber 2 are switched to the protect bandwidth of Fiber 1. For example, a circuit carrying traffic on STS-1 on Fiber 2 is switched to
STS-25 on Fiber 1. A circuit carried on STS-2 on Fiber 2 is switched to STS-26 on Fiber 1. Fiber 1 carries the circuit to Node 3 (the original routing destination). Node 3 switches the circuit back to
STS-1 on Fiber 2 where it is routed to Node 2 on STS-1.
•
Circuits originating on Node 2 that normally carried traffic to Node 0 on Fiber 1 are switched to the protect bandwidth of Fiber 2 at Node 3. For example, a circuit carrying traffic on STS-2 on Fiber 1 is switched to STS-26 on Fiber 2. Fiber 2 carries the circuit to Node 0 where the circuit is switched back to STS-2 on Fiber 1 and then dropped to its destination.
12-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs
Figure 12-3 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Following Line Break
Node 0
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Node 2
Traffic flow
Fiber 1
Fiber 2
12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs
Four-fiber BLSRs double the bandwidth of two-fiber BLSRs. Because they allow span switching as well as ring switching, four-fiber BLSRs increase the reliability and flexibility of traffic protection. Two fibers are allocated for working traffic and two fibers for protection, as shown in
implement a four-fiber BLSR, you must install four OC-48, OC-48 AS, or OC-192 cards at each BLSR node.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-5
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs
Figure 12-4 Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR
Node 0
Span 4
Span 5 Span 8
Span 1
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Span 6 Span 7
Span 3 Span 2
Node 2
= Working fibers
= Protect fibers
Four-fiber BLSRs provide span and ring switching:
•
Span switching (
) occurs when a working span fails. Traffic switches to the protect fibers between the nodes (Node 0 and Node 1 in the example in
Figure 12-5 ) and then returns
to the working fibers. Multiple span switches can occur at the same time.
12-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs
Figure 12-5 Four-Fiber BLSR Span Switch
Node 0
Span 4
Span 5 Span 8
Span 1
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Span 6 Span 7
Span 3 Span 2
Node 2
= Working fibers
= Protect fibers
•
Ring switching (
) occurs when a span switch cannot recover traffic, such as when both the working and protect fibers fail on the same span. In a ring switch, traffic is routed to the protect fibers throughout the full ring.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-7
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth
Figure 12-6 Four-Fiber BLSR Ring Switch
Node 0
Span 4
Span 5 Span 8
Span 1
Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1
Span 6 Span 7
Span 3 Span 2
= Working fibers
= Protect fibers Node 2
12.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth
BLSR nodes can terminate traffic coming from either side of the ring. Therefore, BLSRs are suited for distributed node-to-node traffic applications such as interoffice networks and access networks.
BLSRs allow bandwidth to be reused around the ring and can carry more traffic than a network with traffic flowing through one central hub. BLSRs can also carry more traffic than a path protection operating at the same OC-N rate.
shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of two-fiber
BLSRs. The capacity is the OC-N rate divided by two, multiplied by the number of nodes in the ring minus the number of pass-through STS-1 circuits.
Table 12-2 Two-Fiber BLSR Capacity
OC Rate
OC-12
Working Bandwidth
STS1-6
OC-48 STS 1-24
OC-192 STS 1-96
Protection Bandwidth Ring Capacity
STS 7-12
STS 25-48
STS 97-192
6 x N
1
– PT
2
24 x N – PT
96 x N – PT
1.
N equals the number of ONS 15454 nodes configured as BLSR nodes.
2.
PT equals the number of STS-1 circuits passed through ONS 15454 nodes in the ring (capacity can vary depending on the traffic pattern).
Table 12-3 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of four-fiber BLSRs.
12-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example
Table 12-3 Four-Fiber BLSR Capacity
OC Rate
OC-48
Working Bandwidth
STS 1-48 (Fiber 1)
OC-192 STS 1-192 (Fiber 1)
Protection Bandwidth Ring Capacity
STS 1-48 (Fiber 2) 48 x N
1
– PT
2
STS 1-192 (Fiber 2) 192 x N – PT
1.
N equals the number of ONS 15454 nodes configured as BLSR nodes.
2.
PT equals the number of STS-1 circuits passed through ONS 15454 nodes in the ring (capacity can vary depending on the traffic pattern).
Figure 12-7 shows an example of BLSR bandwidth reuse. The same STS carries three different traffic
sets simultaneously on different spans around the ring: one set from Node 3 to Node 1, another set from
Node 1 to Node 2, and another set from Node 2 to Node 3.
Figure 12-7 BLSR Bandwidth Reuse
Node 0
STS#1 STS#1
Node 3 Node 1
STS#1 STS#1
Node 2
= Node 3 – Node 1 traffic
= Node 1 – Node 2 traffic
= Node 2 – Node 3 traffic
12.2.4 BLSR Application Example
Figure 12-8 shows a two-fiber BLSR implementation example with five nodes. A regional long-distance
network connects to other carriers at Node 0. Traffic is delivered to the service provider’s major hubs.
•
•
Carrier 1 delivers six DS-3s over two OC-3 spans to Node 0. Carrier 2 provides twelve DS-3s directly. Node 0 receives the signals and delivers them around the ring to the appropriate node.
The ring also brings 14 DS-1s back from each remote site to Node 0. Intermediate nodes serve these shorter regional connections.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01 12-9
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example
•
The ONS 15454 OC-3 card supports a total of four OC-3 ports so that two additional OC-3 spans can be added at little cost.
Figure 12-8 Five-Node Two-Fiber BLSR
56 local
DS-1s
Carrier 1
2 OC-3s
Carrier 2
12 DS-3s 4 DS-3s 14 DS-1s
Node 0 Node 1
14 DS-1s 2 DS-3s
Node 4 Node 2
8 DS-3s
14 DS-1s
Node 3
4 DS-3s 14 DS-1s
= Fiber 1
= Fiber 2
shows the shelf assembly layout for Node 0, which has one free slot.
12-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
Figure 12-9
Shelf Assembly Layout for Node 0 in Figure 12-8
12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example
shows the shelf assembly layout for the remaining sites in the ring. In this BLSR configuration, an additional eight DS-3s at Node IDs 1 and 3 can be activated. An additional four DS-3s can be added at Node 4, and ten DS-3s can be added at Node 2. Each site has free slots for future traffic needs.
Figure 12-10
Shelf Assembly Layout for Nodes 1 to 4 in Figure 12-8
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-11
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.2 12.2.5 BLSR Fiber Connections
12.2.5 BLSR Fiber Connections
Plan your fiber connections and use the same plan for all BLSR nodes. For example, make the east port the farthest slot to the right and the west port the farthest slot to the left. Plug fiber connected to an east
port at one node into the west port on an adjacent node. Figure 12-11 shows fiber connections for a
two-fiber BLSR with trunk cards in Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east). Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide for fiber connection procedures.
Note
Always plug the transmit (Tx) connector of an OC-N card at one node into the receive (Rx) connector of an OC-N card at the adjacent node. Cards display an SF LED when Tx and Rx connections are mismatched.
Figure 12-11 Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR
West
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Slot 5
Node 1
Slot 12
East West
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Slot 5
Node 2
Slot 12
East
West
Tx
Rx
Slot 5
Tx
Rx
East
Slot 12
West
Tx
Rx
Slot 5
Tx
Rx
East
Slot 12
Node 4 Node 3
For four-fiber BLSRs, use the same east-west connection pattern for the working and protect fibers. Do not mix working and protect card connections. The BLSR does not function if working and protect cards are interconnected.
Figure 12-12 shows fiber connections for a four-fiber BLSR. Slot 5 (west) and
Slot 12 (east) carry the working traffic. Slot 6 (west) and Slot 13 (east) carry the protect traffic.
12-12
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
Figure 12-12 Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR
Node 1 Node 2
West
Slot
5
Slot
6
Tx
Rx
Slot
12
Slot
13
East West
Slot
5
Slot
6
Tx
Rx
Slot
12
Slot
13
East
12.3 12.3 Dual-Ring Interconnect
West
Slot
5
Slot
6
Tx
Rx
Node 4
Slot
12
Slot
13
East West
Tx
Rx
East
Slot
5
Slot
6
Slot
12
Slot
13
Node 3
Working fibers
Protect fibers
12.3 Dual-Ring Interconnect
Dual-ring interconnect (DRI) topologies provide an extra level of path protection for circuits on interconnected rings. DRI allows users to interconnect BLSRs, path protection configurations, or a path protection with a BLSR, with additional protection provided at the transition nodes. In a DRI topology, ring interconnections occur at two or four nodes.
The drop-and-continue DRI method is used for all ONS 15454 DRIs. In drop-and-continue DRI, a primary node drops the traffic to the connected ring and routes traffic to a secondary node within the same ring. The secondary node also routes the traffic to the connected ring; that is, the traffic is dropped at two different interconnection nodes to eliminate single points of failure. To route circuits on DRI, you must choose the Dual Ring Interconnect option during circuit provisioning. Dual transmit is not supported.
Two DRI topologies can be implemented on the ONS 15454:
•
A traditional DRI requires two pairs of nodes to interconnect two networks. Each pair of user-defined primary and secondary nodes drops traffic over a pair of interconnection links to the other network.
•
An integrated DRI requires one pair of nodes to interconnect two networks. The two interconnected nodes replace the interconnection ring.
For DRI topologies, a hold-off timer sets the amount of time before a selector switch occurs. It reduces the likelihood of multiple switches, such as:
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-13
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI
•
Both a service selector and a path selector
•
Both a line switch and a path switch of a service selector
For example, if a path protection DRI service selector switch does not restore traffic, then the path selector switches after the hold-off time. The path protection DRI hold-off timer default is 100 ms. You can change this setting in the UPSR Selectors tab of the Edit Circuits window. For BLSR DRI, if line switching does not restore traffic, then the service selector switches. The hold-off time delays the recovery provided by the service selector. The BLSR DRI default hold-off time is 100 ms, but it can be changed.
12.3.1 BLSR DRI
Unlike BLSR automatic protection switching (APS) protocol, BLSR-DRI is a path-level protection protocol at the circuit level. Drop-and-continue BLSR-DRI requires a service selector in the primary node for each circuit routing to the other ring. Service selectors monitor signal conditions from dual feed sources and select the one that has the best signal quality. Same-side routing drops the traffic at primary nodes set up on the same side of the connected rings, and opposite-side routing drops the traffic at primary nodes set up on the opposite sides of the connected rings. For BLSR-DRI, primary and secondary nodes cannot be the circuit source or destination.
Note
A DRI circuit cannot be created if an intermediate node exists on the interconnecting link. However, an intermediate node can be added on the interconnecting link after the DRI circuit is created.
DRI protection circuits act as protection channel access (PCA) circuits. In CTC, you set up DRI protection circuits by selecting the PCA option when setting up primary and secondary nodes during DRI circuit creation.
Figure 12-13 shows ONS 15454 nodes in a traditional BLSR-DRI topology with same-side routing. In
Ring 1, Nodes 3 and 4 are the interconnect nodes, and in Ring 2, Nodes 8 and 9 are the interconnect nodes. Duplicate signals are sent between Node 4 (Ring 1) and Node 9 (Ring 2), and between Node 3
(Ring 1) and Node 8 (Ring 2). The primary nodes (Nodes 4 and 9) are on the same side, and the secondary nodes (Nodes 3 and 8) provide an alternative route. In Ring 1, traffic at Node 4 is dropped (to
Node 9) and continued (to Node 3). Similarly, at Node 9, traffic is dropped (to Node 4) and continued
(to Node 8).
12-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI
Figure 12-13 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Same-Side Routing)
Node 1
Node 5
Primary
Node
Node 4
BLSR
Ring 1
Secondary
Node
Node 3
Node 2
78-17191-01
Node 9
Primary
Node
BLSR
Ring 2
Node 8
Secondary
Node
Node 10 Node 7
Node 6
Drop and Continue
Service Selector
Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge
Secondary Path
shows ONS 15454 nodes in a traditional BLSR-DRI topology with opposite-side routing.
In Ring 1, Nodes 3 and 4 are the interconnect nodes, and in Ring 2, Nodes 8 and 9 are the interconnect nodes. Duplicate signals are sent from Node 4 (Ring 1) to Node 8 (Ring 2), and between Node 3 (Ring
1) and Node 9 (Ring 2). In Ring 1, traffic at Node 4 is dropped (to Node 9) and continued (to Node 3).
Similarly, at Node 8, traffic is dropped (to Node 3) and continued (to Node 8).
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-15
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI
Figure 12-14 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Opposite-Side Routing)
Node 1
Node 5
Primary
Node
Node 4
BLSR
Ring 1
Secondary
Node
Node 3
Node 2
Node 9
Secondary
Node
BLSR
Ring 2
Node 8
Primary
Node
Node 10 Node 7
Node 6
Drop and Continue
Service Selector
Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge
Secondary Path
Figure 12-15 shows ONS 15454s in an integrated BLSR-DRI topology. The same drop-and-continue
traffic routing occurs at two nodes, rather than four. This is achieved by installing an additional OC-N trunk at the two interconnect nodes. Nodes 3 and 8 are the interconnect nodes.
12-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
Figure 12-15 ONS 15454 Integrated BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect
12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI
Primary
Node 1
BLSR 1
Node 2
Node 4
Node 3
Secondary
Secondary
Node 8
Primary
Node 7
Node 5
BLSR 2
Node 6
Service Selector
Primary Path (working)
Secondary Path (protection)
shows an example of an integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits window.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-17
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.4 12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes
Figure 12-16 Integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits Window
12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes
Table 12-4 shows a comparison of the different protection schemes using OC-48 as an example.
Table 12-4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes
Topology
Path Protection
Two-Fiber BLSR
Four-Fiber BLSR
Two-Fiber BLSR DRI
Path Protection DRI
Ring
Capacity
Protected
Bandwidth
Between
Any Two
Nodes
Protection
Channel
Access
Dual
Failure Number of Cards
48 - PT STS 1-48 Not supported
Not supported
2 x N
24 x N
PT
2
1
- STS 1-24 STS 25-48 Not supported
48 x N - PT STS 1-48
(Fiber 1)
STS 1-48
(Fiber 2)
2 x N
Supported 4 x N
24 x N - PT STS 1-24 STS 25-48 Supported (2 x N) + 4
48 - PT STS 1-48 Not supported
Supported (2 x N) + 4
1.
N equals the number of ONS 15454 nodes configured as BLSR nodes.
2.
PT equals the number of STS-1 circuits passed through ONS 15454 nodes in the ring (capacity can vary depending on the traffic pattern).
12-18
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.5 12.5 Linear ADM Configurations
12.5 Linear ADM Configurations
You can configure ONS 15454s as a line of add/drop multiplexers (ADMs) by configuring one set of
OC-N cards as the working path and a second set as the protect path. Unlike rings, point-to-point ADMs
(two-node configurations) and linear ADMs (three-node configurations) require that the OC-N cards at each node be in 1+1 protection to ensure that a break to the working line is automatically routed to the protect line.
shows three ONS 15454 nodes in a linear ADM configuration. Working traffic flows from
Slot 5/Node 1 to Slot 5/Node 2, and from Slot 12/Node 2 to Slot 12/Node 3. You create the protect path by placing Slot 6 in 1+1 protection with Slot 5 at Nodes 1 and 2, and Slot 12 in 1+1 protection with
Slot 13 at Nodes 2 and 3.
Figure 12-17
Node 1
Linear (Point-to-Point) ADM Configuration
Slot 5 to Slot 5
Slot 6 to Slot 6
Slot 12 to Slot 12
Slot 13 to Slot 13
Node 2 Node 3
Protect Path
Working Path
12.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks
In addition to single BLSRs, path protection configurations, and ADMs, you can extend ONS 15454 traffic protection by creating path-protected mesh networks (PPMNs). PPMNs include multiple
ONS 15454 SONET topologies and extend the protection provided by a single path protection to the meshed architecture of several interconnecting rings. In a PPMN, circuits travel diverse paths through a network of single or multiple meshed rings. When you create circuits, you can have CTC automatically route circuits across the PPMN, or you can manually route them. You can also choose levels of circuit protection. For example, if you choose full protection, CTC creates an alternate route for the circuit in addition to the main route. The second route follows a unique path through the network between the source and destination and sets up a second set of cross-connections.
For example, in
a circuit is created from Node 3 to Node 9. CTC determines that the shortest route between the two nodes passes through Node 8 and Node 7, shown by the dotted line, and automatically creates cross-connections at Nodes 3, 8, 7, and 9 to provide the primary circuit path.
If full protection is selected, CTC creates a second unique route between Nodes 3 and 9 which, in this example, passes through Nodes 2, 1, and 11. Cross-connections are automatically created at Nodes 3, 2,
1, 11, and 9, shown by the dashed line. If a failure occurs on the primary path, traffic switches to the second circuit path. In this example, Node 9 switches from the traffic coming in from Node 7 to the traffic coming in from Node 11 and service resumes. The switch occurs within 50 ms.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-19
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.6 12.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks
Figure 12-18 Path-Protected Mesh Network
Source
Node
Node 3
Node 5
Node 2
Node 4
Node 1
Node 10 Node 8
Node 6
Node 11
Protect traffic
Node 9
Node 7
Wor king tr affic
Destination
Node
= Primary path
= Secondary path
PPMN also allows spans with different SONET speeds to be mixed together in “virtual rings.”
Figure 12-19 shows Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in a standard OC-48 ring. Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 link to the
backbone ring through OC-12 fiber. The “virtual ring” formed by Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 uses both OC-48 and OC-12 cards.
12-20
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
Figure 12-19
ONS 15454
Node 5
PPMN Virtual Ring
ONS 15454
Node 1
12.7 12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations
ONS 15454
Node 4
ONS 15454
Node 8
OC-12 OC-12
OC-48
ONS 15454
Node 6
ONS 15454
Node 2
ONS 15454
Node 3
ONS 15454
Node 7
12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations
You can link multiple ONS 15454s using their OC-N cards (that is, create a fiber-optic bus) to accommodate more access traffic than a single ONS 15454 can support. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide. For example, to drop more than 112 DS-1s or 96 DS-3s (the maximum that can be aggregated in a single node), you can link the nodes but not merge multiple nodes into a single
ONS 15454. You can link nodes with OC-12 or OC-48 fiber spans as you would link any other two network nodes. The nodes can be grouped in one facility to aggregate more local traffic.
shows a four-shelf node setup. Each shelf assembly is recognized as a separate node in the ONS 15454 software interface and traffic is mapped using CTC cross-connect
options. In Figure 12-20 , each node uses redundant fiber-optic cards. Node 1 uses redundant OC-N
transport and OC-N bus (connecting) cards for a total of four cards, with eight free slots remaining.
Nodes 2 and 3 each use two redundant OC-N bus cards for a total of four cards, with eight free slots remaining. Node 4 uses redundant OC-12 bus cards for a total of two cards, with ten free slots remaining.
The four-shelf node example presented here is one of many ways to set up a multiple-node configuration.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-21
12.8 12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades
Figure 12-20 Four-Shelf Node Configuration
Redundant
OC-N Feed
Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s
Redundant
OC-N Bus
ONS 15454, Node 1
Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s
ONS 15454, Node 2
Redundant
OC-N Bus
Redundant
OC-N Bus
Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s
ONS 15454, Node 3
Up to 96 DS-3s, 112 DS-1s
ONS 15454, Node 4
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades
A span is the optical fiber connection between two ONS 15454 nodes. In a span (optical speed) upgrade, the transmission rate of a span is upgraded from a lower to a higher OC-N signal but all other span configuration attributes remain unchanged. With multiple nodes, a span upgrade is a coordinated series of upgrades on all nodes in the ring or protection group. You can perform in-service span upgrades for the following ONS 15454 cards:
•
Single-port OC-12 to four-port OC-12
•
•
•
Single-port OC-12 to OC-48
Single-port OC-12 to OC-192
Single-port OC-12 to MRC-12
OC-48 to OC-192
•
•
OC-48 to OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach or OC192/STM64 Any Reach
You can also perform in-service card upgrades for the following ONS 15454 cards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four-port OC-3 to eight-port OC-3
Single-port OC-12 to four-port OC-12
Single-port OC-12 to OC-48
Single-port OC-12 to OC-192
Single-port OC-12 to MRC-12
OC-48 to MRC-12
OC-192 to OC192-XFP
12-22
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.8 12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades
•
OC-48 to OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach or OC192/STM64 Any Reach
lists permitted upgrades for Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 (high-speed slots).
Slot 5, 6, 12, and 13 Upgrade Options Table 12-5
Cards
Four-port
OC-3
Four-port OC-3 —
Eight-port
OC-3
1
Not supported
One-port OC-12 Not supported
Four-port
OC-12
2
OC-48
Not supported
Not supported
OC-192
MRC-12
Not supported
Not supported
Eight-port
OC-3
Not supported
—
One-port
OC-12
Not supported
Not supported
— Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
1.
The eight-port OC-3 is not supported in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13.
2.
The four-port OC-12 is not supported in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13.
Four-port
OC-12
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
—
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OC-48
Not supported
OC-192
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported
Not supported
—
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
—
Not supported
MRC-12
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
—
Table 12-6
Cards
Four-port
OC-3
Four-port OC-3 —
Eight-port OC-3
One-port OC-12 Not supported
Four-port OC-12 Not supported
OC-48
OC-192
1
Not supported
—
MRC-12
lists permitted upgrades for Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17 (low-speed slots).
Upgrade Options for Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17
Supported
Not supported
Eight-port
OC-3
Supported
—
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
—
Not supported
One-port
OC-12
Not supported
Not supported
—
Supported
Supported
—
Supported
1.
The OC-192 is not supported on Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17.
Four-port
OC-12
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
—
Not supported
—
Not supported
OC-48
Not supported
OC-192
—
Not supported
—
Supported —
Not supported
—
—
—
MRC-12
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
— —
Supported Not supported
Not supported
—
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-23
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.8 12.8.1 Span Upgrade Wizard
Note
Replacing cards that are the same speed are not considered span upgrades. For example replacing a four-port OC-3 with an eight-port OC-3 card or replacing a single-port OC-12 with a four-port OC-12 card.
To perform a span upgrade, the higher-rate OC-N card must replace the lower-rate card in the same slot.
If the upgrade is conducted on spans residing in a BLSR, all spans in the ring must be upgraded. The protection configuration of the original lower-rate OC-N card (two-fiber BLSR, four-fiber BLSR, path protection, and 1+1) is retained for the higher-rate OC-N card.
To perform a span upgrade on either the OC192-XFP or MRC-12 card with an SFP/XFP (known as pluggable port modules, PPMs, in CTC), the higher-rate PPM must replace the lower-rate PPM in the same slot. If you are using a multi-rate PPM, you do not need to physically replace the PPM but can provision the PPM for a different line rate. All spans in the network must be upgraded. The 1+1 protection configuration of the original lower-rate PPM is retained for the higher-rate PPM.
When performing span upgrades on a large number of nodes, we recommend that you upgrade all spans in a ring consecutively and in the same maintenance window. Until all spans are upgraded, mismatched card types or PPM types are present.
We recommend using the Span Upgrade Wizard to perform span upgrades. Although you can also use the manual span upgrade procedures, the manual procedures are mainly provided as error recovery for the wizard. The Span Upgrade Wizard and the Manual Span Upgrade procedures require at least two technicians (one at each end of the span) who can communicate with each other during the upgrade.
Upgrading a span is non-service affecting and causes no more than three switches, each of which is less than 50 ms in duration.
Note
Span upgrades do not upgrade SONET topologies (for example, a 1+1 group to a two-fiber BLSR). Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for topology upgrade procedures.
12.8.1 Span Upgrade Wizard
The Span Upgrade Wizard automates all steps in the manual span upgrade procedure (BLSR, path protection, and 1+1). The wizard can upgrade both lines on one side of a four-fiber BLSR or both lines of a 1+1 group; the wizard upgrades path protection configurations and two-fiber BLSRs one line at a time. The Span Upgrade Wizard requires that all working spans have DCC enabled.
The Span Upgrade Wizard provides no way to back out of an upgrade. In the case of an error, you must exit the wizard and initiate the manual procedure to either continue with the upgrade or back out of it.
To continue with the manual procedure, examine the standing conditions and alarms to identify the stage in which the wizard failure occurred.
12.8.2 Manual Span Upgrades
Manual span upgrades are mainly provided as error recovery for the Span Upgrade Wizard, but they can be used to perform span upgrades. Downgrading can be performed to back out of a span upgrade. The procedure for downgrading is the same as upgrading except that you choose a lower-rate card type. You cannot downgrade if circuits exist on the STSs that will be removed (the higher STSs).
12-24
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.9 12.9 In-Service Topology Upgrades
Procedures for manual span upgrades can be found in the “Upgrade Cards and Spans” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Five manual span upgrade options are available:
•
•
•
•
•
Upgrade on a two-fiber BLSR
Upgrade on a four-fiber BLSR
Upgrade on a path protection
Upgrade on a 1+1 protection group
Upgrade on an unprotected span
12.9 In-Service Topology Upgrades
Topology upgrades can be performed in-service to convert a live network to a different topology. An in-service topology upgrade is potentially service-affecting, and generally allows a traffic hit of 50 ms or less. Traffic might not be protected during the upgrade. The following in-service topology upgrades are supported:
•
Unprotected point-to-point or linear ADM to path protection
•
•
•
•
You can perform in-service topology upgrades irrespective of the service state of the involved cross-connects or circuits; however, a circuit must have a DISCOVERED status.
Circuit types supported for in-service topology upgrades are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Point-to-point or linear ADM to two-fiber BLSR path protection to two-fiber BLSR
Two-fiber to four-fiber BLSR
Node addition or removal from an existing topology
STS, VT, and VT tunnels
Virtual concatenated circuits (VCAT)
Unidirectional and bidirectional
Automatically routed and manually routed
CTC-created and TL1-created
Ethernet (unstitched)
•
Multiple source and destination (both sources should be on one node and both drops on one node)
You cannot upgrade stitched Ethernet circuits during topology conversions. For in-service topology upgrade procedures, refer to the “Convert Network Configurations” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide. For procedures to add or remove a node, refer to the “Add and Remove Nodes” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Note
A database restore on all nodes in a topology returns converted circuits to their original topology.
Note
Open-ended path protection and DRI configurations do not support in-service topology upgrades.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-25
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.9 12.9.1 Unprotected Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Path Protection
12.9.1 Unprotected Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Path Protection
CTC provides a topology conversion wizard for converting an unprotected point-to-point or linear ADM topology to path protection. This conversion occurs at the circuit level. CTC calculates the additional path protection circuit route automatically or you can do it manually. When routing the path protection circuit, you can provision the USPR as go-and-return or unidirectional.
When performing an in-service topology upgrade on a configuration with VCAT circuits, CTC allows you to select member circuits to upgrade individually. When upgrading VT tunnels, CTC does not convert the VT tunnel to path protection, but instead creates a secondary tunnel for the alternate path.
The result is two unprotected VT tunnels using alternate paths.
To convert from point-to-point or linear ADM to a path protection, the topology requires an additional circuit route to complete the ring. When the route is established, CTC creates circuit connections on any intermediate nodes and modifies existing circuit connections on the original circuit path. The number and position of network spans in the topology remains unchanged during and after the conversion.
additional circuit routes through Node 3 to complete the path protection.
Figure 12-21 Unprotected Point-to-Point ADM to Path Protection Conversion
Node 1 Node 2
Node 3
Node 1 Node 2
Node 3
12.9.2 Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Two-Fiber BLSR
A 1+1 point-to-point or linear ADM to a two-fiber BLSR conversion is manual. You must remove the protect fibers from all nodes in the linear ADM and route them from the end node to the protect port on the other end node. In addition, you must delete the circuit paths that are located in the bandwidth that will become the protection portion of the two-fiber BLSR (for example, circuits in STS 25 or higher on an OC-48 BLSR) and recreate them in the appropriate bandwidth. Finally, you must provision the nodes as BLSR nodes.
To complete a conversion from an unprotected point-to-point or linear ADM to a two-fiber BLSR, use the CTC Convert Unprotected/UPSR to BLSR wizard from the Tools > Topology Upgrade menu.
12-26
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12.9 12.9.3 Path Protection to Two-Fiber BLSR
12.9.3 Path Protection to Two-Fiber BLSR
CTC provides a topology conversion wizard to convert a path protection to a two-fiber BLSR. An upgrade from a path protection to a two-fiber BLSR changes path protection to line protection. A path protection can have a maximum of 16 nodes before conversion. Circuits paths must occupy the same time slots around the ring. Only the primary path through the path protection is needed; the topology conversion wizard removes the alternate path protection path during the conversion. Because circuit paths can begin and end outside of the topology, the conversion might create line-protected segments within path protection paths of circuits outside the scope of the ring. The physical arrangement of the ring nodes and spans remains the same after the conversion.
12.9.4 Two-Fiber BLSR to Four-Fiber BLSR
CTC provides a wizard to convert two-fiber OC-48 or OC-192 BLSRs to four-fiber BLSRs. To convert the BLSR, you must install two OC-48 or OC-192 cards at each two-fiber BLSR node, then log into CTC and convert each node from two-fiber to four-fiber. The fibers that were divided into working and protect bandwidths for the two-fiber BLSR are now fully allocated for working BLSR traffic.
12.9.5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology
You can add or remove a node from a linear ADM, BLSR, or path protection configuration. Adding or removing nodes from BLSRs is potentially service affecting; however, adding and removing nodes from an existing 1+1 linear ADM or path protection configuration does not disrupt traffic. CTC provides a wizard for adding a node to a point-to-point or 1+1 linear ADM. This wizard is used when adding a node between two other nodes.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
12-27
12.9 12.9.5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades
12-28
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
C H A P T E R
13
Management Network Connectivity
This chapter provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN) connectivity.
Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter provides scenarios showing Cisco
ONS 15454s in common IP network configurations as well as information about provisionable patchcords, the IP routing table, external firewalls, and open gateway network element (GNE) networks.
Note
This chapter does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures, nor does it provide IP addressing examples to meet all networked scenarios. For ONS 15454 networking setup instructions, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Although ONS 15454 DCN communication is based on IP, ONS 15454 nodes can be networked to equipment that is based on the Open System Interconnection (OSI) protocol suites. This chapter describes the ONS 15454 OSI implementation and provides scenarios that show how ONS 15454 can be networked within a mixed IP and OSI environment.
Chapter topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
13.1 IP Networking Overview, page 13-1
13.2 IP Addressing Scenarios, page 13-2
13.3 Provisionable Patchcords, page 13-22
13.4 Routing Table, page 13-24
•
•
13.5 External Firewalls, page 13-25
13.7 TCP/IP and OSI Networking, page 13-29
Note
To connect ONS 15454s to an IP network, you must work with a LAN administrator or other individual at your site who has IP networking training and experience.
13.1 IP Networking Overview
ONS 15454s can be connected in many different ways within an IP environment:
•
They can be connected to LANs through direct connections or a router.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-1
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2 IP Addressing Scenarios
•
•
•
•
•
IP subnetting can create multiple logical ONS 15454 networks within a single Class A, B, or C IP network. If you do not subnet, you will only be able to use one network from your Class A, B, or C network.
Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals. For example,
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to serve as a gateway for ONS 15454s that are not connected to the LAN.
Static routes can be created to enable connections among multiple CTC sessions with ONS 15454s that reside on the same subnet.
ONS 15454s can be connected to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) networks so that ONS 15454 network information is automatically communicated across multiple LANs and WANs.
The ONS 15454 SOCKS (network proxy protocol) proxy server can control the visibility and accessibility between CTC computers and ONS 15454 element nodes.
13.2 IP Addressing Scenarios
ONS 15454 IP addressing generally has eight common scenarios or configurations. Use the scenarios as
check when setting up ONS 15454s in IP networks.
Table 13-1 General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist
Item
Link integrity
What to Check
Verify that link integrity exists between:
•
•
CTC computer and network hub/switch
ONS 15454s (backplane wire-wrap pins or RJ-45 port) and network hub/switch
ONS 15454 hub/switch ports
Ping
•
Router ports and hub/switch ports
If connectivity problems occur, set the hub or switch port that is connected to the ONS 15454 to 10 Mbps half-duplex.
Ping the node to test connections between computers and ONS 15454s.
IP addresses/subnet masks
Verify that ONS 15454 IP addresses and subnet masks are set up correctly.
Optical connectivity Verify that ONS 15454 optical trunk (span) ports are in service and that a DCC is enabled on each trunk port.
Note
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control/Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control
Plus (TCC2P) card secure mode option allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node, one for the backplane LAN port and one for the TCC2P DCC interfaces. Secure mode IP addressing examples are provided in the
“13.2.9 IP Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled” section on page 13-20
. IP addresses shown in the other scenarios assume that secure mode is not enabled. If secure mode is enabled, the IP addresses shown in the examples apply to the backplane LAN port.
13-2
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
13.2.1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
IP Scenario 1 shows a basic ONS 15454 LAN configuration (
Figure 13-1 ). The ONS 15454s and CTC
computer reside on the same subnet. All ONS 15454s connect to LAN A, and all ONS 15454s have DCC connections.
Figure 13-1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
Host Routes = N/A
LAN A
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
13.2.2 IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router
In IP Scenario 2 the CTC computer resides on a subnet (192.168.1.0) and attaches to LAN A
(
connects LAN A to LAN B. The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A (192.168.1.1), and the
IP address of router interface B is set to LAN B (192.168.2.1).
On the CTC computer, the default gateway is set to router interface A. If the LAN uses Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically. In the
Figure 13-2 example, a DHCP server is not available.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-3
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway
Figure 13-2 IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router
LAN A
Int "A"
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Int "B"
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Host Routes = N/A
LAN B
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.2.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.2.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway
ARP matches higher-level IP addresses to the physical addresses of the destination host. It uses a lookup table (called ARP cache) to perform the translation. When the address is not found in the ARP cache, a broadcast is sent out on the network with a special format called the ARP request. If one of the machines on the network recognizes its own IP address in the request, it sends an ARP reply back to the requesting host. The reply contains the physical hardware address of the receiving host. The requesting host stores this address in its ARP cache so that all subsequent datagrams (packets) to this destination IP address can be translated to a physical address.
Proxy ARP enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to respond to the ARP request for ONS 15454s not connected to the LAN. (ONS 15454 proxy ARP requires no user configuration.) For this to occur, the
DCC-connected ONS 15454s must reside on the same subnet. When a LAN device sends an ARP request to an ONS 15454 that is not connected to the LAN, the gateway ONS 15454 returns its MAC address to the LAN device. The LAN device then sends the datagram for the remote ONS 15454 to the MAC address of the proxy ONS 15454. The proxy ONS 15454 uses its routing table to forward the datagram to the non-LAN ONS 15454.
13-4
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway
IP Scenario 3 is similar to IP Scenario 1, but only one ONS 15454 (1) connects to the LAN (
Two ONS 15454s (2 and 3) connect to ONS 15454 1 through the SONET DCC. Because all three
ONS 15454s are on the same subnet, proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 1 to serve as a gateway for
ONS 15454 2 and 3.
Note
This scenario assumes all CTC connections are to Node 1. If you connect a laptop to either ONS 15454
2 or 3, network partitioning occurs; neither the laptop nor the CTC computer can see all nodes. If you want laptops to connect directly to end network elements, you must create static routes (see
Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs” section on page 13-7
) or enable the ONS 15454
SOCKS proxy server (see
“13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server” section on page 13-12
).
Figure 13-3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
LAN A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
78-17191-01
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
You can also use proxy ARP to communicate with hosts attached to the craft Ethernet ports of
DCC-connected nodes (
). The node with an attached host must have a static route to the host.
Static routes are propagated to all DCC peers using OSPF. The existing proxy ARP node is the gateway for additional hosts. Each node examines its routing table for routes to hosts that are not connected to the DCC network but are within the subnet. The existing proxy server replies to ARP requests for these additional hosts with the node MAC address. The existence of the host route in the routing table ensures that the IP packets addressed to the additional hosts are routed properly. Other than establishing a static route between a node and an additional host, no provisioning is necessary. The following restrictions apply:
•
•
Only one node acts as the proxy ARP server for any given additional host.
A node cannot be the proxy ARP server for a host connected to its Ethernet port.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-5
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.4 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer
Figure 13-4
In
, Node 1 announces to Node 2 and 3 that it can reach the CTC host. Similarly, Node 3 announces that it can reach the ONS 152xx. The ONS 152xx is shown as an example; any network element (NE) can be set up as an additional host.
IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
LAN A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.100
Mask 255.255.255.255
Next Hop 192.168.1.10
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
SONET RING
ONS 152xx
IP Address 192.168.1.31
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.31
Mask 255.255.255.255
Next Hop 192.168.1.30
13.2.4 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer
IP Scenario 4 is similar to IP Scenario 3, but Nodes 2 and 3 reside on different subnets, 192.168.2.0 and
192.168.3.0, respectively (
). Node 1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192.168.1.0. Proxy
ARP is not used because the network includes different subnets. For the CTC computer to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3, Node 1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC computer.
13-6
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
Figure 13-5 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.10
Host Routes = N/A
LAN A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.2.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.3.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
Static routes are used for two purposes:
•
To connect ONS 15454s to CTC sessions on one subnet connected by a router to ONS 15454s residing on another subnet. (These static routes are not needed if OSPF is enabled.
Scenario 6: Using OSPF” section on page 13-10 shows an OSPF example.)
•
To enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454s residing on the same subnet.
In
Figure 13-6 , one CTC residing on subnet 192.168.1.0 connects to a router through interface A. (The
router is not set up with OSPF.) ONS 15454s residing on different subnets are connected through Node
1 to the router through interface B. Because Nodes 2 and 3 are on different subnets, proxy ARP does not enable Node 1 as a gateway. To connect to the CTC computer on LAN A (subnet 192.168.1.0), you must create a static route on Node 1. You must also manually add static routes between the CTC computer on
LAN A and Nodes 2 and 3 because these nodes are on different subnets.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-7
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
Figure 13-6 IP Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination
LAN A
Router
IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Static Routes
Destination 192.168.3.0
Mask 255.255.255.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.10
Destination 192.168.4.0
Mask 255.255.255.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.10
Int "A"
Int "B"
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
LAN B
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes
Destination 192.168.1.0
Mask 255.255.255.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
The destination and subnet mask entries control access to the ONS 15454s:
•
•
If a single CTC computer is connected to a router, enter the complete CTC “host route” IP address as the destination with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.
If CTC computers on a subnet are connected to a router, enter the destination subnet (in this example,
192.168.1.0) and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
•
If all CTC computers are connected to a router, enter a destination of 0.0.0.0 and a subnet mask of
0.0.0.0.
The IP address of router interface B is entered as the next hop, and the cost (number of hops from source to destination) is 2. You must manually add static routes between the CTC computers on LAN A, B, and
C and Nodes 2 and 3 because these nodes are on different subnets.
13-8
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
Figure 13-7
LAN D
IP Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations
LAN C
Router #3:
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-C = 192.168.5.10
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-D = 192.168.6.1
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Static Routes:
Destination = 192.168.0.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1
Destination = 192.168.4.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1
LAN A
Router #2:
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-A = 192.168.1.10
IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-C = 192.168.5.1
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Static Routes:
Destination = 192.168.0.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.1.1
Destination = 192.168.4.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Int "A"
Router #1
IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Destination = 192.168.0.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.2.10
Destination = 192.168.4.0
Mask = 255.255.255.0
Next Hop = 192.168.5.1
Int "B"
LAN B
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes
Destination 0.0.0.0
Mask 0.0.0.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-9
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF
13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link state Internet routing protocol. Link state protocols use a “hello protocol” to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their neighbors. Link state protocols advertise their directly connected networks and their active links. Each link state router captures the link state “advertisements” and puts them together to create a topology of the entire network or area. From this database, the router calculates a routing table by constructing a shortest path tree. Routes are recalculated when topology changes occur.
ONS 15454s use the OSPF protocol in internal ONS 15454 networks for node discovery, circuit routing, and node management. You can enable OSPF on the ONS 15454s so that the ONS 15454 topology is sent to OSPF routers on a LAN. Advertising the ONS 15454 network topology to LAN routers
eliminates the need to manually enter static routes for ONS 15454 subnetworks. Figure 13-8
shows a network enabled for OSPF.
shows the same network without OSPF. Static routes must be manually added to the router for CTC computers on LAN A to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 because these nodes reside on different subnets.
OSPF divides networks into smaller regions, called areas. An area is a collection of networked end systems, routers, and transmission facilities organized by traffic patterns. Each OSPF area has a unique
ID number, known as the area ID. Every OSPF network has one backbone area called “area 0.” All other
OSPF areas must connect to area 0.
When you enable an ONS 15454 OSPF topology for advertising to an OSPF network, you must assign an OSPF area ID in decimal format to the ONS 15454 network. Coordinate the area ID number assignment with your LAN administrator. All DCC-connected ONS 15454s should be assigned the same
OSPF area ID.
13-10
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF
Figure 13-8 IP Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled
LAN A
Int "A"
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Int "B"
LAN B
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-11
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
Figure 13-9 IP Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled
LAN A
Int "A"
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.3.20 Next Hop 192.168.2.10
Destination 192.168.4.30 Next Hop 192.168.2.10
Int "B"
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
LAN B
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes
Destination = 192.168.1.100
Mask = 255.255.255.255
Next Hop = 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
SONET RING
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
The ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy is an application that allows an ONS 15454 node to serve as an internal gateway between a private enterprise network and the ONS 15454 network. (SOCKS is a standard proxy protocol for IP-based applications developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force.) Access is allowed from the private network to the ONS 15454 network, but access is denied from the ONS 15454 network to the private network. For example, you can set up a network so that field technicians and network operations center (NOC) personnel can both access the same ONS 15454s while preventing the field technicians from accessing the NOC LAN. To do this, one ONS 15454 is provisioned as a gateway network element (GNE) and the other ONS 15454s are provisioned as end network elements (ENEs).
The GNE ONS 15454 tunnels connections between CTC computers and ENE ONS 15454s, providing management capability while preventing access for non-ONS 15454 management purposes.
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-12 78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
The ONS 15454 gateway setting performs the following tasks:
•
•
Isolates DCC IP traffic from Ethernet (craft port) traffic and accepts packets based on filtering rules.
The filtering rules (see
and
Table 13-4 on page 13-18 ) depend on whether
the packet arrives at the ONS 15454 DCC or the TCC2/TCC2P Ethernet interface.
Processes Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) requests.
ONS 15454 ENEs can derive time-of-day from an SNTP/NTP LAN server through the GNE
ONS 15454.
•
Processes Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 (SNMPv1) traps. The GNE ONS 15454 receives SNMPv1 traps from the ENE ONS 15454s and forwards or relays the traps to SNMPv1 trap destinations or ONS 15454 SNMP relay nodes.
The ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server is provisioned using the Enable SOCKS proxy server on port check box on the Provisioning > Network > General tab (
Figure 13-10 SOCKS Proxy Server Gateway Settings
78-17191-01
If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections between CTC clients and ONS 15454s that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTC client establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTC client can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. If not selected, the node does not proxy for any CTC clients, although any established proxy connections continue until the CTC client exits. In addition, you can set the SOCKS proxy server as an ENE or a GNE:
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-13
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
Note
If you launch CTC against a node through a Network Address Translation (NAT) or Port Address
Translation (PAT) router and that node does not have proxy enabled, your CTC session starts and initially appears to be fine. However, CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and reconnects every two minutes. If the proxy is accidentally disabled, it is still possible to enable the proxy during a reconnect cycle and recover your ability to manage the node, even through a NAT/PAT firewall.
•
External Network Element (ENE)—If set as an ENE, the ONS 15454 neither installs nor advertises default or static routes. CTC computers can communicate with the ONS 15454 using the
TCC2/TCC2P craft port, but they cannot communicate directly with any other DCC-connected
ONS 15454.
In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic from being routed between the DCC and the LAN port. The ONS 15454 can communicate with machines connected to the LAN port or connected through the DCC. However, the DCC-connected machines cannot communicate with the LAN-connected machines, and the LAN-connected machines cannot communicate with the DCC-connected machines. A CTC client using the LAN to connect to the firewall-enabled node can use the proxy capability to manage the DCC-connected nodes that would otherwise be unreachable. A CTC client connected to a DCC-connected node can only manage other
DCC-connected nodes and the firewall itself.
•
•
Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If set as a GNE, the CTC computer is visible to other
DCC-connected nodes and firewall is enabled.
Proxy-only—If Proxy-only is selected, firewall is not enabled. CTC can communicate with any other DCC-connected ONS 15454s.
Figure 13-11 shows an ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server implementation. A GNE ONS 15454 is
connected to a central office LAN and to ENE ONS 15454s. The central office LAN is connected to a
NOC LAN, which has CTC computers. Both the NOC CTC computer and the craft technicians must be able to access the ONS 15454 ENEs. However, the craft technicians must be prevented from accessing or seeing the NOC or central office LANs.
In the example, the ONS 15454 GNE is assigned an IP address within the central office LAN and is physically connected to the LAN through its LAN port. ONS 15454 ENEs are assigned IP addresses that are outside the central office LAN and are given private network IP addresses. If the ONS 15454 ENEs are collocated, the craft LAN ports could be connected to a hub. However, the hub should have no other network connections.
13-14
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
Figure 13-11 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same
Subnet
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.0/24
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.150/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.250/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.200/24
Local/Craft CTC
10.10.10.50
Ethernet
SONET
shows recommended settings for ONS 15454 GNEs and ENEs in the configuration shown in
.
Table 13-2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings
Setting
OSPF
ONS 15454 Gateway NE
Off
ONS 15454 End NE
Off
SNTP server (if used) SNTP server IP address
SNMP (if used) SNMPv1 trap destinations
Set to ONS 15454 GNE IP address
Set SNMPv1 trap destinations to
ONS 15454 GNE, port 391
shows the same SOCKS proxy server implementation with ONS 15454 ENEs on different subnets.
shows the implementation with ONS 15454 ENEs in multiple rings. In each example, ONS 15454 GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in
.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-15
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
Figure 13-12 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different
Subnets
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.0/24
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.150/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.250/24
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.10.20
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.200/24
Ethernet
SONET
13-16
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
78-17191-01
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server
Figure 13-13 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.0/24
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.250/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.150/24
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.200/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.200/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.80.250/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.60.150/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.70.200/24
Ethernet
SONET
shows the rules that the ONS 15454 follows to filter packets for the firewall when nodes are configured as ENEs and GNEs.
Table 13-3 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules
Packets Arriving At: Are Accepted if the Destination IP Address is:
TCC2/TCC2P
Ethernet interface
•
•
•
The ONS 15454 node itself
The ONS 15454 node’s subnet broadcast address
DCC interface
•
•
•
Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network (reserved network used for standard multicast messages)
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.255
The ONS 15454 node itself
Any destination connected through another DCC interface
•
Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network
If the packet is addressed to the ONS 15454 node, additional rules, shown in
Rejected packets are silently discarded.
78-17191-01
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.0
13-17
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity
13.2 13.2.8 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet
Table 13-4 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to the
ONS 15454
Packets Arriving At Accepts
TCC2/TCC2P
Ethernet interface
•
All UDP
1
packets except those in the Rejected column
Rejects
•
UDP packets addressed to the
SNMP trap relay port (391)
DCC interface
•
•
•
•
All UDP packets
All TCP
2
protocols except packets addressed to the Telnet and SOCKS proxy server ports
OSPF packets
ICMP
3
packets
•
•
•
TCP packets addressed to the
Telnet port
TCP packets addressed to the
SOCKS proxy server port
All packets other than UDP, TCP,
OSPF, ICMP
1.
UDP = User Datagram Protocol
2.
TCP = Transmission Control Protocol
3.
ICMP = Internet Control Message Protocol
If you implement the SOCKS proxy server, note that all DCC-connected ONS 15454s on the same
Ethernet segment must have the same gateway setting. Mixed values produce unpredictable results, and might leave some nodes unreachable through the shared Ethernet segment.
If nodes become unreachable, correct the setting with one of the following actions:
•
Disconnect the craft computer from the unreachable ONS 15454. Connect to the ONS 15454 through another network ONS 15454 that has a DCC connection to the unreachable ONS 15454.
•
Disconnect all DCCs to the node by disabling them on neighboring nodes. Connect a CTC computer directly to the ONS 15454 and change its provisioning.
13.2.8 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet
The ONS 15454 provides GNE load balancing, which allows CTC to reach ENEs over multiple GNEs without the ENEs being advertised over OSPF. This feature allows a network to quickly recover from the loss of a GNE, even if the GNE is on a different subnet. If a GNE fails, all connections through that
GNE fail. CTC disconnects from the failed GNE and from all ENEs for which the GNE was a proxy, and then reconnects through the remaining GNEs. GNE load balancing reduces the dependency on the launch
GNE and DCC bandw